Optima XR200amx/XR220amx Exclusive System Manual: Front Cover

Front cover
GE Healthcare
Optima XR200amx/XR220amx
Exclusive System Manual
GE EXCLUSIVE USE ONLY

Restricted To GE Healthcare.
This Material is the property of GE Healthcare and contains
information that is restricted to use by GE Healthcare Manufacturing,
Engineering and Service personnel. Any reproduction in whole or in
part is strictly prohibited. Neither this material nor any information
contained herein shall be disclosed to anyone outside of GE
Healthcare Manufacturing, Engineering and Service personnel.

If you are not a GE Healthcare Employee, you must exit this material
now.
Direction 5336120-1EN, Rev 9

GE HEALTHCARE
Warning OPTIMA XR200AMX/XR220AMX EXCLUSIVE SYSTEM MANUAL
REVISION 9 DIRECTION 5336120-1EN
ATTENTION
LES APPAREILS A RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX A LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEUR
SI LES MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES
Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de sécurité les plus severes, la source de rayonnement X
représente un danger lorsque le manipulateur est non qualifié ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement
X entraîne des dommages a l’organisme. Par conséquent, toutes les précautions doivent être prises pour éviter que les
personnes non autorisées ou non qualifées utilisent cet appareil créant ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour elles-
mêmes. Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifiées et autorisées à se servir de cet appareil doivent se
renseigner sur les mesures de protection etablies par la Commission Internationale sur la Protection Radiologique,
Annales 26: Recommandations de la Commission Internationale sure la Protection Radiologique et les normes
nationales en vigueur.
WARNING
X-RAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS MEASURES OF
PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED.
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x-ray beam
becomes a source of danger in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to x-radiation
causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this
equipment or exposing themselves or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the
Recommendations of the International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP), contained in Annals Number 26
of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.
ATENCION
LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADOR CUANDO LAS
NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS
Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas, la radiacion X constituye un peligro
al ser manipulado por personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una explosicion excesiva a la radiación X puede
causar daños al organismo.
Por consiguiente, se deberán tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o
no autorizadas utilicen este aparato, lo que seria un peligro para los demás y para si mismas.
Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, deberán
informarse sobre las normas de protección fijadas por la Comisión Internacional de la Protección Radiológica, Anales
No 26: Recomendaciones de la Comisión Internacional sobre la Protección Radiológica y normas nacionales.
ACHTUNG
RÖNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FUR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL, WENN DIE
GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN
Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den
Händen unbefugter oder unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle.
Übermäßige Röntgenbestrahlung ist für den menschlichen Organismus schädlish.
Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daßunbefugte oder unqualifizierte
Personen solche Geräte bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen können.
Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats solite sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden
Kriterien für den gefahrlosen Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfältiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 26 der Internationalen
Kommission für Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertraut machen: Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission für
Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehörden.
Page 2 Warning
GE HEALTHCARE OPTIMA XR200AMX/XR220AMX EXCLUSIVE SYSTEM MANUAL
Important information
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

(EN) • If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the customer's
responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been consulted and is
understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient from
electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Tова упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.
(BG) • Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на клиента е да
осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали упътването за
работа.
• неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на доставчика на
услугата, оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар, механична или друга опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式的伤
害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受傷。
UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.
(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj servisni
priručnik.
• zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili pacijenta uslijed
strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

(CS) • V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je zajištění překladu do
odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod a pochopili jeho
obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního servisu,
obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respektive vlivem mechanických
či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.
(DA) • Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens ansvar at sørge
for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk stød,
mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
Preface Page 3
WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

(NL) • Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoordelijk voor de
vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding werd
geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de operator of
een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok, mechanische of andere
gevaren.
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles
(ET) • Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastutab klient
tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga tutvumist ja
sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või patsiendi vigastamist
elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.
(FI) • Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia, tarvittavan
käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteiston käyttäjän tai
potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.
(FR) • Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'anglais, il incombe
au client de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance
n'a pas été consulté et compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur ou le patient
des blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
(DE) • Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des Kunden für eine
entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und
verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendiensttechnikers, des
Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren
kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.
(EL) • Εάν ο τεχνικός σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός των αγγλικών,
αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει τις υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό αν δεν έχετε συμβουλευτεί και
κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός στον τεχνικό
σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.
(HU) • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége a fordítás
elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben leírtakat nem
értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg áramütés,
mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.
(IS) • Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það skylda
viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda eða sjúklings frá
raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
Page 4 Preface
AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

(IT) • Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente è tenuto a
provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il presente manuale
ed averne compreso il contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto alla
manutenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti meccanici o altri
rischi.
このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA)  サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業者の責任で行
うものとさせていただきます。
 このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでください。
この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、感電や機械
的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .
(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우 , 번역 서비스를 제공하는 것은 고객의
책임입니다 .
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지 마십시오 .
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크 , 기계적 위험 , 또는 기타 위험으로 인해 서비스 제공자
, 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다 .
BRÎDINÂJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.
(LV) • Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta pienākums ir
nodrošināt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena, mehānisku vai
citu faktoru izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.
(LT) • Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo paslaugas
privalo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio
eksploatavimo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento sužalojimai dėl
elektros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.
(NO) • Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar å sørge for
oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren, operatøren eller
pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.
(PL) • Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi tłumaczenia jest
obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręcznikiem
serwisowym i zrozumienia go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisanta, operatora
lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia mechanicznego bądź innego.
AVISO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.
(PT-BR) • Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao cliente
fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência
técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou paciente
decorrentes de choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.
(PT-PT) • Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idioma, é da
responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência
técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do operador ou
do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
Preface Page 5
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

(RO) • Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză, este de datoria
clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui manual de
service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului sau pacientului
în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на английском языке.
(RU) • Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на английском, а на
каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к данному
руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому, что
специалист по техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар электрическим током,
механическую травму или другое повреждение
UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.
(SR) • Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi prevodilačke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca ili pacijenta
usled strujnog udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.
(SK) • Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie
prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb, obsluhujúcej
osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné ohrozenie.
ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.
(ES) • Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el inglés, el cliente
deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido este manual de
servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios, el
operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra
naturaleza.
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska. .
(SV) • Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar kunden för att
tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här
servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på serviceteknikern,
operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror eller andra faror.
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.
(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka zagotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali drugih
nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DİKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.
(TR) • Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep ederse, bunu
tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen, operatör
veya hastanın yaralanmasına yol açabilir.
Page 6 Preface
Legal notes
TRADEMARKS
Optima XR200amxTM and Optima XR220amxTM are trademarks of GE Healthcare. WPA and WPA2
are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. All other products and their name brands are trademarks of
their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All material copyright © 2011 by General Electric Company, Inc. All rights reserved. The material
presented and contained herein may not be reproduced in any form or manner, without the written
permission of General Electric Company, Inc.
Preface Page 7
Important precautions
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation
“damage in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted
or “signed for” by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or
concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event,
within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A
transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this
14 day period.
To file a report, call 1-800-548-3366. Select the option for “Install Support Services for FOA and
MIS.” Contact your local service coordinator for more information on this process.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared
for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds
into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other
connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by
qualified GE Healthcare personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical
installations) are highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In
performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field
engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the
applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to
perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
IMPORTANT...X-RAY PROTECTION
X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein
contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment
before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. GE Healthcare will be glad to assist and
cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the
useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any
practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any
persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that anyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully
acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements (NCRP) as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910
Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission
on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that GE Healthcare, its agents, and representatives
have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective materials and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be
used.
Page 8 Preface
LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENT
DANGER - Risk of Explosion

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
ATTENTION - Danger d’Explosion

Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a replacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type
recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rébut les batteries
usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
TECHNICAL MANUAL UPDATES

When operating or servicing GE Healthcare products, please contact your GE representative for
the latest revision of product documentation. Product documentation may also be available on-line
at the GE Healthcare support documentation library.
OMISSIONS AND ERRORS

Customers, please contact your GE Healthcare sales or service representatives.
GE personnel, please use the GE Healthcare complaint handling process to report all omissions,
errors, and defects in this publication.
Preface Page 9
Revision history
Revision Date Reason for change

1 30SEP2011 Initial release of document.
Updated Regulatory Testing chapter. Refer to SPR HCSDM00103500.
Validation updates Refer to SPRs: HCSDM00103500, HCSDM00104175,
HCSDM00104185, HCSDM00104239, HCSDM00104254, HCSDM00104548,
2 28OCT2011 HCSDM00105014, HCSDM00105016, HCSDM00105017, HCSDM00105018,
HCSDM00105259, HCSDM00105262, HCSDM00105479, HCSDM00105537
3 09NOV2011 Updated Load From Cold sections. Refer to SPR HCSDM0010749.
Validation updates. Refer to SPRs: HCSDM00108056, HCSDM00108058,
4 14NOV2011 HCSDM00108059, HCSDM00108068, HCSDM00108075, HCSDM00108076,
HCSDM00108095, HCSDM00108096, HCSDM00108097, HCSDM00108098
5 17NOV2011 Validation updates. Refer to SPRs: HCSDM00109056, HCSDM00109082
6 05DEC2011 Validation updates. Refer to SPR HCSDM00111281.
Added Chapter 4, Section 4.14 - IP Address Change Procedure.
Added Chapter 4, Section 4.3.1 - Identifying MAC Addresses.
Added Note to Chapter 3, Sections 3.2.1.2.1 (after step 14) and 3.2.1.2.2 (after step
7 05FEB2012 15) on changing the Internal IP Address.
Updated Chapter 9, Section 9.5.16.3 (step 15) to correct wiring connection from NO
to NC.
Refer to SPR HCSDM00120703.
Page 10 Preface
Revision Date Reason for change

Added "Perform QAP" step to Finalization Sections 9.6.2.4, 9.6.3.4, 9.6.5.4, 9.6.6.4,
9.6.7.4, 9.6.8.4, 9.6.9.4, 9.6.15.4. Refer to SPR HCSDM00140842.
8 26JUL2012
Updated Chapter 9, Sections 9.4.1 - Drive Wheel and 9.4.4 - Front Caster to show
proper lifting/supporting of unit. Refer to TrackWise 8111422.
Updated Chapter 9, Section 9.6.5 - Tube mount - detent side (cathode side) and
Section 9.6.6 - Tube mount - friction side (anode side) to show new version of tube
mounts. Refer to ECO 2122380.
Added text to front material on how to obtain most recent revisions of technical
manuals. Satisfies FDA recommendation.
Removed PM Checklist and added note to access Class M checklist on CDL. Updated
9 28SEP2012 PM Procedures to add hand switch visual inspection, functional checks, cleaning and
3-year replacement. Refer to CAPA 5970812.
Added ’Detector firmware download’ procedure to the System Data & Software
chapter. Refer to SPR HCSDM00157822.
Updated Chapter 7, Section 7.1.6.1 Step 4 to "Verify that the selected kVp and mAs
are displayed in the protocol modification frames and the left side of the status bar.
Both displays should match." Refer to TrackWise 8987140.
Preface Page 11
Page 12 Preface
Preface publication conventions
Preface Publication Conventions

Standardized conventions for representing information is a uniform way of communicating
information to a reader in a consistent manner. Conventions are used so that the reader can easily
recognize the actions or decisions that must be made. There are a number of character and
paragraph styles used in this publication to accomplish this task. Please become familiar with them
before proceeding forward.
It is important that you read and understand hazard statements, and not just ignore them.
Safety & Hazard Information

Proper product safety labeling allows a person to safely use or service a product. The format and
style for safety communications reflected in this publication represents the harmonization of IEC/
ISO 3864 and ANSI Z535 standards.
Within this publication, different paragraph and character styles are used to indicated potential
hazards. Paragraph prefixes, such as hazard, caution, danger and warning, are used to identify
important safety information. Text (Hazard) styles are applied to the paragraph contents that are
applicable to each specific safety statement.
Hazard Messages
Any action that will, could or potentially cause personal injury will be preceded by the safety alert
symbol and an appropriate signal word. The safety alert symbol is the triangle with an exclamation
mark within it. It Is always used next to the signal word to indicate the severity of the hazard.
Together, they are used to indicate a hazard exists.
Signal words describe the severity of possible human injures that may be encountered. The alert
symbol and signal word are placed immediately before any paragraph they affect. Safety
information includes:
1.) Signal Word - The seriousness level of the hazard.
2.) Symbol or Pictorial - The consequence of interaction with the hazard.
3.) Word Message:
a.) The nature of the hazard (i.e. the type of hazard)
b.) How to avoid the hazard.
The safety alert symbol is not used when an action can only cause equipment damage.
Text Format of Signal Words

DANGER - INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF
NOT AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. THIS SIGNAL
WORD IS LIMITED TO THE MOST EXTREME SITUATIONS.
WARNING - INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT
AVOIDED, COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
Caution - Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
NOTICE - Indicates information or a company policy that relates directly or indirectly to the
safety of personnel or protection of property. This signal word is associated directly with a
hazard or hazardous situation and is used in place of 'DANGER,' 'WARNING,' or 'CAUTION.'
It can include:
Preface Page 13
• Destruction of a disk drive

• Potential for internal mechanical damage, such as to a X-ray tube
Symbols and Pictorials Used

The following Symbols and Pictorials are be used in this publication. These graphical icons
(symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause
harm.
keep_up magnetic biohazard compressgas ppe-hearing
fragile impact corrosive heavyobject ppe-2people
static_elec heat general laser ppe-respitory
keep_dry pinch radiation poisongas ppe-loto
general explosive electrical flammable ppe-eye
torque crush/mechanical tipping Read Manual ppe-gloves
ce instuction poisonmatl entanglement instuction
Page 14 Preface
Publication Conventions
General Paragraph and Character Styles
Prefixes are used to highlight important non-safety related information. Paragraph prefixes (such
as Purpose, Example, Comment or Note) are used to identify important but non-safety related
information. Text styles are also applied to text within each paragraph modified by the specific
prefix.
EXAMPLES OF PREFIXES USED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION:

Purpose: Introduces and provides meaning as to the information contained within the chapter,
section or subsection (such as used at the beginning this chapter, for example).
Note: Conveys information that should be considered important to the reader.
Example: Used to make the reader aware that the paragraph(s) that follow are examples of information
possibly stated previously.
Comment: Represents “additional” information that may or may not be relevant to your situation.
Page Layout
Publication Part Number & Revision Number Publication Title
The current section and its title The current chapter and its title
are always shown in the footer of are always shown in the footer of
the left (even) page. the right (odd) page.
An exclamation point in a triangle is used Paragraphs preceeded by a symbol
to indicate important information to the user. (e.g. bullets) contain information that
Paragraphs preceeded by Alphanumeric has no specific order.
characters (e.g. numbers) contain infor-
mation that must be followed in a specific order.
Headers and footers in this publication are designed to allow you to quickly identify your location.
The document part number and revision number appears in every header on every page. Odd
numbered page footers indicate the current chapter, its title and current page number. Even page
footers show the current section and its title, as well as the current page number.
Preface Page 15
Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles

Within this publication, mono-spaced character styles (fonts) are used to indicate computer text
that’s either screen input and output. Mono-spaced fonts, such courier, are used to indicated text
direction. When you type at your keyboard, you are generating computer input. Occasionally you
will see the math operator “greater-than” and “less-than” symbols used to indicate the start and
finish of variable output. When reading text generated by the computer, you are reading it as
computer generated output. In addition to direction, characters are italicized (e.g. italics) to indicate
information specific to your system or site.
Example: Fixed This paragraph’s font represents computer generated screen “fixed”
Output output. Its output is fixed from the sense that it does not vary from
application to application. It is the most commonly used style used to
indicate filenames, paths and text that do not change from system to
system. The character style used is a fixed width such as courier.
Example: This paragraph’s font represents computer screen output that is
Variable Output “variable”. It is used to represent output that varies from application
to application or system to system. Variable output is sometimes found
placed between greater-than and less-than operators for clarification.
For example: <variable_ouput> or <3.45.120.3>. In both cases, the < and
> operators are not part of the actual input.
Example: Fixed This paragraph’s font represents fixed input. It is computer input that
Input is typed-in via the keyboard. Typed input that does not vary from
application to application or system to system. Fixed text the user is
required to supply as input. For example: cd /usr/3p
Example: This paragraph’s font represents computer input that can vary from
Variable Input application to application or system to system. With variable text, the
user is required to supply system dependent input or information. Variable
input sometimes is placed between greater-than and less-than operators.
For example: <variable_input>. In these cases, the (<>) operators would
be dropped prior to input. For example: ypcat hosts | grep <3.45.120.3>
would be typed into the computer as:
ypcat hosts | grep 3.45.120.3
without the greater-than and less-than operators.
Buttons, Switches and Keyboard Inputs (Hard & Soft Keys)

Different character styles are used to indicate actions requiring the reader to press either a hard or
soft button, switch or key. Physical hardware, such as buttons and switches, are called hard keys
because they are hard wired or mechanical in nature. A keyboard or on/off switch would be a hard
key. Software or computer generated buttons are called soft keys because they are software
generated. Software driven menu buttons are an example of such keys. Soft and hard keys are
represented differently in this publication.
Example: Hard A power switch ON/OFF or a keyboard key like ENTER is indicated by applying a character style
Keys that uses both over and under-lined bold text that is bold. This is a hard key.
Example: Soft Whereas the computer MENU button that you would click with your mouse or touch with your hand
Keys uses over and under-lined regular text. This is a soft key.
Page 16 Preface
Table of contents
Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin............................................................. 23
Section 1.1 Energy sources........................................................................... 23
Section 1.2 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) procedure for electrical power ..... 24
1.2.1 Preparing for LOTO...................................................................................................... 24
1.2.2 Performing LOTO ......................................................................................................... 26
1.2.3 Returning system to service ......................................................................................... 29
Section 1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) ................................................... 30
1.3.1 Important ESD considerations when working on a mobile system .............................. 30
1.3.2 Generating static .......................................................................................................... 30
1.3.3 Personal grounding methods and equipment .............................................................. 31
1.3.4 Grounding the work area.............................................................................................. 31
1.3.5 Recommended materials and equipment .................................................................... 32
Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance.................................................................... 33

Section 2.1 Before you begin ........................................................................ 33
Section 2.2 Planned maintenance schedule ................................................ 33
Section 2.3 System performance .................................................................. 33
Section 2.4 Planned maintenance procedures ............................................ 33
2.4.1 Before you begin - safety precautions.......................................................................... 33
2.4.2 Tools required .............................................................................................................. 33
2.4.3 PM Checklist ................................................................................................................ 34
2.4.4 PM Procedures ............................................................................................................ 35
Chapter 3 System data and software ............................................................ 43

Section 3.1 Backing up system data ............................................................ 43
3.1.1 What is included in a system backup? ......................................................................... 43
3.1.2 Performing a system backup........................................................................................ 43
Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC) ........................................... 44
3.2.1 Loading or upgrading system software ........................................................................ 44
Section 3.3 Performing a FW Load From Cold (LFC).................................. 46
Section 3.4 Restoring generator firmware only........................................... 47
Section 3.5 Detector firmware download ..................................................... 47
Section 3.6 Restoring system data ............................................................... 48
3.6.1 Before you begin .......................................................................................................... 48
3.6.2 Restoring system data ................................................................................................. 48
Section 3.7 System self recovery.................................................................. 49
Table of Contents Page 17

Chapter 4 Configuration ................................................................................. 53

Section 4.1 When should I configure the system?...................................... 53
Section 4.2 Class M access ........................................................................... 54
Section 4.3 Using the System Configuration Tool (SUIF)........................... 54
4.3.1 Identifying MAC Addresses.......................................................................................... 54
4.3.2 Site configuration ......................................................................................................... 55
4.3.3 Networking configuration.............................................................................................. 56
4.3.4 General configuration ................................................................................................... 56
4.3.5 Hardware configuration ................................................................................................ 57
4.3.6 Generator configuration ............................................................................................... 57
4.3.7 Wireless configuration .................................................................................................. 58
4.3.8 Options configuration ................................................................................................... 60
4.3.9 Enabling purchased options in the SUIF ...................................................................... 62
4.3.10 InSite configuration .................................................................................................... 62
4.3.11 PNF configuration ...................................................................................................... 63
4.3.12 Time Server configuration .......................................................................................... 65
4.3.13 Secure Login configuration ........................................................................................ 66
Section 4.4 Changing Auto Protocol Assist settings.................................. 67
Section 4.5 DICOM connectivity configuration............................................ 68
4.5.1 Network host configuration........................................................................................... 68
4.5.2 Printer configuration ..................................................................................................... 71
Section 4.6 Image management .................................................................... 73
Section 4.7 Image processing ....................................................................... 73
4.7.1 Enabling EMI reduction ................................................................................................ 73
4.7.2 Configuring EMI reduction parameters ........................................................................ 73
Section 4.8 Loading demo images................................................................ 74
4.8.1 Loading images from CD ............................................................................................. 75
Section 4.9 Installing the Operator Manual.................................................. 75
Section 4.10 Login and user management..................................................... 76
Section 4.11 Installing hardware options....................................................... 76
4.11.1 Installing the barcode reader...................................................................................... 76
4.11.2 Configuring the barcode reader ................................................................................. 79
4.11.3 Installing the Dose Area Product (DAP) meter........................................................... 82
Section 4.12 Importing custom IP looks from Definium AMX 700 ............... 86
Section 4.13 Enabling Advanced Service mode............................................ 87
4.13.1 Enabling Advanced Service operation ....................................................................... 88
4.13.2 Verifying Advanced Service operation ....................................................................... 88
Section 4.14 IP Address Change Procedure.................................................. 89
4.14.1 Snapshot Tool Configuration...................................................................................... 89
Chapter 5 Calibration...................................................................................... 99
Section 5.1 Preparing for calibrations.......................................................... 99
Page 18 Table of Contents

5.1.1 Saving changes............................................................................................................ 99

Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration ............................................................ 99
5.2.1 Calibrating the touchscreen ......................................................................................... 99
Section 5.3 Generator calibration ............................................................... 100
5.3.1 Setting filament drive level ......................................................................................... 100
5.3.2 Viewing and resetting tube and generator usage data............................................... 101
Section 5.4 Detector calibration.................................................................. 101
5.4.1 Executing bad pixel and gain calibrations .................................................................. 101
Section 5.5 Image quality calibration ......................................................... 103
5.5.1 Calibrating the printer ................................................................................................. 103
Section 5.6 Hardware calibration ................................................................ 104
5.6.1 Drive handle calibration.............................................................................................. 104
5.6.2 Touch screen calibration ............................................................................................ 104
Section 5.7 PACS image tests..................................................................... 104
5.7.1 Comparing PACS test images ................................................................................... 104
5.7.2 Determining PACS burn/no-burn configuration .......................................................... 105
5.7.3 Optional PACS tests .................................................................................................. 109
5.7.4 PACS image comparison results ............................................................................... 111
Chapter 6 Mechanical adjustment procedures .......................................... 113

Section 6.1 Column related assemblies ..................................................... 113
6.1.1 Column balance procedure ........................................................................................ 113
6.1.2 Tube latch to arm pin adjustment procedure.............................................................. 116
6.1.3 Column rotational detent procedure........................................................................... 119
Chapter 7 Regulatory testing ....................................................................... 123

Section 7.1 U.S. federally required tests .................................................... 123
7.1.1 Required test equipmentte ......................................................................................... 123
7.1.2 Preparing for testing................................................................................................... 123
7.1.3 Collimator testing ....................................................................................................... 124
7.1.4 Generator tests .......................................................................................................... 130
7.1.5 Beam Quality Test...................................................................................................... 137
7.1.6 Testing generator operator indicators ........................................................................ 139
Section 7.2 Testing electrical safety........................................................... 139
7.2.1 Performing ground resistance testing ........................................................................ 139
7.2.2 Performing leakage current testing ............................................................................ 149
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 153

Section 8.1 System self recovery................................................................ 153
Section 8.2 Performing diagnostics ........................................................... 155
8.2.1 Running diagnostics on the system ........................................................................... 155
Section 8.3 Boundary Scan ......................................................................... 161
8.3.1 Boundary Scan (Bscan) overview .............................................................................. 161

8.3.2 Bscan toolbar definitions ............................................................................................ 163

8.3.3 Installing and configuring Bscan ................................................................................ 163
8.3.4 Using Bscan ............................................................................................................... 169
8.3.5 Generating a report .................................................................................................... 173
8.3.6 Sync database ........................................................................................................... 176
Section 8.4 Djinn Generator Troubleshooting ........................................... 176
8.4.1 Definitions .................................................................................................................. 176
8.4.2 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 177
8.4.3 FRUs for Beetle Djinn Generator ............................................................................... 178
8.4.4 Error Code Structure .................................................................................................. 182
8.4.5 Diagnostics................................................................................................................. 183
8.4.6 Error Code Handling and Actions............................................................................... 184
8.4.7 List of diagnostics and Field Engineers actions ......................................................... 248
8.4.8 Annex 1 : Djinn Beetle Interconnection ...................................................................... 264
8.4.9 Annex 2 : Description of Djinn Beetle Errors .............................................................. 265
Section 8.5 FlashPad Detector Troubleshooting....................................... 269
8.5.1 Detector Overview...................................................................................................... 272
8.5.2 Failure Modes ............................................................................................................ 286
8.5.3 Detector Diagnostics and Troubleshooting ................................................................ 287
Chapter 9 Replacement procedures............................................................ 313

Section 9.1 Cover management .................................................................. 313
9.1.1 Side cover removal .................................................................................................... 314
9.1.2 Top cover removal ..................................................................................................... 314
9.1.3 Front cover removal ................................................................................................... 316
9.1.4 Front bin removal ....................................................................................................... 320
9.1.5 Rear bin removal........................................................................................................ 321
9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal........................................................................................ 324
9.1.7 Tube head cover removal .......................................................................................... 325
Section 9.2 Cable replacement.................................................................... 326
9.2.1 General cable replacement ........................................................................................ 326
9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement................................................................................. 331
9.2.3 "Super cable" 5557068 cable replacement ................................................................ 340
Section 9.3 Software Load From Cold........................................................ 342
Section 9.4 Base assembly.......................................................................... 343
9.4.1 Drive wheel ................................................................................................................ 343
9.4.2 Battery packs ............................................................................................................. 347
9.4.3 Front bumper assembly or bumper switch ................................................................. 352
9.4.4 Front caster ................................................................................................................ 355
9.4.5 Spring applied brake (column rotational brake) ......................................................... 360
9.4.6 Rear bin kickplate....................................................................................................... 363
9.4.7 Rear bin mounting bracket - Optima XR200amx only ................................................ 365
9.4.8 Motor brake and motor reducer assembly ................................................................. 367
9.4.9 Caterpillar base transition board ................................................................................ 370
Section 9.5 Thorax assembly ...................................................................... 372
9.5.1 Spyder system controller............................................................................................ 372
9.5.2 Locust drive board...................................................................................................... 374

9.5.3 Locust drive board fuses ............................................................................................ 375

9.5.4 Firefly charger board .................................................................................................. 377
9.5.5 Firefly board fuses...................................................................................................... 379
9.5.6 Cricket battery board.................................................................................................. 381
9.5.7 Cricket board fuses .................................................................................................... 383
9.5.8 Hornet UIF board ....................................................................................................... 385
9.5.9 Drive login active board collector ............................................................................... 387
9.5.10 Top cover or display & inverter collector .................................................................. 389
9.5.11 Board data module................................................................................................... 393
9.5.12 System PC ............................................................................................................... 394
9.5.13 Wireless USB host radio board ................................................................................ 397
9.5.14 Whip antenna ........................................................................................................... 398
9.5.15 Digital detector ......................................................................................................... 400
9.5.16 Detector bin park switch........................................................................................... 401
9.5.17 Detector charge cable assembly.............................................................................. 403
9.5.18 Detector bin shock absorber .................................................................................... 405
9.5.19 Docking connector: detector side ............................................................................. 407
9.5.20 Beetle Djinn set of cables......................................................................................... 409
9.5.21 Djinn 15kW Auxiliary module ................................................................................... 411
9.5.22 Djinn power module ................................................................................................. 414
9.5.23 Djinn HV tank ........................................................................................................... 416
9.5.24 Djinn 30kW auxiliary module .................................................................................... 419
9.5.25 Drive handle assembly ............................................................................................. 421
9.5.26 Mantis power supply ................................................................................................ 424
9.5.27 EMI filter ................................................................................................................... 426
9.5.28 LVLE2 ...................................................................................................................... 429
9.5.29 Power cord reel ........................................................................................................ 432
9.5.30 AC power plug.......................................................................................................... 434
9.5.31 AC fuse holder ......................................................................................................... 437
9.5.32 AC fuses................................................................................................................... 439
9.5.33 Power switch assembly............................................................................................ 442
9.5.34 Overlay board assembly .......................................................................................... 445
9.5.35 Tube park latch assembly, switch or solenoid.......................................................... 447
9.5.36 Digital power supply assembly................................................................................. 453
9.5.37 Collimator lamp power supply .................................................................................. 455
9.5.38 Main circuit breaker and cable assembly ................................................................. 456
9.5.39 Front bin and inner front bin ..................................................................................... 461
Section 9.6 Column, horizontal arm, X-ray tube, collimator..................... 463
9.6.1 Engaging vertical lock ................................................................................................ 463
9.6.2 Column....................................................................................................................... 466
9.6.3 Horizontal arm assembly............................................................................................ 470
9.6.4 Horizontal arm brake cable assembly with track ........................................................ 474
9.6.5 Tube mount - detent side (cathode side) ................................................................... 480
9.6.6 Tube mount - friction side (anode side)...................................................................... 484
9.6.7 Tube yoke assembly .................................................................................................. 488
9.6.8 Toshiba X-ray tube..................................................................................................... 493
9.6.9 Collimator ................................................................................................................... 497
9.6.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter.............................................................................. 504
9.6.11 SID tape measure .................................................................................................... 506
9.6.12 Collimator adjustment knob...................................................................................... 508

9.6.13 Collimator pointer ..................................................................................................... 509

9.6.14 Collimator lamp ........................................................................................................ 512
9.6.15 Collimator rotation lock finger................................................................................... 516
Appendix A Printer Configuration Information............................................... 519

Agfa Drystar 3000 printer parameters .......................................................... 519
Agfa Drystar 5500 printer parameters .......................................................... 522
Codonics Horizon printer parameters .......................................................... 524
Fuji FM DPL printer parameters .................................................................... 526
Fuji DryPix 1000 printer parameters ............................................................. 528
Kodak 8200 printer parameters .................................................................... 533
Konica Dry Pro 793 printer parameters ....................................................... 540
Glossary ................................................................................................................543

Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin
Section 1.1 Energy sources
Table 1-1
Energy source Yes/No Location of energy Magnitude of energy

isolating means
Electrical Yes AC power plug 120 VAC/60Hz
220 VAC/50Hz
Electrical Yes Circuit breaker 156VDC
Electrical (batteries) Yes Battery board 156VDC
connector J1
Pneumatic No n/a n/a
Hydraulic No n/a n/a
Gas/water/steam No n/a n/a
Chemical No n/a n/a
Mechanical motion No n/a n/a
Gravity No n/a n/a
Rear suspension spring No n/a n/a
Column spring Yes Scroll lock at 610 N-m (5400 in-lbs)
top of column
Thermal No n/a n/a
Stored energy (generator Yes Time discharge and 15kW generator: 2200J
capacitors) DVM verification 30kW generator: 8800J
Air under pressure No n/a n/a
Oil under pressure No n/a n/a
Water under pressure No n/a n/a
Gas under pressure No n/a n/a
Steam No n/a n/a
Other No n/a n/a
Type of equipment and/or method selected to dissipate or isolate stored energy:

- Allow three minutes for stored energy to dissipate. Stored energy is indicated by safety
lamps on the generator Aux boxes.
- After waiting period, verify dissipation with volt meter.
Type of equipment and/or method used to ensure disconnections:

- One lock and tag for each electrical power source
- Multiple locking device
Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin Page 23

Section 1.2 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) procedure for electrical

power
Name of equipment: Optima XR200amx/Optima XR220amx
Number of locks: 3
Title of employees authorized to perform LOTO: Those trained in LOTO
Title of affected employees and how to notify: Hospital personnel, notified by verbal communication
1.2.1 Preparing for LOTO

1. Have this equipment on hand:
- Safety glasses
- Voltage meter
- LOTO kit 5421892, contains (see Figure 1-1):
* 3 brass padlocks and identification labels
* 3 LOTO tag packages (25 tags per package)
* 1 electrical plug lockout device 110V - for AC power plug
* 2 electrical plug lockout devices 160VDC - for battery connectors
* 1 nylon carry bag
Figure 1-1 LOTO kit contents
Page 24 Section 1.2 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) procedure for electrical power
2. Locate the AC power plug (E1), system circuit breaker (E2), and battery connectors (E3). See
Figure 1-2.
E2
E1
E3
Figure 1-2 Electrical energy lockout locations

1.2.2 Performing LOTO

1. Notify all affected personnel working in the area that LOTO is being performed.
2. Exit all system software.
3. Turn off the Optima XR200amx/Optima XR220amx system by pressing the power button and
holding it for several seconds until the power button light ring turns blue, indicating that the
system is shutting down.
4. When the power light ring begins to blink blue, indicating that the system is in standby, switch
the circuit breaker (E2) to the OFF position. See Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 Circuit breaker (E2) in OFF position
5. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

6. Apply an approved AC power plug locking device to the AC power plug (E1), then apply your
personal red lock and tag. See Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4 AC power plug with locking device applied
7. Wait three minutes for discharge of stored energy.

8. Disconnect the two green battery power connectors J3 and J4 and the two sense connectors
J13 and J14 from the Cricket board. Apply a locking device, then apply your personal red lock
and tag. See Figure 1-5.
1
2
Item Description
1 Battery power connectors (J3, J4)
2 Battery sense connectors (J13, J14)
Figure 1-5 Battery connectors J3/J4/J13/J14 and locking device

9. Disconnect the two green battery power connectors J1 and J2 and the two sense connectors
J11 and J12 from the Cricket board. Apply a locking device, then apply your personal red lock
and tag. See Figure 1-6.
Item Description
2 Battery sense connectors (J11, J12)
Figure 1-6 Battery connectors J1/J2/J11/J12 and locking device
10. Press the power button and verify that the system does not turn on.
11. Verify that the voltage meter is working properly by testing it on a known live voltage source
(such as a wall outlet).
12. See Figure 1-7. Verify that electrical power has been removed from the system by applying
the DC voltmeter (+) lead to connector J5 pin 1 (Item 1, left-side screw terminal) on the Cricket
board and the meter (-) lead to chassis ground (Item 2).
Item Description
1 Connect DC voltmeter (+) to J5 pin 1 (left-side screw terminal)
2 Connect DC voltmeter (-) to chassis ground
Figure 1-7 Cricket board test points
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

IF THE SYSTEM CANNOT BE LOCKED OUT, OR IF THE SYSTEM FAILS
VERIFICATION, CONTACT YOUR SUPERVISOR.
13. Perform the necessary service or repair.
1.2.3 Returning system to service

1. Notify affected personnel that LOTO devices are being removed and equipment is being re-
energized.
2. Verify that the area is safe to re-energize the equipment.
3. Verify that any safety guards or devices have been reinstalled, and replace all guards and
covers as necessary.
4. Remove tools and all non-essential equipment.
5. Verify that all personnel are clear and in a safe position.
6. Verify that all controls and switches are in the off or neutral position.

7. Remove locks and tags as appropriate.

8. Re-energize equipment and follow safe startup procedures.
9. Notify affected persons that energy has been restored.
Section 1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can destroy static
sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, but damage occurs. An
electronic device exposed to electrostatic discharge (ESD) might not appear to be affected at all
and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. The device can function normally for a while, but
it has been degraded in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy.
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, the
discharge contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.
1.3.1 Important ESD considerations when working on a mobile system
Static Discharge Risk to Components

If you are using a static mat or wrist strap, be sure to connect the mat and strap to machine ground,
not earth ground. This is necessary to isolate yourself from earth ground and equalize your
potential with the machine.
ESD damage prevention includes these steps:

1. Perform LOTO.
2. Verify that the AC plug is not connected to an energy source/outlet.
3. Connect ground mat and wrist strap assembly to frame connection point of the mobile unit.
1.3.2 Generating static

The following table shows that different activities generate different amounts of static electricity,
and that static electricity increases as humidity decreases.
Table 1-2
Relative humidity
Event
55% 40% 10%
Walking across carpet 7,500 V 15,000 V 35,000 V
Walking across vinyl floor 3,000 V 5,000 V 12,000 V
Motions of bench worker 400 V 800 V 6,000 V
Removing bubble pack from PCB 7,000 V 20,000 V 26,500 V
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box 5,000 V 11,000 V 21,000 V
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and structure determine the
degree of sensitivity. The following packaging and grounding precautions are necessary to prevent
damage to electric components and accessories.
Page 30 Section 1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

• Transport products in static-safe containers to avoid hand contact.

• Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or
packaging.
• Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free stations.
• Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their container.
• When handling or touching a sensitive component or assembly, ground yourself by touching
the chassis.
• Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
• Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or
conductive foam.
1.3.3 Personal grounding methods and equipment

This section defines a workzone that is not connected to the system under service. The mobile
system is a battery powered unit that can deliver lethal current. Ensure you are not providing an
earth ground path when practicing ESD procedures.
Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:

• Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance in the
ground cords. To provide a proper ground, wear the strap against bare skin. The ground cord
must connect snugly into the banana plug connector on the grounding mat or workstation.
• Heel, toe, and boot straps can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most
types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats, use them on both feet
with a maximum of one-megohm +/- 10% resistance between the operator and ground.
1.3.3.1 Static shielding protection levels
Table 1-3
Method Voltage
Antistatic plastic 1,500
Carbon-loaded plastic 7,500
Metalized laminate 15,000
1.3.4 Grounding the work area

To prevent static damage of components and parts in the work area:

• Cover the work surface with approved static-dissipative material. Provide a wrist strap
connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.
• Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added protection.
• Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by case or PCB laminate.
• Handle components only at static-free work areas.
• Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing connectors or test equipment.
• Use static-safe fixtures when fixtures must directly contact dissipative surfaces.
• Keep work area free of non-conductive materials, like plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam.
1.3.5 Recommended materials and equipment

Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static electricity include:
• Anti-static tape, smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors
• Conductive bins, foam, tabletop workstations with ground cord of one-megohm +/-10%
resistance, and other assembly or soldering aids
• Static-dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground
• ESD field service kits
• Static awareness labels
• Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm +/-10% resistance
• Material handling packages:
- Conductive plastic bags, plastic tubes and tote boxes
- Opaque shielding bags
- Transparent metalized shielding bags and shielding tubes
Page 32 Section 1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance
Section 2.1 Before you begin

Safe equipment performance and operation requires that personnel servicing the equipment be
fully trained on servicing medical X-ray apparatus. General Electric Company, GE Healthcare, and
its associates, maintain a world-wide organization that provides skilled X-ray service. If desired,
arrangements can usually be made to furnish periodic and/or emergency service on a contract
basis. A General Electric representative will be glad to discuss this plan.
Section 2.2 Planned maintenance schedule

The system does not require any planned maintenance (PM) to be performed for a 13 month period
following installation. PM schedules should begin in the 13th month that follows the system’s
installation anniversary date.
Following the 13th month, PM should be performed every 12 months.
The hand switch MUST be replaced at least once every 3 years.
Section 2.3 System performance

Customer discussion - Discuss the system performance with the customer to determine
if there are any existing issues.
Section 2.4 Planned maintenance procedures

2.4.1 Before you begin - safety precautions
• Never use solvents or flammable solutions to clean components.
• Never immerse any parts in water or cleaning solutions; apply any liquids to a clean cloth and
then use the cloth on the component.
• Always unplug the computer when cleaning with liquids or damp cloths.
• Always unplug the computer before cleaning the air vents.
2.4.2 Tools required

• Standard tool kit
• Dose meter
• kVp meter
• Hioki ground tester (or equivalent)
• Dale leakage current tester (or equivalent)
Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance Page 33

2.4.3 PM Checklist
The recording and submission of a PM Checklist is mandatory per GE Healthcare Service
Operations business processes. Please connect to the Common Documentation Library and
download the appropriate PM Checklist for your system.
Page 34 Section 2.4 Planned maintenance procedures

2.4.4 PM Procedures
PM procedures are divided into the following groups:
1. Visual inspection - See Table 2-1 Visual inspection on page 35.
2. Functional Checks - See Table 2-2 Functional checks on page 36.
3. Cleaning - See Table 2-3 Cleaning on page 37.
4. Calibration - See Table 2-4 Calibration on page 38.
5. HHS Tests - See 2.4.4.7 HHS tests (US-only or as required by local
regulations) on page 42.
Table 2-1 Visual inspection
Component Procedure Time Est.

Top Cover • Switch and display markings are clearly legible. < 1 min.
• Inspect touch screen and top cover surface for wear or damage.
Replace as necessary.
Collimator • Field light switch and field size knobs are not loose or damaged. 2 min.
• Guard arms are perpendicular to collimator bottom.
• SID indicating tape is attached to left side of collimator.
• Rating plate is installed on right side of collimator.
• Rating plate is legible.
• Rotation Lock is secure and undamaged.
• Must be no movement between collimator and tube unit.
• Inspect collimator rail stop and plate spring release hardware.
X-ray Tube • Tube Focal Spot label is present (remove top Tube cover) 10 min.
Body • Drive handle is free from sharp edges. 5 min.
• Tube support column is tight and solid in its mounting.
• Inspect wheels for damage.
• Verify external covers are properly secured.
• Inspect and tighten any loose fasteners.
External Cables • Inspect cables for damage. < 1 min.
System Rating Plates • Verify all rating plates are present and legible. 1 min.
- X-ray control, Generator, X-ray tube (on the outside of the unit,
next to the main breaker switch).
- Beam limiting device (on the side of the collimator).
User Interface • Inspect for damage. 5 min.
• Verify that all labels are legible.
• Verify that all LEDs are functional.
Power Cord • Verify good condition of power cord reel, cord and plug. 15 min.
Hand Switch • Inspect the cord for nicks, cuts or severe pinching of the cord sheath 2 min.
and exposed wires at the RJ 11 connector due to sheath damage. If
any of these conditions are observed, replace the cord.
• Inspect the hand switch for accumulation of dirt, contrast material,
damage to the plastic housing or loosening in the plastic housing.

Table 2-2 Functional checks

Hand Switch • Repeatedly press the hand switch buttons (exposure/prepare button 2 min
and collimator button) to check that the switch moves smoothly from
inactive to active positions.
• Replace the hand switch if the buttons motion is not smooth or if
buttons are sticking.
• NOTE: The hand switch MUST be replaced at least once in every
3 years.
Charging • Plug unit into power outlet. 1 min.
• Power Button is undamaged and illuminates correctly.
• Confirm that battery level indicator on top cover is flashing.
• Unplug unit from power outlet.
Top Cover • Verify that ambient light sensor is functional by covering sensor with < 1 min.
finger and verifying that the screen dims.
Drive • Drives forward, reverse, left, and right. 20 min.
• Drive speed is easily controlled.
• Inspect bumpers, remove any trapped items.
• Drives only in reverse when bumper is pushed in.
• Drive forward is inhibited when bumper is pushed in. Test bumper
activation from four directions: left-front, right-front, left-side, right-side
• Drive speed reduced when tube arm is removed from latch.
• Drive speed reduced when a tethered detector is not in the bin and full
speed when the detector is parked in the bin.
• Drive brakes release when emergency brake release switch is
depressed.
Tube column and arm • Horizontal tube arm latch operates smoothly and holds arm securely. 5 min.
• Vertical tube column rotates 270° from latch position to latch position.
• Tube arm moves smoothly from bottom to top of vertical column.
• Tube arm extends and retracts smoothly.
• Tube unit rotates 90° to horizontal in both directions.
• Tube unit rotates back 10° and forward 110°.
• Latch holds column in drive position.
• Lock prevents vertical travel.
• Lock prevents tube extension.
• Lock prevents column rotation.

Table 2-2 Functional checks

Collimator • Collimator interface plate is securely fastened to the X-ray tube. If not, 15 min.
DO NOT USE. Service is required.
• Verify that three brass tabs hold collimator securely to the collimator
interface plate. If not, DO NOT USE. Service is required.
• SID tape extends to 6 ft (1830 mm).
• SID tape retracts automatically.
• Pressing field light buttons on handswitch or on collimator turns field
light on.
• Rotational detent knob (right side of collimator) must be unscrewed
counter-clockwise to rotate collimator.
• Tightening rotational detent knob clockwise will secure collimator in
any position.
• Collimator rotates 90° from center to either side.
• Rotational detent knob engages at center and at 90° either side from
center. Replace rotational detent knob assembly if excessive
rotational movement is present.
• Moving transverse (lateral) and longitudinal field sizing knobs moves
the respective collimator blades.
X-ray Caution: Radiation Hazard 3 min.
Unit must be in a location where X-rays can be made safely.
• Close collimator blades and move tube arm to its lowest position.
• Select lowest kVp and mAs settings.
• Pressing the X-ray hand switch button to the first position causes the
tube anode to rotate.
• Pressing the X-ray hand switch button to the second position makes
an exposure. The X-ray tone sounds and X-ray On indicator lights.
• Dose report: After exposure, observe that the dose is reported on the
technique screen (if DAP is present).
Generator • Test the thermal overload interlock. See 2.4.4.1 Test the thermal 20 min.
overload interlock on page 39.
Ground Resistance • PM item to be completed minimum yearly or as specified by customer. 20 min.
Ground resistance test. See 7.2.1 Performing ground resistance
testing on page 139.
Leakage Test • PM item to be completed minimum yearly or as specified by customer. 20 min.
Leakage test. See 7.2.2 Performing leakage current testing on
page 149.
Table 2-3 Cleaning

Touchscreen • See 2.4.4.4 Clean touchscreen. 2 min.
Film cassette bin • Remove debris from bin. 5 min.
(Optima XR200amx
only)
Hand Switch • See 2.4.4.6 Hand switch cleaning and disinfecting. 5 min.

Table 2-3 Cleaning

Digital detector See 2.4.4.3 Clean digital detector, tether, and grid (Optima XR220amx and 5 min.
(Optima XR220amx Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only) on page 40.
only)
Visual inspection of detector, tether and grid for damage, wear, labelling, <1 min.
etc.
PC See 2.4.4.2 Clean PC cooling vents on page 40. 20 min.
Barcode reader See 2.4.4.5 Clean barcode reader window (if applicable) - Optima 2 min.
(optional - for Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only on page 41.
XR220amx and
Optima XR200amx
with digital upgrade
only)
Detector bin Remove debris from bin. 5 min.
(Optima XR220amx Inspect detector charging connector for damage or mis-alignment.
and Optima Inspect detector docking switch for damage or mis-alignment.
XR200amx with
Inspect bin shock absorbers for proper operation and adjustment.
digital upgrade only)
Table 2-4 Calibration

Touchscreen • See Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration on page 99 5 min.
QAP Perform QAP test. See the Optima XR200amx/XR220amx Installation 10 min.
Manual, Chapter 6 Detector checks and QAP
Backup Perform backup of system files. See 3.1.2 Performing a system backup on 15 min.
page 43.

2.4.4.1 Test the thermal overload interlock

1. Power off the system.
2. Remove the left side cover and let front cover. See the System manual, Replacement
Procedures, Front cover removal.
3. At the front of the unit, to the left of the main circuit breaker, locate the thermal overload cable
connector. The thermal overload cable is connected to a short pigtail cable that is plugged into
the generator 15 kW auxiliary module. See Figure 2-1.
4. Disconnect the thermal overload cable from the 15 kW auxilliary module.
Item Description
1 Disconnect thermal overload cable at the pigtail connector
2 OR - - - -disconnect thermal overload cable pigtail from the 15 kW auxilliary module
Figure 2-1 Thermal overload cable connection
5. Turn on system power and wait until it boots to Applications level.

6. Attempt to make an exposure. Verify that the generator aborts the exposure with a tube
thermal overload error.
7. Reconnect the thermal overload cable.

2.4.4.2 Clean PC cooling vents

1. Power off the system.
2. Remove the top cover. See the System manual, Replacement Procedures, Top cover
removal.
3. Clean the cooling vents of the PC assembly.
2.4.4.3 Clean digital detector, tether, and grid (Optima XR220amx and Optima
XR200amx with digital upgrade only)
Potential for equipment damage

The detector, tether and grid should never be immersed in any fluid/chemical. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the product. Apply any liquids to a clean cloth and then use the cloth on the
component.
1. The detector must have the battery pack OR the tether plugged into the detector handle during
cleaning. If the tether is connected to the detector, the other end of the tether must NOT be
connected to the system.
2. Wear the recommended personal protective equipment.
3. The detector, tether, and grid may be cleaned with a soft cloth. Avoid use of abrasive materials
as this can cause scratches to the detector.
- Use only GE-approved cleaners:
* Cidex OPA Solution
* Incidin Plus
* Sani-Cloth Plus
* Gigasept FF
* Perasafe
* Trigene II
* T-Spray Disinfectant Detergent
* Ster Bac Blue
* Bacillol Plus
2.4.4.4 Clean touchscreen
Potential for equipment damage

Do not use sprays or aerosols directly on the touchscreen; the liquid might seep into the housing
and damage a component. Never use solvents or flammable liquids on the touchscreen.
Follow all safety precautions stated earlier (2.4.1 Before you begin - safety precautions) before
cleaning the touchscreen.
• To clean the touchscreen, wipe it with a clean cloth moistened with water or with a towelette
designed for cleaning monitors.

2.4.4.5 Clean barcode reader window (if applicable) - Optima XR220amx and
Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only
Potential for Equipment Damage

• Do not submerge the barcode reader in water. The reader housing is not water-tight.
• Do not use abrasive wipes or tissues on the reader window - abrasive wipes may
scratch the window.
• Never use solvents (alcohol or acetone) on the housing or window - solvents may
damage the finish or the window.
• If the window is visibly dirty, clean the window with a soft cloth or facial tissue dampened with
water (or a mild detergent-water solution). If a detergent solution is used, rinse with a clean
tissue dampened with water only.
• The scanner housing may be cleaned in the same way.
2.4.4.6 Hand switch cleaning and disinfecting

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - Before you begin:
- Disconnect the hand switch cord from the body of the hand switch before performing the
maintenance / cleaning procedures
- Never use solvents or flammable solutions to clean the hand switch
- Never use dripping cloth (or) immerse hand switch in water or cleaning solutions
INSTRUCTION: Use a cloth moistened in warm soapy water (use mild soap) to clean the hand
switch.
APPROVED CLEANERS:
The cleaners listed below are approved to clean the hand switch:
- Bleach - 50% mix with water (5-8% household Bleach)
- Glutaraldehyde <5%
- Polyethylene Glycol <20% (tested as Cidex Plus 28)
- Isopropyl Alcohol 70% concentration
- Hydrogen Peroxide 15-40% concentration
CAUTION: Never use cleaners or solvents of any kind if you are uncertain of the nature of the
cleaning agent. The hand switch should be cleaned using EPA cleared and EPA registered high-
level disinfecting agents.

2.4.4.7 HHS tests (US-only or as required by local regulations)

Requirements are pass or fail. Service is required if any requirement has failed.
Table 2-5 HHS tests
Inspect Requirement Time Est.

1. Generator operator indicators Check for proper operation of tones and buzzers as 10 min.
required by regulations. See 7.1.6 Testing generator
operator indicators on page 139.
2. Technique accuracy kVp See 7.1.4.2 Testing kVp accuracy on page 130. 25 min.
3. Technique accuracy mAs See 7.1.4.3 Testing mAs accuracy on page 132. 30 min.
4. Linearity See 7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and linearity of 40 min.
exposure on page 135.
5. Reproducibility of exposures See 7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and linearity of 40 min.
exposure on page 135.
6. Collimator alignment See 7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray field alignment on 30 min.
page 125.
7. Collimator light field intensity See 7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity on page 124. 15 min.
8. Collimator field size indicator See 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima 30 min.
accuracy XR200amx) on page 128 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size
indicator accuracy (Optima XR220amx or Optima
XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 129
9. Beam quality half value layer See 7.1.5.1 Measuring half value layer (HVL) on 30 min.
page 137.

Chapter 3 System data and software
Section 3.1 Backing up system data

This section describes the process to save system files, so that there is a valid backup available if
the system software ever needs to be reloaded or upgraded.
You will need the external CD/DVD drive and a blank media disk (CD-R or DVD-R format), or a USB
drive (i.e. memory stick: It is recommended that you obtain a Sandisk Cruzer 4Gb (GE Part Number
5423551, labeled Daily Use).
The backup takes about ten minutes to complete, but depends upon the amount of data that must
be saved. For example, if multiple detectors are registered to the system (Optima XR220amx and
Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only), there are more calibration files that must be saved,
resulting in longer backup times.
3.1.1 What is included in a system backup?

During a system backup, the following data is saved:
• Calibration files
• Configuration files
However, the following data is not saved by system backup:

• Image data: Use a separate process for archiving image data. See the Optima XR200amx
Operator Manual or Optima XR220amx Operator Manual for instructions.
• Procedure protocols: Save the protocol database only if you have made changes to the default
values. Default values are always loaded during a software installation. The default protocol
database is included with each shipped system. See the Optima XR200amx Operator Manual
or Optima XR220amx Operator Manual for instructions on saving the protocol database.
• RRA report, DEI report, and Dose report data.
3.1.2 Performing a system backup
1. On the Applications desktop, press the UTILITIES button.

2. On the Utilities desktop, press LAUNCH.
3. On the SUIF Service Home tab, select the UTILITIES tab.
4. In the left navigation frame, expand the SYSTEM folder.
5. Press the BACKUP link.
6. Select the backup media by selecting CD/DVD or USB.
7. Connect the external CD/DVD drive to the USB ports (2 USB port connections required) and
insert supported media (CD-R or DVD -R), or connect a USB drive.
8. Press START.
Chapter 3 System data and software Page 43

The status bar displays a series of messages: "Starting BACKUP," "BACKUP successful," and
"Backup has completed successfully." The backup takes about one minute, after which the
right frame displays "SYSTEM BACKUP SUCCESS."
9. Close the SUIF by pressing EXIT.
Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC)
POTENTIAL FOR DATA LOSS

Before installing, upgrading, or restoring system software, be sure to archive all protocols and
patient files, and back up calibration and configuration data if possible. Installing software can
destroy existing files, including patient, calibration, and configuration files. Avoid reconfiguring and
recalibrating the system, and ensure data protection, by periodically performing a system backup.
Always perform a system backup before performing a system software load or upgrade.
3.2.1 Loading or upgrading system software
3.2.1.1 Before you begin

Use these procedures to re-install or upgrade the complete system software. The following
procedures install both the operating system and application software on the Host PC. To re-install
the software takes approximately 15 minutes.
POTENTIAL FOR DATA LOSS

Pay particular attention to the instruction for system reboot in the following procedure. It is important
to cycle power according to the specified procedure. Cycling power at the wrong time or by the
wrong method can corrupt the system’s operating system.
3.2.1.2 Installing the operating system

To upgrade the PC with new operating system, see Section 3.2.1.2.1.
To load the operating system on a PC for the first time, see Section 3.2.1.2.2.
3.2.1.2.1 Upgrading PC with new software:

1. Verify that the system power is on.
2. Connect the service keyboard and external CD/DVD drive to the USB ports on the left side.
3. Save the needed files from the system, such as:
- Patient images
- Calibration and configuration data
- System protocol database as outlined in the Optima XR200amx or Optima XR220amx
Operator Manual
- RRA Report
- DI Report
Page 44 Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC)

- Dose Report
4. Place the Optima Software DVD into the external drive.
5. Select SUIF - Calibration - Hardware Calibration page.
6. Select PC Boot Script View and Enable View PC Now and Persistent PC View.
Note: In step 8 below, you will need to enter PC BIOS Mode using the F11 key. The system
is very sensitive to timing in this step. To begin, turn the system on, wait 2 seconds, then start
pressing the F11 key once per second until the boot device selection screen is presented. If
the system continues booting (or approximately 30 seconds go by) and you do not see the boot
device selection screen, you will have to repeat this procedure. In some cases, if the F11 key
is hit too many times, it can lock the PC such that the keyboard is not recognized. If this occurs,
shut the system down using the POWER RESET button and try again.
7. Shut down the system and restart.

8. Press the F11 key (see note above) on the service keyboard to display the "Please Select
Boot Device" menu on the screen.
9. Select the TEAC drive from the menu and press the ENTER key on the service keyboard.
10. On the next popup, select the option "1) Install system from this image on this
DVD" and press the ENTER key on the service keyboard.
11. The software installation begins.
Note: Do not walk away during this process, you need to be present. If, during the installation
process, the system presents you with a screen to choose either to enter "Degraded Mode" or
"Shutdown", click DEGRADED MODE immediately. Then enable View PC Now using PC Boot
Script View. If this step is missed, you will not see the PC reboot.
12. Wait for the installation to complete, indicated by an automatic reboot of the PC. It will take
approximately 10 minutes to complete. If you missed the note on step 11, the reboot will not
be apparent. In this case you will need to start over from step 7 (above).
13. Remove the Optima Software DVD from the external DVD/CD-ROM drive. Disconnect the
external drive from the system. The Load From Cold procedure is now complete.
Note: If your customer uses 192.168.x.x for the hospital network connectivity, then you must modify the
systems internal IP address scheme. See Section 4.14 IP Address Change Procedure on page 89.
This must be done after a Software load and before performing a system Backup/Restore. Failure
to follow these instructions will result in boot failures and the system in degraded mode.
14. Restore the configuration and calibration files.

15. Enter PC Boot Script View and set View PC Now = DISABLED, and Persistent PC View = OFF.
16. Reset and reboot the system.
3.2.1.2.2 Loading software on a PC for the first time:
Note: During this procedure, enter the "Degraded" mode if prompted. Select Service - Calibration - PC
Boot Script View and enable View PC Now and Persistent PC View to continue viewing the PC
inputs on the system monitor.
1. Verify that the system power is on.

2. Connect the service keyboard and external CD/DVD drive to the USB ports on the left side.
3. Place the Optima Software DVD into the external drive.
4. Select SUIF - Calibration - Hardware Calibration page.

5. Select PC Boot Script View and Enable View PC Now and Persistent PC View.
Note: In step 7 below, you will need to enter PC BIOS Mode using the F11 key. The system
is very sensitive to timing in this step. To begin, turn the system on, wait 2 seconds, then start
pressing the F11 key once per second until the boot device selection screen is presented. If
the system continues booting (or approximately 30 seconds go by) and you do not see the
boot device selection screen, you will have to repeat this procedure. In some cases, if the F11
key is hit too many times, it can lock the PC such that the keyboard is not recognized. If this
occurs, shut the system down using the POWER RESET button and try again.
6. Shut down the system and restart.

7. Press the F11 key (see note above) on the service keyboard to display the "Please Select
Boot Device" menu on the screen.
8. Select the TEAC drive from the menu and press the ENTER key on the service keyboard.
9. On the next popup, select the option "1) Install system from this image on this
DVD" and press the ENTER key on the Service Keyboard.
10. The software installation begins.
Note: Do not walk away during this process, you need to be present. If, during the installation
process, the system presents you with a screen to choose either to enter "Degraded Mode" or
"Shutdown", click DEGRADED MODE immediately. Then enable View PC Now using PC
Boot Script View. If this step is missed, you will not see the PC reboot.
11. Wait for the installation to complete, indicated by an automatic reboot of the PC. It will take
approximately 10 minutes to complete. If you missed the note on step 10, the reboot will not
be apparent. In this case you will need to start over from step 6 (above).
12. Remove the Optima Software DVD from the external DVD/CD-ROM drive. Disconnect the
external drive from the system. The Load From Cold procedure is now complete.
13. Enter PC Boot Script View and set View PC Now = DISABLED, and Persistent PC View =
OFF.
14. Reset and reboot the system.
Note: If your customer uses 192.168.x.x for the hospital network connectivity, then you must modify the
systems internal IP address scheme. See Section 4.14 IP Address Change Procedure on page 89.
This must be done after a Software load and before performing a system Backup/Restore. Failure
to follow these instructions will result in boot failures and the system in degraded mode.
15. Restore the configuration and calibration files.
3.2.1.3 Finalization
1. Perform the functional checks under X-ray in Table 2-2 Functional checks on page 36.
2. For Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade, verify that images can be
created and transferred via networking (as applicable).
Section 3.3 Performing a FW Load From Cold (LFC)

1. Shut down the system and turn the main circuit breaker off.
2. Wait one minute, then restore power and boot the system.
Page 46 Section 3.3 Performing a FW Load From Cold (LFC)


5. On the Service Home tab, press the UTILITIES tab button.
6. Press the SUBSYSTEM SOFTWARE button.
7. Press the HW FIRMWARE INSTALL button.
8. Press the DOWNLOADS link.
9. Select HW FIRMWARE INSTALL.
10. Connect the USB firmware dongle to the single USB port on the right.
11. Follow the on-screen instructions.
12. After the firmware load is completed, remove the USB firmware dongle.
13. Reboot the system for the operating system install to complete.
14. If the system presents a BDM mismatch, select CANCEL to update the BDM board with the
new firmware.
Note: The BDM backup process takes approximately 25 minutes to complete. If, after 30
minutes, the BDM mismatch splash screen does not close, reset the system using the power
on/off button. Do not reset the system until at least 30 minutes has expired since pressing
CANCEL above. Upon system reboot, the BDM mismatch splash screen should not appear,
indicating a successful backup. If the BDM mismatch splash screen reappears, select
CANCEL as the backup was not successful. This BDM mismatch splash screen behavior is
very intermittent.
15. Restore generator TNT data. See Section 3.6 Restoring system data on page 48.
Section 3.4 Restoring generator firmware only

2. On the Utilities desktop, press SERVICE.
4. Press the DOWNLOADS link.
5. Select GENERATOR SW INSTALL.
7. Reboot the system for the restore to take effect.
8. Restore generator TNT data. See Section 3.6 Restoring system data on page 48.
Section 3.5 Detector firmware download

This section applies to Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade and Optima XR220amx systems
only.
Note: The first time a new detector is used with an Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital
upgrade system, detector firmware must downloaded because the existing firmware present on the
detector may not be compatible with the system. If you attempt to use a detector that does not have
the correct firmware, an error message will be displayed stating The detector is not
compatible with this system. or Digital cassette firmware is incorrect.

1. Ensure the system has booted to applications without error.

2. Connect the detector to the system using the tether and ensure the detector is on, Detector
Status Led illuminated.
3. Power on the detector.
7. In the left navigation frame, expand the SUBSYSTEM SOFTWARE folder.
8. Select DET DATA DOWNLOAD folder.
9. Select DET DATA DOWNLOAD link.
10. Select the appropriate detector.
Section 3.6 Restoring system data

3.6.1 Before you begin
The following procedure enables you to restore only one selection at a time, so you must repeat
the procedure for each item to be restored. To completely restore all of the system files (calibration
and configuration), execute this procedure for each of the system items below:
• Digital
• Generator TNT Data
• IUI
• System Control
• IP Looks Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only
• Digital Cassette Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only
• OS Configuration
3.6.2 Restoring system data

Note: Do not insert the backup media until the restore utility screen is displayed (step 7).

4. In the left navigation frame, expand the SYSTEM folder.
5. Press the RESTORE link.
6. Select media type: CD/DVD or USB.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions. Remember that each item must be restored individually
(there is no ’Restore All’).
8. When the status bar indicates that the restore was successful and all items have been
restored, exit the SUIF.
9. Reboot the system for the restore to take effect.
Page 48 Section 3.6 Restoring system data

Section 3.7 System self recovery

The system hardware has incorporated a design feature which monitors specific components of
the system. This monitoring checks configuration details during each system power up. If a
mismatch is detected, the user is prompted as to what the correct action should be. This feature
enables the system to be self-healing to a limited extent.
If a mismatch is detected, the following screen will be presented.
If this screen is presented for what was a normally operating system (no parts have been
changed), always select RESTORE. Failure to do so can result in erratic or failed system behavior.
If parts have been replaced, see the replacement procedures of the System manual, finalization
section for the correct selection.
The following table defines the correct selection when a component is replaced.
Part Name Restore Cancel

Board Data Module (BDM) X
Spyder board X
Firefly board X
Locust board X
Djinn Control Module X

Djinn Main Aux Box X

Djinn HV Tank X
Theory:
The Board Data Module (BDM) is the backup device which contains two basic types of information
for each of the intelligent boards within the system.
• Fingerprint data of each component
- Serial Number
- FW Rev
- FPGA Rev
- DSP Rev
- CPLD Rev
• Firmware
- This is the operating system elements for each board.
Upon system power-up the BDM initiates a system check. If a mismatch is found the system boot
is halted and the user is presented with the BDM Mismatch screen. The system will proceed
based upon the user selection. If the user chooses to ignore the correct selection, a Firmware
download (Load from Cold) may be required to recover.
Configuration Definitions:
BDM = Spyder + Firefly (Fingerprint and FW data)
Spyder = = Spyder + Locust + 3 Djinn modules (FW data only)
Firefly = Firefly (Fingerprint and FW data)
Locust = Locust (Fingerprint and FW data)
Djinn Control Module = Control + Main Aux + HV Tank (Fingerprint and FW data)
Djinn Main Aux Box = (Fingerprint and FW data)
Djinn HV Tank = (Fingerprint and FW data)
30 kW Aux Box = Nothing. No Intelligence in this box
The following table describes what happens when a component is changed and a selection is
made:
Page 50 Section 3.7 System self recovery

Replaced Part Restore Action Cancel Action

Name
Board Data Module If data exists on BDM, all the BDM Updated with Spyder and
(BDM) system boards are Firefly Fingerprint data sets and
overwritten with incorrect correct FW files.
data and FW
Spyder board BDM updated with Spyder BDM updated with Spyder
Fingerprint data Fingerprint data and Bad FW file.
Spyder downloaded with Spyder contains wrong FW files

correct FW and updated with for all boards
board fingerprint datasets.
Firefly board BDM Updated with Firefly BDM updated with Firefly
Fingerprint data. BDM Fingerprint data and Bad FW file.
downloads correct FW to
Firefly. Firefly contains wrong FW file.
Locust board BDM Updated with Locust BDM updated with Spyder
Fingerprint data. BDM Fingerprint data and correct FW
downloads correct FW to file.
Locust. Locust board contains wrong FW
file.
Djinn Control BDM Updated with Djinn BDM updated with Spyder
Module Fingerprint data. BDM Fingerprint data and correct FW
Djinn. Djinn Control module contains
the wrong FW file.
Djinn Main Aux Box BDM Updated with Djinn BDM updated with Spyder
Fingerprint data. BDM Fingerprint data and correct FW
Djinn. Djinn Main Aux Box contains the
wrong FW file.
Djinn HV Tank BDM Updated with Djinn BDM updated with Spyder
Fingerprint data. Fingerprint data and correct FW
file.
Djinn contains the correct FW file.


Chapter 4 Configuration
Potential for Data Loss

• Always create an up-to-date backup of system data after changing the configuration.
• For configuration changes to take effect, restart the system after exiting the Service User
Interface (SUIF). You must restart the system before using it for patient acquisitions.
Section 4.1 When should I configure the system?

• During system installation. The system is delivered with pre-configured information from the
manufacturing process. However, many parameters are specific to the customer and location.
These parameters need to be configured. Other parameters should be confirmed and/or
modified per the customers preference.
Table 4-1
Configuration Comments
SUIF (Site parameters, Generator See Section 4.3 Using the System Configuration Tool (SUIF)
parameters, etc.) on page 54
DICOM See Section 4.5 DICOM connectivity configuration on
page 68
Demo images See Section 4.8 Loading demo images on page 74
Operator manual See Section 4.9 Installing the Operator Manual on page 75
Hardware options such as the See Section 4.11 Installing hardware options on page 76
barcode reader
System login See Section 4.10 Login and user management on page 76
• If system backups are lost or missing. If the software is re-installed but system configuration
files are not restored, configure the system again. GE service may need to be contacted to
enable purchased options. A software install resets all configuration data. If the system
configuration files are restored, you do not need to re-configure the system.
• After adding purchased options. Installation of purchased options can only be performed by
an authorized GE Healthcare service representative. If you add purchased options to the
system, update the system configuration files immediately and create and save a new backup.
Purchased option configurations are described in 4.3.8 Options configuration on page 60.
Chapter 4 Configuration Page 53

Section 4.2 Class M access

Accessing the Class M features requires the use of a USB dongle and a valid "license.txt" file.
There are 5 specific items of note:
1. A valid "license.txt" can be obtained from 2 locations:
a. A current Class M Service disk part # 2362753-200.
b. Contact the OLC to obtain a valid file.
Note: These files expire yearly.
2. Not all USB keys are the same. It is recommended that you obtain a Sandisk Cruzer 4Gb (Part
Number 5423551 labeled Daily Use). The system will support up to 8Gb capacity. Other
vendors may not work. To confirm proprietary access, confirm that the SUIF home page
displays the EXCLUSIVE access disclaimer.
3. For the Sandisk Cruzer, accept the installation files for your laptop.
4. Format the USB dongle to remove any labels and other files.
5. Do not place any files other than the "license.txt" file onto the USB dongle. This USB dongle
is to be a dedicated Class M access only device.
Section 4.3 Using the System Configuration Tool (SUIF)

1. Turn on the system.
2. Log in to the system with user name insite and password 2getin.
3. Connect the USB service key to a left-side USB port.
Note: Before starting the SUIF, attach the external CD/DVD drive (both USB connections must
be made) and insert the Class C or M service CD. You must wait approximately 1 minute for
the drive to stop spinning before launching the SUIF.

5. On the Utilities desktop, next to Service, press LAUNCH.
The Service Home tab is displayed. The Home tab contains summary information including
site identification, connectivity parameters, and enabled options.
6. Press the CONFIGURATION tab button.
7. On the Configuration page, in the left folder tree, select the parameter group to change.
8. Configure the system according to site preferences.
An overview of the configurable system attributes is given in the tables below.
Contact a GE service representative for items marked “Editable by GE Healthcare personnel
only.”
9. On each page, after making changes, press COMMIT to put the changes into effect.
4.3.1 Identifying MAC Addresses

1. Connect a Service Keyboard to the system.
2. Open a terminal window CNTL+SHIFT+F5, then select the terminal icon.
Page 54 Section 4.2 Class M access

3. Become root:
Type: su
Password: #superxr
4. Type: ifconfig
eth0 is for hardwire ethernet connection
wlan0 is for wireless ethernet connection
4.3.2 Site configuration

The following information can be viewed regardless of service mode. However, some fields are
editable only by sites with Advanced Service mode enabled (Section 4.13 Enabling Advanced
Service mode on page 87), and some are editable only by GE Healthcare personnel.
Table 4-2 Site tab parameters
Parameter Definition
Site Name Name of specific site where system is installed.
Street Address 1 Street address of site where system is installed.
Street Address 2 Street address, continued, of site where system is installed.
City City where system is installed.
State/Province State or province where system is installed.
Postal Code Postal or ZIP code where system is installed.
Department name (for example, Radiology) responsible for system
Department Name
maintenance.
Telephone Phone number of department responsible for system.
Fax Fax number of department responsible for system.
Contact Person Name Person responsible for system maintenance.
Contact Person Phone Phone number of person responsible for system maintenance.
Editable by GE Healthcare personnel only.
System identifier assigned by GE Healthcare following system
installation and prior to customer turnover.
System ID This field is a GE proprietary field and cannot be used for any purpose
other than the System ID. Violation of this mandate will result in Insite
and/or other features not working. Customer IT personnel need to use
other means for DICOM filtering on their DICOM machines.
Installation Date
Date system installation is completed, created by GE Healthcare.
Service Contract Number
Customer’s Service Contract number, created by GE Healthcare.
Contract Expiration Customer’s Service Contract expiration date, created by GE
Healthcare.

4.3.3 Networking configuration

The following information can be viewed regardless of service mode.
Table 4-3 Networking tab parameters
Options: DHCP or Static.
DHCP Configuration Determines whether the IP address is assigned, or acquired
dynamically. If Static is selected, enter associated information in IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and DNS fields.
System IP address.
IP Address Fixed Only
Enabled only if Wired IP Settings is set to Static.
System subnet mask.
Subnet Mask Fixed Only
Default gateway.
Default Gateway Fixed Only
Site domain name server.
Static DNS Server 1
Site domain name server.
Static DNS Server 2
Application Entity Title for DICOM.
AE Title Fixed Only
Fixed value.
Software port used for network communications.
Port Number Fixed Only
Fixed value.
4.3.4 General configuration

If the site is using a master time server (see 4.3.12 Time Server configuration on page 65), some
settings in this section are superceded by the master clock server data.
Table 4-4 General tab parameters
Timezone Time zone of site where system is installed.
System Clock System time in YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SS format.
Date Display Format MM-DD-YYYY or DD-MM-YYYY.
Time Display Format Military (24-hour) or AM/PM (12-hour).
Country Code Country where system is installed.
A list of selectable countries. The system auto configures to the
correct regulatory approved formats and frequencies for all wireless
Wireless Regulatory Code communications. If a country does not allow a specific wireless
communication technology then the feature is disabled, Flashpad
wireless for example.
Measurement System English or Metric.
Application Language Language used for application screens.
Page 56 Section 4.3 Using the System Configuration Tool (SUIF)

Table 4-4 General tab parameters
QAP Timeout (Optima
Interval between QAP tests, in days. When time-out is reached,
XR220amx or Optima
system users see a warning flag indicating that a QAP test should be
XR200amx with digital
performed.
upgrade)
VA Site Applies to USA Veterans Affairs facilities.
Yes or No.
Period of inactivity (no user input or processing activity) after which
Screen Blank Timeout
the screen will go blank, in minutes.
Image Mask Adjustment
(Optima XR220amx or Adjust the mask that is applied to the acquired image from the
Optima XR200amx with detector. Options: 3mm, 2mm, 1mm, 0, -1mm, -2mm, -3mm.
digital upgrade)
4.3.5 Hardware configuration
Table 4-5 Hardware tab parameters
Collimator Light Maximum
Time, in seconds, that the collimator light will remain on.
On Time
Collimator Lamp Install
Date the collimator lamp was installed. YYYY-MM-DD format.
Date
4.3.6 Generator configuration
Table 4-6 Generator tab parameters
Percentage of the tube thermal capacity limit, from 0 to 100. When this
Tube HUR Alarm
limit is reached, X-ray exposure is inhibited and an alarm sounds.
Tube ID Tube ID. Not editable.
Serial number of the tube. Confirm the serial number matches that of
Tube Serial
the attached tube.
Tube Install Date and Date and time the tube was installed. YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SS
Time format.

4.3.7 Wireless configuration

Before configuring the wireless settings, verify that the Wireless Hospital Network option is enabled
on the Options screen (see 4.3.8 Options configuration on page 60).
4.3.7.1 Adding certificates

If your customer uses site-specific network security certificates, contact the IT administrator to
obtain a copy of the certficate(s) on a USB flashdrive.
1. Ensure that the restoration of all configuration parameters has been completed and the
system has been reset.
2. Launch the SUIF and navigate to CONFIGURATION > WIRELESS.
3. Launch the wireless configuration utility as instructed on the screen.
4. Connect the USB flashdrive containing the site-specific certificates to a left-side USB port.
5. Click on the Certificates tab.
a. Observe the USB flashdrive-resident certificates in the pull-down list next to the ADD
button.
b. If there is more than one certificate, you will need to select each certificate individually.
c. Click ADD to install the displayed certificate from the drop-down list.
6. Continue with the site-specific configurations as defined by the IT administrator.
7. Exit the Configuration utility.
8. Remove the USB flashdrive.
9. Reset the system.
4.3.7.2 Configuring broadcast SSID networks

1. On the Wireless configuration screen, confirm that the "adapter" is ON or ENABLED.
2. Select the Current Status tab.
3. Click SCAN to find the network.
Note: Some customers may have their network access in a non-broadcast mode. This may
result in strange naming conventions for the scan results. Confirm with your IT contact.
4. In the Scan Results window, double-click the network to which you want to connect.
5. In the Network Config window, some fields are auto-populated. Depending on the type of
authentication used by the network, complete the other required information, as described in
the table below:
Table 4-7
Authentication type Required fields

Static WEP (Shared Key authentication) • WEP keys
• Encryption (if different than TKIP)
WPATM-Personal (PSK)
• PSK

Table 4-7

• Identity
• Password
• Client certificate
WPATM-Enterprise (EAP) • Inner Auth
• Private key file
• Private key password
• PEAP version (only if EAP method is set to
PEAP)
WPATM-Personal (PSK)
• PSK
• Encryption (if different than CCMP)
• Identity
• Password
WPA2TM-Enterprise (EAP • Inner Auth
• PEAP version (only if EAP method is set to
PEAP)
6. Click ADD.
7. Select the Current Status tab, and click CONNECT. Verify successful connection message.
8. To verify connectivity:
a. Select FILE menu > TOOLS.
b. Enter the IP of the machine you want to ping.
c. Press START PING and check for messages verifying connectivity.
d. Press STOP PING.
4.3.7.3 Configuring non-broadcast SSID networks

1. On the Wireless configuration screen, select NETWORK menu > ADD.
2. Select IP settings:
- If the system will be identified on the network by a static IP address, select STATIC IP,
and enter the IP address, netmask, and gateway. If no gateway is used, you must enter
0.0.0.0.
- If the system will be identified on the network using DHCP, select DHCP.
3. Enter the network SSID.
4. Choose the authentication type.

Some fields are auto-populated. Depending on the type of authentication, complete the other
required information, as described in the table below:
Table 4-8

Static WEP (Shared Key • WEP keys
authentication)
WPATM-Personal (PSK) • Encryption (if different than TKIP)
• PSK
WPATM-Enterprise (EAP) • Encryption (if different than TKIP)
• Identity
• Password
• Inner Auth
• PEAP version (only if EAP method is set to PEAP)
WPATM-Personal (PSK) • Encryption (if different than TKIP)
• PSK
WPA2TM-Enterprise (EAP • Encryption (if different than CCMP)
• Identity
• Password
• Inner Auth
• PEAP version (only if EAP method is set to PEAP)
5. Click ADD.
6. Select the Networks tab, and verify that the network is listed.
7. Select the Current Status tab, and click CONNECT. Verify successful connection message.
8. To verify connectivity:
a. Select FILE > TOOLS.
b. Enter the IP of the machine you want to ping.
c. Press START PING and check for messages verifying connectivity.
d. Press STOP PING.
4.3.7.4 Troubleshooting connections

If you try to connect in an enterprise situation, it will continue to try to connect until you tell it to stop
by selecting DISCONNECT.
4.3.8 Options configuration

The Optima XR200amx/XR220amx systems are delivered with a base set of operating software
that is configured for immediate operation.

Optional software and hardware purchased by the site must be enabled by GE Healthcare service
personnel, such as:
• Wireless network connectivity
• DAP (Dose Area Product) meter (standard with Optima XR220amx, optional for Optima
XR200amx)
• Repeat Reject Analysis (RRA) (Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade
only)
• Auto Protocol Assist (APA) (Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade
only)
• Generator Power - 30kW
When an option is purchased, a rating plate is supplied with that option. Rating plates for options
must be placed on the system. Be sure to properly apply rating plates so they can be checked
for accuracy and compliance.
After attaching the rating plate, complete the Product Locator Card as required.
4.3.8.1 Purchased options
Table 4-9 Purchased options
Yes or No
• For Optima XR200amx systems, the DAP must be enabled
via the Utilities > Configuration > Options screen. It can be
turned on/off by the customer through User Preferences.
DAP Meter
• For Optima XR220amx systems, the DAP is not shown on
the Options screen as it is a standard option and is already
enabled. It can be turned on/off by the customer through
User Preferences.
Generator Power 30 kW (15 kW is standard)
Wireless Hospital Network Yes or No
Options are Disable or Enable.
When enabled, the default setting is RPC. To change the setting
to SPC, see Section 4.4 Changing Auto Protocol Assist settings
Auto Protocol Assist
on page 67.
Available on Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with
digital upgrade system only.
Yes or No
Repeat Reject Analysis Available on Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with
digital upgrade system only.

4.3.8.2 Non-purchased options
Table 4-10 Non-Purchased options
Drive Login Yes or No
Secure Login
Yes or No
(Login Management)
Auto Logoff Yes or No
DICOM Connectivity Yes or No
Remove Patient Orientation
DICOM Tag (Optima
Yes or No
XR220amx and XR200amx
with digital upgrade only)
4.3.9 Enabling purchased options in the SUIF

You must have a Class M service key to activate the purchased options.
Press COMMIT and restart the system to enable the selected options.

The Service Home tab is displayed.
6. On the SUIF Configuration tab, in the left folder tree, select OPTIONS.
7. Find the option to enable, and press YES.
8. Press COMMIT.
9. Restart the system.
10. Apply the option’s rating plate to the correct place on the system.
11. Log in to the system. The enabled option is now available for use.
4.3.10 InSite configuration

Contact a GE service representative to configure InSite ExC settings.
Table 4-11 InSite parameters
Proxy Configuration
Proxy Required Yes or No
If No, information entered in the other proxy fields is ignored.
Proxy Server Address IP address of the proxy server

Table 4-11 InSite parameters
Proxy Server Port Port number of the proxy server
Authorization Required Yes or No
If No, information entered in Proxy Server User and Proxy Server
Password fields is ignored.
Proxy Server User User name for proxy verification
Proxy Server Password Password for proxy verification
Authorization Scheme None, Digest, or Basic
Log Level None, Warn, or Error
4.3.11 PNF configuration

The Firewall option at the top of the PNF area must be set to On. If it is set to Off, select TURN
FIREWALL ON.
• When the firewall is off, all network traffic in both directions is allowed. This setting is used
primarily for troubleshooting.
• When the firewall is on, it allows only the network communications that are specified by its
configuration and rejects all the rest.
After modifying any PNF options, select RESTART FIREWALL to apply the changes.
4.3.11.1 PNF GUI Control area

The PNF GUI Control area, near the top of the screen, contains these options:
Table 4-12 PNF GUI Control options
Option Action
Configure filter settings that allow access through the firewall by
Filter Settings
adding allowed services and IP addresses, and removing filters.
Options:
BACKUP CURRENT FILTERS: Create a backup of the current filters.
RESTORE FROM BACKUP FILTERS: Restore the filters to a
Backup/Restore previously backed up set.
RESTORE TO FACTORY DEFAULTS: Reset all filter settings to
those originally installed.
REMOVE BACKUP FILTERS:
Show the firewall rules that are currently in effect on this system.
Network Tools
Select REFRESH to refresh the list of rules.
Select which red interfaces the filter settings should be applied to.
Configure PNF
Select UPDATE RED INTERFACES to apply the changes.

4.3.11.2 PNF tabs and parameters
Table 4-13 PNF parameters
Option Description
Named Services tab
Used to set up filters to allow traffic to common network services (such as telnet or ftp) by
name, without needing to know the port and protocol.
Services/Allowed IPs Lists current filters by name and IP.
Select the Delete box checkbox next to the filter to delete, then
Remove Existing Filters
select DELETE EXISTING FILTERS.
From the Service Name drop-down list, select the service to be
allowed (such as telnet, ssh, ftp).
Add New Filter In the Allowed IPs field, specify a particular IP address, a range
of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
Select ADD FILTER to apply your changes.
Allowed Nodes tab
Used to set up filters to allow all traffic from specified nodes. You can specify a particular IP
address, a range of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
Allowed IPs Lists current filters by IP.
In the Allowed IPs field, specify a particular IP address, a range
Add New Filter of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
DICOM tab
Used to add DICOM port numbers (all IP addresses are allowed DICOM access; the DICOM
application may limit access by IP). You can add multiple DICOM ports.
Allowed DICOM Ports Lists current DICOM ports by number.
Select the Delete box checkbox next to the port to delete, then
In the Allowed Port field, specify a particular DICOM port.
Add New Filter
Expert tab
Used to set up detailed filters by port, protocol, and node-lock (source).
Used only by advanced IT users.
Name/Port/Protocol Lists current filters by name, port number, protocol, and IP.

Table 4-13 PNF parameters
Option Description
In the Name field, specify the filter name.
In the Allowed IPs field, specify a particular IP address, a range
of IP addresses, or a masked subnet.
Add New Filter In the Allowed Port field, specify a particular port.
From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol to be
allowed (TCP, UDP, Any).
NAT tab
Used to define NAT (Network Address Translation) rules.
Lists current filters by name, source IP, destination IP,
Name/Source IP/Dest. IP
destination port, and protocol.
In the Name field, specify the filter name.
In the Source IP field, specify the source IP.
In the Destination IP field, specify the destination IP.
Add New Filter In the Destination Port field, specify the destination port.
From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol to be
allowed (TCP, UDP, Any).
GE Service tab
Used to set IIP node-lock IP address and DICOM port. This page is limited to GE service
personnel.
4.3.12 Time Server configuration

Contact a GE service representative to configure Time Server settings.
Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only after the system is successfully connected
to the network. For wireless networks, refer to 4.3.7 Wireless configuration on page 58.
Table 4-14 Time Server parameters
Region Region where system is installed.
Time Zone Time zone where system is installed.
Hardware clock set to
Select if the site uses UTC.
UTC

Table 4-14 Time Server parameters
Shows system time. Press CHANGE to set manually or to
synchronize with an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server.
Manually
Set the time and date manually.
Synchronize with NTP Server
NTP Server Address: Choose a server from the drop-down.
Set the system time according to the
Time and Date Synchronize now
selected NTP server.
Save NTP Always use the selected NTP Server to
Configuration retrieve date and time.
Open the advanced NTP configuration. Be
sure the system is successfully configured
Configure
to the site’s network before trying to connect
to an NTP server.
Press ACCEPT to save the changes.
4.3.13 Secure Login configuration

Select SAVE to apply your changes, or CANCEL to cancel them.
Use the arrow buttons to move through the pages.
Table 4-15 Secure Login options
Option Description
Audit Message Settings tab
Audit Source ID IP address of audit message source.
Patient Name
On or Off.
Anonymized
Enterprise Repository tab
Enterprise Repository 1 On or Off.
Host Name/IP Primary audit server name or IP.
Port Number Port number used to communicate with primary audit server.
Protocol used to communicate with primary audit server (TCP,
Protocol
UDP).
Send Test Message Test connection with primary audit server.
Enterprise Repository 2 On or Off.
Host Name/IP Secondary audit server name or IP.
Port Number Port number used to communicate with secondary audit server.
Protocol Protocol used to communicate with secondary audit server.
Send Test Message Test connection with secondary audit server.
Local Repository tab

Table 4-15 Secure Login options
Option Description
On/Off Radio buttons.
Refresh Button to refresh the list.
Event ID / Time / Event
Headers for list of messages.
Outcome
Display Raw XML Display the raw data file to the user.
Section 4.4 Changing Auto Protocol Assist settings

Contact a GE service representative to change Auto Protocol Assist settings.
If the site wants to change the Auto Protocol Assist setting from RPC (the default) to SPC, follow
these instructions to modify the appropriate configuration file. This process sets the sequence tag
that will be used by the system:
Auto Protocol Assist must be enabled on the SUIF. See 4.3.8 Options configuration on page 60.
1. In the following path:
cd /magichome/xruser/config
2. Type this command:
vi PatientListApp.xml
3. Modify the following line to contain RPC or SPC, according to site setup:
<APRDicomTag>RPC</APRDicomTag>
or
<APRDicomTag>SPC</APRDicomTag>
4. Save the changes and exit.
5. Type this command:
vi DMTags.xml
6. Set the Auto Protocol Assist setting to the desired value.
For RPC, use these values:

<PPSLoopBack>
<Element>
<TagGroup>0x0032</TagGroup>
<TagElement>0x1064</TagElement>
<Sequence>
<Element>
</Element>
</Sequence>
</Element>
</PPSLoopBack>

For SPC, use these values:

<PPSLoopBack>
<Element>
<Sequence>
<Element>
</Element>
</Sequence>
</Element>
</PPSLoopBack>
7. Save the changes and reset the system.
Section 4.5 DICOM connectivity configuration

Follow the procedures in this section to configure DICOM connectivity to network hosts and
printers. After successful configuration, use the tables below to capture the system’s DICOM
connectivity configuration for future reference. Store the worksheets in a secure location at the site.
4.5.1 Network host configuration
4.5.1.1 Adding network hosts

This section provides instructions for setting the system preferences for network host connections.

3. On the Utilities desktop, next to Network Connections, press EDIT.
4. On the Network Connections window, in the Network Hosts section, press ADD.
The Add Network Host screen appears.
5. On the Add Network Host window, on the Host tab, enter the appropriate values in the fields
listed below. Some fields are available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx
with digital upgrade system.
Table 4-16 Add Network Host – Hosts tab description
Function Description
Name of the host that appears in the Network Hosts lists and
Host Label on the Image Management screen. Host labels cannot
contain spaces; use underscores ( _ ) to separate words.
Application Entry Title DICOM application title.
IP/Network Address IP address of the network host.
Port Number Port number for the network host.
Page 68 Section 4.5 DICOM connectivity configuration

Table 4-16 Add Network Host – Hosts tab description
Available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima
XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Query Retrieve
Type of information the host will provide upon query from
another host. Options are No provider, Study, and Patient.
Storage Commitment XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Designates whether the host will store image data.
Storage Commitment - Available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima
Application Entry Title (if XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Storage Commitment is
Yes) DICOM application title.
Storage Commitment - Available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima

Network Address (if Storage XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Commitment is Yes) IP address of the storage database.
Storage Commitment - Port Available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima
Number (if Storage XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Commitment is Yes) Port number for the storage database.
Comments Area for notes about the network host or configuration.
6. Press SAVE.
7. Select the PREFERENCES tab.
8. On the Add Network Host window, on the Preferences tab, select the appropriate options as
described below. All options except "Make this network host the HIS/RIS source" are available
only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Table 4-17 Add Network Host – Preferences tab description
Allow this network host to query the XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
(system name)
Allows this host to search and filter the system.
Allow this network host to retrieve from XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
the (system name) Allows this host to open and display exams from the
system.
Allow this network host to send images XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
to the (system name)
Allows the host to send images to the system.
This network host accepts multiple XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
frame image. Allows multiple frame images to be sent to this
network host.
Perform de-identification (anonymous XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
patient images) when sending to this
network host. Automatically de-identifies (anonymizes) any
images that the system sends to this host.

Table 4-17 Add Network Host – Preferences tab description
Burns the VOI LUT (Look-Up Tables) into the
Apply “Burn-On-Send” to images when DICOM header to be displayed by PACS. Leaving
sending to this network host. this option unselected sends all available VOI LUTs
to the DICOM header for PACS to query and apply.
Note: PACS should be configured to read the first
VOI LUT for proper display of images on the
Acquisition workstation.
This node acts as the Destination for receiving the
Send MPPS N-Create and N-Set MPPS NCreate & N-Set Notification. When
notification to this network host. configured for MPPS, the System sends information
like which exam is in progress, when a Study is
completed, how many images were acquired, and
what was the radiation dose to which the patient
was exposed during that session, etc.
Designates the host as the DICOM Worklist
provider. Defining the Radiology Information
System (RIS) and Hospital Information System
Make this network host the HIS/RIS (HIS) host allows patient worklists to be downloaded
source. (Only one host can be from those networks to the system.
designated as the HIS/RIS source.)
Note: Only one HIS/RIS source may be designated
on the system. Selecting this option will de-select
any other hosts as the HIS/RIS source.
DR Images sent as CR Modality XR200amx with digital upgrade system.
Options are Yes or No.
9. Press SAVE.
10. Repeat this process for each network host device the site wants to add.
4.5.1.2 Performing a C-Echo test

Use this function to determine if the system is communicating with a particular network host.

3. On the Network Connections window, in the Network Hosts section, select the network host
connection to test, and press C-ECHO TEST.
A message appears saying whether the test passed or failed.
- A “passed” message means that the network host is working and that exams can be
retrieved from or transferred to it.
- A “failed” message means that the system could not contact the network host. Perform
the following tasks to resolve the problem:
* Re-try the test at a later time. The host may be temporarily unavailable.

* Confirm the host configuration on the Edit screen. (On the Network Connections
window, in the Network Hosts section, select the network host connection to verify,
and press EDIT.
If the problem persists, contact the technical support group or system administrator.
4.5.1.3 Removing network hosts

Follow these instructions to remove a network host.

3. On the Network Connections window, in the Network Hosts section, select the network host
connection to delete, and press REMOVE.
A message appears saying “Are you sure you want to remove (host name)?”
4. Press YES to remove the network host connection.
4.5.2 Printer configuration

Printer connections are available only on the Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital
upgrade system.
4.5.2.1 Adding printers

This section provides instructions for setting the system preferences for printer connections.

4. On the Network Connections window, in the DICOM Printers section, press ADD.
The Add Printer screen appears.
5. On the Add Printer window, on the Printer tab, enter the appropriate values in the fields listed
below.
For suggested parameter values for specific printer brands and models, refer to the System
Manual, Appendix A Printer configuration.
Table 4-18 Add Printer screen parameter descriptions
Attribute Value
Printer tab
Name of the printer that appears in the DICOM Printers list
and on the print setup screens. DICOM printer labels
DICOM Printer Label
cannot contain spaces in the name. Use underscores ( _ )
to separate words.
DICOM application title, provided by the site’s network
Application Entry Title
administrator.
IP address of the printer, provided by the site’s network
Network Address
administrator.
Port number of the printer. May be site-specific; check with
Port Number
site.

Table 4-18 Add Printer screen parameter descriptions
Attribute Value
Pixel Depth Resolution of the printer. Options are 10 or 12.
Designates the pixel size the printer uses. This is specified
Printer Pixel Size (micron)
by the printer manufacturer.
Configuration Information Area for notes about the printer or configuration.
Density Min Minimum density range.
Density Max Maximum density range.
Magnification Type Options are Replicate, Bilinear, Cubic, None.
Smooth Factor Image smoothing factor.
Trim Designates whether there is to be trim. Yes or No.
Polarity Options are Normal, Reverse.
Border Density Color of the image border. Options are Black, White.
Color of areas that have no image printed. Options are
Empty Image Density
Black, White.
Designates the memory size of the printer, in Mbytes. This
Printer Memory Size
is specified by the printer manufacturer.
Layouts tab
Number and layout of images that may be printed on a
single sheet of film or paper.
Select the desired layouts
allowed for this printer Some selections control the orientation of the images on
the page. For example, two images per page may be side
by side, or one above the other.
Slide formats available for the printer, if any. Options are 35
Slide formats
or 40 mm.
Film Sizes tab
Select the sizes of film available for this printer, and enter the pixel width (W) and pixel height
(H). Pixel width and height values are provided by the printer manufacturer based on what
the printer supports.
Printer Settings tab
# Of Copies
Print Mode
Magnification
Format
Orientation
Media Type
Destination
Media Size
6. Press SAVE.
7. Repeat this process for each printer the site wants to add.

4.5.2.2 Removing printers

Follow these instructions to remove a printer.

3. On the Network Connections window, in the DICOM Printers section, select the printer
connection to delete, and press REMOVE.
A message appears: “Are you sure you want to remove (printer name)?”
4. Press YES to remove the printer connection.
Section 4.6 Image management

Image management parameters let the site control how images will be handled after acquisition,
including printing, archiving, and deleting. For more information about image management
parameters, including Auto Print, Auto Send (sometimes called Auto Push), and Auto Delete, refer
to the Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade Operator Manual.
Section 4.7 Image processing

4.7.1 Enabling EMI reduction
The EMI Reduction algorithm is designed to reduce artifacts resulting from electromagnetic
interference from other equipment in the area during image acquisition.
Administrative users can enable or disable EMI reduction using the UTILITIES > PREFERENCES
> IMAGE PROCESSING screen.
Contact a GE service representative to configure EMI reduction factors.
4.7.2 Configuring EMI reduction parameters
POTENTIAL AFFECT ON IMAGE QUALITY

Do not modify these parameters unless instructed explicitly by X-ray Engineering. Image Artifacts
can be injected or made worse.
The EMI correction algorithms should remain disabled for the majority of customers. If artifacts
(sometimes called herring bones) are visible and occur in only particular locations within the facility,
it is possible it is EMI enduced. The source of the EMI emission is always external to the system.
Turn ON the EMI correction and have the customer use the system and evaluate the images. The
default setting will correct most situations. If problems persist, contact the OLC to escalate to
Engineering. Do not attempt to "fix it" by playing with the default values; there are over 100,000
possible combinations.
When EMI corrections are enabled, additional data is collected pre-exposure. This data is used to
detect EMI frequencies that may interfere with image quality. As a result, the customer may notice
that image acquisition times are slightly longer.

Lastly, when EMI is enabled, it will only have effect on new images after EMI is enabled. It is not
possible to apply EMI corrections to pre-existing images prior to EMI being enabled or imported
from other systems.
To configure EMI reduction settings, several parameters are available to GE service users on the
Calibration page of the SUIF. To adjust the parameters, follow these steps.
3. Before starting the SUIF, connect the USB service key.

5. On the Utilities desktop, next to Service, press LAUNCH.
6. Press the CALIBRATION tab button.
7. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select EMI REDUCTION.
8. Configure the EMI Reduction parameters according to site preferences.
Table 4-19 EMI Reduction parameters
Signal Amplitude Minimum signal required at a given frequency to result in
subtraction of the suspected EMI signal. Range: 0.25 to 10
counts.
Minimum Correctable Minimum frequency, in hertz, at which the EMI reduction
Frequency algorithm searches for suspect signals. Range: 1 to 24 Hz.
Maximum Correctable Maximum frequency, in hertz, at which the EMI reduction
Frequency algorithm searches for suspect signals. Range: 1024 to 4096 Hz.
Maximum Allowable Any correction to the image will be smaller than or equal to this
Correction value. Range: 1 to 20 counts.
Maximum Number Of The EMI reduction algorithm is an iterative process. This
Iterations parameter can be set to end the iterative loop before the
amplitude threshold is reached. Range: 1 to 20 iterations.
9. After making changes, press COMMIT to put the changes into effect. Or, press RESTORE
DEFAULT to undo any changes made since entering the page (or since last pressing
COMMIT).
Section 4.8 Loading demo images

Load demo images from the CD-ROM provided with the system into the image database. This is
applicable only to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade systems.
Refer to the Optima XR220amx Operator Manual’s chapter on Image Management for more
details.
Page 74 Section 4.8 Loading demo images

4.8.1 Loading images from CD

Follow this process to access images stored on a CD.
1. Attach the external CD/DVD drive, and insert the disk with images into the CD/DVD drive.
2. On the Image Management screen, press Source CD1.
The exam list is updated to show the images stored on the CD.
3. Select the exams to copy.
4. Copy the exams to the Local database.
5. Press the LOCAL Destination button.
A message appears: “Selected images will be copied to (destination name).
Select OK to confirm.“
6. Press OK.
7. Open the exams from the Local database.
If the exams are being viewed on a computer that has the DICOM viewer installed, images may
be viewed directly from the disk.
Section 4.9 Installing the Operator Manual

Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade systems only.
To install the Operator Manual (OM), follow these steps:

1. Attach the external CD/DVD drive.
2. Exit all service applications, and close the SUIF.
3. Connect the service keyboard to a USB port.
4. Press these keys simultaneously:
CTRL+ALT+F2
5. At the login prompt, type:
xruser
Press ENTER.
6. Enter the password:
4$xray
Press ENTER.
7. Insert the Operator Manual CD into the external CD/DVD drive.
8. To run the interactive script, at the prompt, type:
./xrdinstall.om
Press ENTER.
9. At the prompt, type Y.
10. Type the number of the language to install, then press ENTER.
11. When the installation is complete, at the prompt, type:
exit
Press ENTER.
12. To return to the applications screen, at the login prompt, press these keys simultaneously:
CTRL+ALT+F7

Section 4.10 Login and user management

System administrators can perform a number of tasks that affect what users can do or will see. The
administrative options are described in the Optima XR200amx or Optima XR220amx Operator
Manual, Appendix A Login Administration.
Section 4.11 Installing hardware options

4.11.1 Installing the barcode reader
Applies to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200 with digital upgrade systems only
Unpack the OPI-4002 barcode reader and associated components.

Note: The USB cable is packaged and shipped in a separate box than the barcode reader
assembly.
4.11.1.1 Installing the barcode reader receiver

1. Plug the USB cable into the barcode reader receiver. See Figure 4-1.
Note: If the position of the label makes the barcode unreadable, move the label so the barcode
can be read. A sample label similar to the one on the USB receiver is shown in Figure 4-1
below.
Figure 4-1 Sample barcode label
2. Remove the system side covers and the top cover. See the System manual, Replacement
Procedures, Top cover removal.
3. Remove the two screws from the inside of the left drive handle support, then remove the cover.
See Figure 4-2.
Page 76 Section 4.10 Login and user management

Figure 4-2 Left drive handle screws and cover
4. Route the USB cable through the opening in the bottom of the left drive handle support. See
Figure 4-3.
Note: You may need to loosen the detector bin mounting screws to provide clearance for
routing the cable.
Cable
access
hole
Figure 4-3 Cable access hole and receiver placement on system
5. Attach the USB receiver to the plastic clip with the barcode facing out as shown in Figure 4-3.

6. Plug the USB cable into a USB port on the PC. See Figure 4-4.
Item Description
1 Host PC
2 Detector power supply (Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital
upgrade only)
Figure 4-4 Connect USB cable to PC
The Windows standard device driver will be installed automatically when you connect the
barcode reader receiver to the USB port and the system is powered up.
During initialization, the LED is orange. When the receiver LED turns green, the initialization
is complete and a connection has been made.
4.11.1.2 Connecting the barcode reader

1. Turn on system power.
2. Verify that the USB receiver is connected and that the green LED is blinking.
3. On the barcode reader, press the trigger key to start scanning.
4. Scan the barcode label on the USB receiver (Figure 4-1) to register the barcode reader.
The connection is complete and the barcode reader is ready for use.
Do not replace the covers at this point. You will need to scan the barcode receiver label
during configuration.
Page 78 Section 4.11 Installing hardware options

5. Each time the system is rebooted, a message saying, “Do you want to connect to a
bluetooth SPP?" appears. The user needs to select YES or the barcode reader functionality
will not be enabled.
4.11.1.3 Barcode reader LED indicators

By default, the OPI-4002 scanner is in power saving mode. To turn it on, press the trigger key for a
few seconds. If the scanner is not in use for a while, it will go into sleep mode and the trigger key
must be pressed for a few seconds to reactivate the unit before scanning.
The table below lists the state of the scanner based on the scanner LEDs.
Table 4-20 LED indicator state
Color Description
Green Barcode was successfully read.
Red Blinking Data transmission error. The battery may need to be charged.
Red Solid Charging on the cradle. The LED changes from red to green when the battery
is fully charged.
4.11.1.4 Charging the barcode reader

The barcode reader will not start up if the battery is empty. Use the charging cradle to charge the
battery. It takes about three hours to fully charge a battery. Adapters are provided to connect the
AC/DC converter to various power outlet configurations.
Figure 4-5 OPI-4002 barcode reader charging cradle and power adapters
4.11.2 Configuring the barcode reader

Applies to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200 with digital upgrade systems only
The following section provides instructions for the default configuration and two optional settings.
Have a printed copy of these pages on hand so you can scan the necessary barcodes. Refer to the
OPI-4002 User’s Guide for additional configuration options.

4.11.2.1 Setting to default configuration

1. Turn on the system. Wait until the green LED on the barcode reader receiver starts flashing.
2. Press the barcode reader trigger to start the scan.
3. Scan the Reset To Default barcode.
Figure 4-6 Reset to Default barcode
You will hear three quick sets of high-low-high beeps.

Whenever you scan the Reset To Default barcode, rescan the barcode label (on the barcode
reader receiver) and re-program any optional configuration.
4. Scan the barcode label (Figure 4-1) on the barcode reader receiver to register the barcode
reader.
You will hear one set of high-low beeps, a short pause, and then one long high beep.
The connection is complete and the barcode reader is ready for verification.
4.11.2.2 Verifying the default configuration

1. Turn on the system. Wait until the login screen appears.
2. Verify that a green LED is blinking on the barcode reader receiver.
3. Scan any barcode.
You will hear one set of high-low beeps. The scanned barcode characters appear in the Login
ID field on the login screen, and the cursor remains at the end of the scanned barcode.
The configuration is successful and the barcode reader is ready for use.
4. Replace the system covers.
4.11.2.3 Optional configuration 1

Optional configuration 1 is to add a Tab at the end instead of Return.
This configuration sets the barcode reader to add a Tab at the end of the scan instead of a Return.
Have a printed copy of these pages on hand so you can scan the necessary barcodes. If you make
a mistake during this configuration, start over at step 1.
1. Power up the system. Wait until the green LED on the receiver starts flashing.
2. Perform 4.11.2.1 Setting to default configuration on page 80.
3. Scan the barcodes shown in Figure 4-7, top to bottom.
After scanning each barcode you will hear one set of high-low-high beeps. The scanner will
beep at a one-second interval, and the LED will alternate green and red.
After scanning the last barcode, the scanner beam will turn off.
SET

RZ
TAB
END
Figure 4-7 Set Tab at the end instead of Return
4.11.2.4 Verifying optional configuration 1

ID field on the login screen, and the cursor moves to the Password field.
4.11.2.5 Optional configuration 2

Optional configuration 2 is to strip first two and last four characters, and add a Tab suffix.
This configuration sets the barcode reader to strip the first two and last four characters, and add a
Tab at the end of the scan. Have a printed copy of these pages on hand so you can scan the
necessary barcodes. If you make a mistake during this configuration, start over at step 1.
1. Power up the system. Wait until the green LED on the receiver starts flashing.
2. Perform 4.11.2.2 Verifying the default configuration on page 80.
3. Scan the barcode shown in Figure 4-8.
After scanning the barcode you will hear three sets of high-low-high beeps.
Figure 4-8 Strip first two and last four characters, and add a Tab suffix
4.11.2.6 Verifying optional configuration 2

ID field on the login screen, with the first two and last four characters stripped. The cursor
moves to the Password field.

4.11.3 Installing the Dose Area Product (DAP) meter
4.11.3.1 DAP installation for Optima XR220amx system

1. Shut down the system and turn off the main circuit breaker.
2. Unpack the DAP meter.
3. Slide the meter into the lower set of collimator rails (the set further from the collimator). The
meter must be installed with the cable exiting toward the rear.
4. Connect the DAP cable to the existing connector in the cable drape. See Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9 DAP meter cable attached
5. For Optima XR220amx systems, the DAP meter option is a standard option and has already
been enabled. It can be turned on/off at the Applications level.
a. On the Applications desktop, click the UTILITIES button.

b. On the Utilities desktop, select PREFERENCES > OPTIONS.
c. Turn the DAP function ON.
d. Refer to the system Operator Manual for instructions on DAP usage.
4.11.3.2 DAP installation for Optima XR200amx system

1. Shut down the system and turn off the main circuit breaker.
2. Remove the side covers, top cover and front bin. See the System manual, Replacement
Procedures chapter, Front Bin Removal section.
3. Unpack the DAP meter and cable.
4. Slide the meter into the lower set of collimator rails (the set further from the collimator).The
meter must be installed with the cable exiting toward the rear.

5. Install the DAP cable:

a. Connect the round cable connector to the DAP meter. See Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10 DAP meter cable attached
b. Route the long DAP cable through the cable drape along the horizontal arm and vertical
column.
Loosely attach cable ties to hold the cable in position, but do not tighten them until range
of motion is confirmed.
Leave enough extra cable length at the DAP meter so that the tube/collimator assembly
can be moved through the normal range of motion without unplugging the cable.
c. Route the DAP cable through the cable access opening in the right-front cover. See
Figure 4-11.
d. Remove the HV cable clamp mounting screws. See Figure 4-11.

Item Description
1 HV cable clamp mounting screws (2)
Figure 4-11 HV cable clamp mounting screws
e. Remove the clamp from the HV cable bundle. See Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12 HV cable clamp
f. Plug the other end of the DAP cable into the J6 bulkhead connector. See Figure 4-13.
Install cable ties as necessary to secure cable within the bulkhead area.

J6
Figure 4-13 DAP meter cable attached to J6 on bulkhead
6. Confirm that there is sufficient slack in the DAP cable at the tube/collimator assembly:
a. Move the tube/collimator assembly through the full range of motion and verify that the
DAP cable remains connected to the DAP meter.
b. Once sufficient cable slack is confirmed, tighten down the cable ties to secure the DAP
cable to the existing cable drape.
7. Arrange the cable bundle as shown in Figure 4-14, use a cable tie to maintain cable positions.
8. Install the clamp onto the cable bundle. DO NOT TIGHTEN THE CLAMP YET.
9. Mount the clamp to the Thorax chassis. Slide the clamp to the rear of the mounting screw slots.
10. Tighten the clamp around the cable bundle, ensuring that the cables are not pinched by the
clamp.

C
1 2
4 3
Item Description
1 DAP cable (optional for Optima XR200amx systems)
2 Wireless cable (only valid for Optima XR220amx systems)
3 Vertical brake cable
4 Horizontal arm lock cable
Figure 4-14 Correct cable bundle arrangement
11. Install the front bin, top cover and side covers.
12. Configure the system to enable the DAP meter option. See 4.3.8 Options configuration on
page 60.
13. Once the DAP meter option has been enabled, it must be ’switched on’ at the Applications
level:
a. On the Applications desktop, click the UTILITIES button.

b. On the Utilities desktop, select PREFERENCES > OPTIONS.
c. Turn the DAP function ON.
d. Refer to the system Operator Manual for instructions on DAP usage.
Section 4.12 Importing custom IP looks from Definium AMX

700
Use the following procedure to back up customized image processing (IP) looks from an Definium
AMX 700 system, and restore them on an Optima XR220amx system or Optima XR200amx with
digital upgrade.
Page 86 Section 4.12 Importing custom IP looks from Definium AMX 700
1. Make a system backup on the Definium AMX 700 system.

2. On the Optima system, exit the SUIF if it is open.
3. Insert the Definium AMX 700 system backup CD into the external CD/DVD drive of the system.
4. Press CTRL + SHIFT + F5 to open the Engineering User Interface.
5. On the Engineering User Interface, press the TERMINAL icon.
6. At the command prompt, type:
mount /media/cdrecorder
Press ENTER.
cd /magichome/xruser/config/restore/
Press ENTER.
7. At the prompt, type:
chmod 777 restoreCustomIPLooks_F2toF3.sh
Press ENTER.
./restoreCustomIPLooks_F2toF3.sh
Press ENTER. The script takes approximately 20 minutes to run. When completed, the system
returns to the prompt.
umount /media/cdrecorder
Press ENTER.
10. Remove the Definium AMX 700 backup media from the CD/DVD drive and disconnect the
drive from the system.
11. Type exit to close the terminal window.
12. Exit the Engineering User Interface.
Section 4.13 Enabling Advanced Service mode

Advanced Service (sometimes called “in-house service” or “extended service”) is available to
customers that have purchased an Advanced Service package license from GE Healthcare.
Contact a GE service representative to enable Advanced Service.
Advanced Service provides the following functionality:

• SUIF in Advanced Service mode
• Detailed error descriptions in the Service Error Log Viewer
• Advanced diagnostics
• Extended error log with filtering
The following functionality is never included in an Advanced Service license:

• InSite ExC configuration
• Advanced service configuration or entitlement
• Purchased options configuration

4.13.1 Enabling Advanced Service operation

You must have a Class M service key to enable Advanced Service operation.
Activate one option at a time, and restart the system after each option is enabled.
3. Before starting the SUIF, connect the USB service key. See Section 4.2 Class M access on
page 54.

7. On the SUIF Configuration tab, in the left folder tree, select SITE.
8. Enter the appropriate information in these fields:
Table 4-4
Field Information
System ID GE system identifier.
Date the system was initially installed. This date should
Installation Date
already be present.
As provided by the Service support representative responsible
Service Contract Number
for administering the service agreement.
Contract Expiration Date the service agreement expires.
9. Press COMMIT.
10. Exit the SUIF.
4.13.2 Verifying Advanced Service operation

1. Before starting the SUIF, remove the Class M USB service key.
2. On the Applications desktop, press TOOLS.
3. On the Tools desktop, press LAUNCH.
4. Verify that the Home screen says “Advanced Service” at the top of the page.
5. On the SUIF Configuration tab, in the left folder tree, select SITE.
6. Verify that the System ID, Installation Date, Service Contract Number, and Expiration Date
fields cannot be edited.
7. Verify diagnostics are accessible.
8. Verify error log viewer has extended capabilities.
9. Exit the SUIF.
Page 88 Section 4.13 Enabling Advanced Service mode

Section 4.14 IP Address Change Procedure

The system uses IP Addresses 192.168.x.x for communication between the PC and the detectors.
If the hospital network to the PC is also 192.168.x.x, issues will occur. Perform the following
instructions to change the default internal IP Address if an IP Address conflict occurs with the
hospital network.
1. Plug in the Service Keyboard.
2. Open a terminal window using CTRL+SHIFT+F5 and click on the terminal window icon.
3. Switch to root by entering the following text at the prompt:
su
#superxr
4. Run the Change IP script by entering the following text at the prompt:
/magichome/xruser/engg/changeIp.sh
5. Select 1 of the 5 options of subnet IP addresses. Write down the IP Address you select, you
will need this in a later step.
1. 172.16.x.x
2. 172.17.x.x
3. 172.18.x.x
4. 192.168.x.x (SW LFC default)
5. 192.169.x.x
6. The system will be re-booted automatically.
7. Login to system.
8. Open a terminal window and become root
xruser@magic: su
Password: #superxr
At prompt, type: ifconfig | more

Confirm the br0 IP Address is XXX.XXX.3.1 (where XXX.XXX equals the address range
selected above).
9. To test network connectivity, perform a C-Echo test to one or more of the Network Hosts.
10. This step applies to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with Digital Upgrade only.
Verify that all connected detectors boot successfully. Verify that you can take an exposure on
all available receptors.
11. This step applies to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with Digital Upgrade only.
Verify the Detector Wireless connection is active by acquiring an image.
12. Perform the Snapshot Tool Configuration.
4.14.1 Snapshot Tool Configuration

To ensure that the Auto-Snapshot Tool works after changing the IP Address.
1. Open a terminal window using CTRL+SHIFT+F5 and click on the terminal window icon.
2. Switch to root by entering the following text at the prompt:
su
#superxr
3. Open Firefox Browser by typing the following command :

firefox http://localhost/snapshot/Manual_Snapshot.html
4. Click on SNAPSHOT PREFERENCES. See Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-15 Snapshot Preferences
5. Repeat Steps 6 through 17 (below) for the following four Configurations (available under the
drop-down menu):
* Asnapshot_Lightning
* ASnapshot_BKP
* Snapshot_ResetTimeOut
* QuickSnapshot
Page 90 Section 4.14 IP Address Change Procedure

6. In the Configuration drop-down menu, select ASNAPSHOT_LIGHTNING. See Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16 Select Configuration

6. In Server Names section, click on EDIT. See Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17 Edit Server Name - Magic
7. In the IP Address data entry text box, change 192.168.3.1 to “xxx.xxx.3.1” (where
xxx.xxx.3.1 is the same IP Address range used in Section 4.14 IP Address Change
Procedure and 3.1 is the specific address assignment for the host pc port). See Figure 4-
18.
Figure 4-18 Change IP Address

8. Click on SUBMIT. See Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19 Submit New IP Address
9. Under Target Names - Magic, click EDIT. See Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20 Edit Magic Target Name

10. In the IP Address data entry text box, change 192.168.3.1 to “xxx.xxx.3.1” (where
xxx.xxx.3.1 is the same IP Address range used in Section 4.14 IP Address Change
Procedure and 3.1 is the specific address assignment for the host pc port). See Figure 4-
21.
Figure 4-21 Edit Magic IP Address
11. Click on SUBMIT. See Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22 Submit New Magic IP Address

12. Back on Snapshot Preferences main screen, click on Target Names – Table_IDC –
DELETE. See Figure 4-23.
Figure 4-23 Delete Target Name “Table_IDC”
13. You will get a popup like below, select OK. See Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-24 Table_IDC Popup Message

14. Under Target Names – WallStand_IDC click on DELETE. See Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-25 Delete Target Name “WallStand_IDC”
15. You will get a popup like below, select OK. See Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 WallStand_IDC Popup Message

16. Under Manage Preferences section, click on SAVE AS.... See Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27 Save Changes
17. Go to Step 5 until all four configurations are completed.

18. Press CTRL+F4 at the same time to close the html interface.
19. Success Check Steps:
If everything is fine you should be able to see Auto Snapshots getting generated after
reset:
a. Perform a system reset.
b. After system is booted up, login and wait for 5 minutes.
(Snapshot is being created in a temp location)
c. While you are waiting, open a terminal window using CTRL+SHIFT+F5 and click
on the terminal window icon.
d. Run following command:
ls –ltr /enggdata/Snapshots/*3400017*.zip
e. Note the date/time stamp of the most recently created file.
f. After 5 minutes reset and reboot the system, login.
(Snapshot from temp location is written to Snapshots directory and a new
snapshot is being created in a temp location)
g. Open a terminal window using CTRL+SHIFT+F5 and click on the terminal
window icon.
h. Run following command:
ls –ltr /enggdata/Snapshots/*3400017*.zip
i. The output of (c) above should show a snapshot file, having the string 3400017
embedded in the snapshot filename, created after the most recent system boot
(in Step b above).
j. Type date to see the current system time.
The latest snapshot file should have been created a few minutes before the date
command output.
k. Verify the file size is greater than 400,000:
-rw–rw-r- - 1 xruser xruser file size date time /path/filename
20. Close all windows.
21. Complete all system configurations and customer settings.
22. Create a new System Backup on DVD media.
Note: Do not use backup media from any other system. The result will be that half of the
system is configured for 172.x.x.x and other half is configured for 192.x.x.x
The system will then boot into Degraded Mode only.
Also, when performing a Software Load, you must perform this procedure first before
doing a System Restore.


Chapter 5 Calibration
Section 5.1 Preparing for calibrations

This chapter explains how to calibrate the detector, printer, touchscreen, drive subsystem, and
elements of the generator. It also covers how to determine the appropriate burn configuration for
PACS images.
FOLLOW PROCEDURES
Important! Perform the calibrations in the order shown in the left frame of the Calibration screen
on the Service User Interface (SUIF).
While working in the SUIF, watch the status bar and wait for activities to complete before starting
the next step. Look for messages like "Ready..." or "Ready for input."
5.1.1 Saving changes

After changing, creating, or restoring calibration files, be sure to reboot the system so that the
application software can detect the file changes.
After completing the steps in this chapter, save the changes by performing a system backup. See
Chapter 3 System data and software in the Optima XR200amx/XR220amx System Manual for the
backup procedure.
Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration

5.2.1 Calibrating the touchscreen
Follow this procedure to set the active area of the touchscreen and align it to the underlying video
application to ensure accurate measurement.

3. On the SUIF home page, press the CALIBRATION tab button.
4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select TOUCHSCREEN.
5. Press START and follow the on-screen instructions.
6. The touchscreen calibration utility prompts you to touch a cross-hair icon in a series of nine
locations. Afterward, you can press ACCEPT to write the settings to the calibration config file,
or CANCEL to discard the settings.
When the cross-hair appears, you have 10 seconds to respond. A countdown timer is
displayed. If you do not respond within 10 seconds, the calibration is aborted.
Chapter 5 Calibration Page 99

After you touch all the calibration points, you have 90 seconds to verify pointer accuracy
before accepting the changes. A countdown timer is displayed. If you do not respond within
90 seconds, calibration is aborted.
Important! If the program aborts or you press CANCEL, the utility does not revert to the prior
calibration; the touchscreen calibration is lost. The touchscreen accuracy may be very poor
and require some effort to restart the calibration from the SUIF.
7. Press ACCEPT to write the settings to the calibration config file, or CANCEL to discard the
settings.
8. Click on HARDWARE CALIBRATION and perform the TOUCHSCREEN CALIBRATION at
the hardware level. See. 2.4.2 Touch screen calibration on page 3.
Section 5.3 Generator calibration

5.3.1 Setting filament drive level
EXPOSURE TO RADIATION
Employ X-ray safety practices to minimize exposure to radiation. Use portable shields or lead
aprons. Aim the tube away from personnel. Adjust both lateral and transverse collimator blades to
the minimum field size setting.
NO DETECTOR IN BEAM DURING CALIBRATION

Make sure there is no digital detector in the X-ray field at any time during this calibration.
This procedure automatically sets the initial filament drive levels for each X-ray tube focal spot.

4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select GENERATOR > FILAMENT DRIVE.
The process is a sequence of 24 exposures: 9 for the small filament and 15 for the large. The
system automatically sets the technique and selects the focal spot.
Use the handswitch to initiate the prep and expose sequence. The handswitch must be fully
released after each exposure.
A display updates the completion status for each of the 24 exposures.
After completing exposure 24, press COMPLETE to finalize the calibration.
Page 100 Section 5.3 Generator calibration

5.3.2 Viewing and resetting tube and generator usage data

Use this procedure to display and store tube usage data that can be accessed to determine
warranty coverage. Reset the data after replacing a tube.
Note: It is recommended that you record the current values prior to making any changes.

The Service Home tab is displayed. The Home tab contains summary information including
site identification, connectivity parameters, and enabled options.
3. Press the CALIBRATION tab button.
4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select GENERATOR > TUBE WARRANTY.
5. Select RESET and follow the on-screen instructions.
6. Exit the SUIF and launch it again to see the reset values.
Section 5.4 Detector calibration

Detector calibrations apply only to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade
systems.
For system operation, detector calibrations are not normally required as the detector contains a set
of calibration files. Calibrations should only be performed if image quality issues warrant updating
bad pixel maps and/or gain calibration files.
IMAGE QUALITY AFFECTED

Detector calibrations must be performed using the tether. Failure to use this process can
result in calibration failures and/or image quality issues.
5.4.1 Executing bad pixel and gain calibrations

Use the Bad Pixel Calibration tool to detect defective pixels. Then use the Gain Calibration Tool to
calibrate a gain coefficient for each pixel to achieve uniform gain across the detector. Perform these
two calibrations in sequence.
Note: DO NOT change the exposure techniques for these calibrations. They are automatically set by the
calibration software and are required for proper calibration.
5.4.1.1 Bad pixel calibration

This procedure calculates defective pixels from dark and X-ray images.
The detector must be connected via tether and stabilized for a minimum of 10 minutes. The 10
minute counter starts when the calibration is initiated.
Be sure that the correct firmware is downloaded to the detector before proceeding.

Bad pixel calibration is a multi-step process, including a QC test exposure and four additional
exposures. The generator technique for each exposure is set automatically by the system.
aprons. Aim the tube away from personnel.
1. Install the flat field phantom from the front of the collimator into the collimator rails as shown
in Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1 Flat field phantom

5. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select DETECTOR > BAD PIXEL.
Press and hold the Prep/Expose handswitch to make the exposures as directed. The
handswitch must be released after each exposure. The X-ray tube must be positioned at
120cm SID, full FOV, beam centered on the detector.
5.4.1.2 Gain calibration

The bad pixel calibration (see 5.4.1.1 Bad pixel calibration on page 101) must be performed before
starting the gain calibration.
This set of three calibration procedures (one each for 60, 80, and 120 kVp) creates gain maps used
to compensate for gain non-uniformities. The flat field phantom is used only for the 80 and 120 kVp
techniques. The X-ray tube must be positioned at 120 cm SID, full FOV, beam centered on the
detector for this calibration.
Page 102 Section 5.4 Detector calibration

aprons. Aim the tube away from personnel.
1. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select DETECTOR > GAIN.
2. Remove the flat field phantom from the collimator rails.
3. Select 60 KVP MAX DOSE.
5. Insert the phantom into the collimator rails.
6. Select 80 KVP MAX DOSE and 120 KVP MAX DOSE.
a. On the entry page, choose one of the kV techniques, then select START to begin the
calibration (or CANCEL to abort).
b. Each process begins with a QC exposure to check for setup and alignment errors,
followed by a sequence of 10 exposures. The generator technique for each exposure is
set automatically by the system.
c. Press and hold the Prep/Expose handswitch to make the exposures. Release the
handswitch after each exposure. An exposure inhibit symbol appears in the status bar
until the system is ready for the next exposure.
d. After the last exposure, calculations are performed and the message "Calibration
completed successfully" appears, along with instructions to select CANCEL to
abort calibration or COMPLETE to save gain calibration data.
e. After each kV technique, the program returns to the calibration summary page. Re-open
the gain calibration page to verify that the date and pass/fail result for the calibration were
properly updated, then continue by selecting the next technique and starting the
calibration.
8. Reset the system after calibrations are completed.
9. Use the QAP tool to evaluate image quality and verify that it passes. Refer to the Installation
Manual, Chapter 6 - Detector checks and QAP.
Section 5.5 Image quality calibration

Image quality calibrations apply only to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital
upgrade systems.
5.5.1 Calibrating the printer

Follow this procedure to send grayscale output to the printer and to calculate compensation LUT
(look up table) for compatibility.



4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select IMAGE QUALITY > PRINTER.
5. Press the CALIBRATION icon.
6. In the left frame, select IMAGE QUALITY > PRINTER.
7. Select the correct printer from the Printer Label drop-down list.
Section 5.6 Hardware calibration

5.6.1 Drive handle calibration
Follow this procedure to calibrate the drive handle and ensure accurate movement and steering.

4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select HARDWARE CALIBRATION > DRIVE
HANDLE.
5.6.2 Touch screen calibration

Follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen. This calibration is needed for when the Spyder
board has control of the display due to switch display functionality. This calibration is in addition to
the SW touch screen calibration also found in the SUIF.

4. On the Calibration page, in the left folder tree, select HARDWARE CALIBRATION > TOUCH
SCREEN.
Section 5.7 PACS image tests

PACS image tests apply only to Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade
systems.
Follow these procedures to test image display characteristics and determine the burn configuration
for PACS images for each destination host.
5.7.1 Comparing PACS test images

In the following tests, use the nine PACS test images to test image display characteristics and
determine image display configuration.
Page 104 Section 5.6 Hardware calibration

Each PACS test image consists of two aspects:

• On the right, a clinical chest image with image number and GE logo watermark (Figure 5-2).
• On the left, a series of 12 vertical bands. The top six bands are dark and the bottom six are
bright.
Inside each band are five small squares with different intensities (like the 5%/95% squares in
a SMPTE pattern). The squares provide a quantitative way to compare two images.
The pixel data in every test image is identical. Only the DICOM headers, annotations, and window
center (WC) and window width (WW) values are slightly different for each pattern.
Figure 5-2 PACS/image display test image
5.7.2 Determining PACS burn/no-burn configuration
5.7.2.1 Verifying PACS monitor calibration

1. Verify that the PACS monitor is calibrated according to DICOM Standard Part 14. Each site is
responsible for providing evidence of PACS monitor calibration.
2. At the application desktop, press IMAGE TOOLS.
3. Click SMPTE to load the SMPTE pattern into the Patient List.
4. Send the SMPTE pattern to the PACS review workstation
5. Verify that 5% and 95% squares are equally visible on PACS (Figure 5-3).

Figure 5-3 SMPTE pattern
5.7.2.2 Loading test images

1. Load the PACS test images onto the acquisition workstation. Use either:
- A DICOM-formatted CD-ROM with images.
- Images that are stored on the system in Image Tools.
2. Verify that the patient name is GE_DX_Image_Display_Test, GEHC and the patient ID is
2000002.
5.7.2.3 Sending no-burn images to the PACS

1. In the SUIF, press the UTILITIES tab button.
2. Next to Network Connections, press EDIT.
3. Select the appropriate network host and press EDIT.
4. On the Preferences tab, verify that the following parameter is NOT checked:
Apply Burn-on-Send to images when sending to this network host.
5. In the Images list, highlight PACS Test Image #1.
6. In the Destination icon list, press the appropriate PACS network host.
5.7.2.4 Sending burn-on-send images to the PACS

1. In the SUIF, press the UTILITIES tab button.
2. Next to Network Connections, press EDIT.
Page 106 Section 5.7 PACS image tests

3. Select the appropriate network host and press EDIT.

4. On the Preferences tab, check Apply Burn-on-Send to images when sending to
this network host.
5. In the Images list, highlight PACS Test Image #6.
6. In the Destination icon list, press the appropriate PACS network host.
5.7.2.5 Reviewing images on PACS

1. On the PACS review workstation, display PACS test images #1 and #6. To identify an image,
look in the chest image region for the watermark image number next to the GE logo.
2. Verify that image #1 is displayed with a Value-of-Interest Look-Up Table (VOI-LUT).
3. Verify that image #6 is displayed with a Linear Look-Up Table (Linear LUT).
4. Compare PACS Test Images #1 and #6 and note the following items:
a. The number of distinct bright and dark bands (based on the band intensity)
b. The number of squares visible in each band
Count bands that have distinct gray levels, not simply the number of bands with visible
squares. For example, in Figure 5-4, there are two squares in band #4, three squares in
band #5, and three squares in band #11. There are three distinct dark bands and six
distinct bright bands. This is because the top three dark bands are indistinguishable.
Figure 5-4 Example showing distinct bands and visible squares
- If PACS test images #1 and #6 appear visually identical (with an equal number of bright
and dark bands), the PACS supports VOI-LUT. Configure the PACS as No-Burn for this
host.
- If PACS Test Images #1 and #6 appear visually different (with a different number of bright
and dark bands), or if you can see saturation in the lung or abdomen of the chest region
(saturation appears as a completely flat dark or white area), the PACS does not support
VOI-LUT or applies it incorrectly. Configure the PACS as Burn-on-Send for this host.
5. Repeat sections 5.7.2.3 Sending no-burn images to the PACS and 5.7.2.4 Sending burn-on-
send images to the PACS for each PACS destination host.

6. Record the results in the table below.
Example Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Test 5 Test 6 Test 7

Distinct dark
3
bands
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 2
5 3
6 4
7 5
8 4
9 4
10 3
11 3
12 0
Distinct bright
6
bands
Table 5-1 PACS image test results
In addition to the test results above, use Table 5-2 as a guideline to determine if a PACS should be
configured as Burn-on-Send. This table considers only whether a PACS supports VOI-LUT
No-Burn Burn-on-Send
GE Centricity RA1000 v1.0, v2.0, v2.1 GE Pathspeed v7.12, 8.0
GE Centricity RA600 v6.1, 7.0 GE AW v3.1, 4.0
GE Radworks v5.1 Kodak DirectView v4.3
GE Pathspeed v8.1 or later Kodak DirectView v5.1, 5.2
McKesson HRS v3.3, 3.3.2 Kodak Directview(CEMAX ICON), v4.3
Fuji Synapse v3.0, 3.1 Merge eFilm, v2.0
Agfa IMPAX v4.5, 5.2 Stentor iSite v3.0, v3.3.1
Philips Siemens Magic View 300
RealTime iPACS Viewer v5.0 VA Vista
- Picker
- Neusoft v3.0
- Thinking Systems
Table 5-2 PACS support of VOI-LUT

5.7.3 Optional PACS tests

Perform the following tests to obtain further information for troubleshooting.
5.7.3.1 Sending all PACS test images

1. Send all nine images to PACS and follow the test instructions in Table 5-3:
- Send images #1-5 as No-Burn
- Send images #6-8 as Burn-on-Send
2. If the site is interested in exploring CR-Fallback as an option, configure the PACS for CR-
fallback with help from the local IT team. Then send image #9 as No-Burn.
Image # Platform Send Annotation notes

1 All No-Burn None Test No-Burn mode
2 All No-Burn None Identical to #1
3 All No-Burn None Identical to #1
4 All No-Burn Text Test annotations
5 All No-Burn L Test annotations
6 All Burn-on-Send None Test Burn-on-Send mode
7 All Burn-on-Send Text Test annotations
8 All Burn-on-Send L Test annotations
9 All No-Burn None Test TEXT? CR-Fallback
Table 5-3 Test instructions for all PACS images
5.7.3.2 Verifying DICOM header tags

1. On the PACS review workstation, open PACS test image #1 (Patient ID 2000002).
2. Access the DICOM header information through a drop-down list, a button, or by right-clicking
the image and then selecting an option such as “information,” “i,” or “header.” For help, contact
local IT support.
3. Verify Burn-on-Send mode by verifying that:
a. The WC tag is 0028x1050 and the WW tag is 0028x1051
b. The values are WC=5226\5226\5226 and WW=2654\1990\3981
4. Verify VOI-LUT tags as follows:
a. Search the DICOM header for tag 0028x3010VOILUTSequence.
b. Below that tag, verify that there are three additional tags:
* 0028x3002LUTDescriptor
* 0028x3003LUTExplanation
* 0028x3006LUTData
c. Verify that each VOILUTSequence has a LUTExplanation set to either Normal, Harder,
or Softer.
5. Record the results in Table 5-4.
6. Open PACS test image #6 and view the DICOM header.
7. Verify No-Burn mode by ensuring that:

a. The WC tag is 0028x1050 and the WW tag is 0028x1051

b. The values are WC=8192\8192\8192 and WW=16383\12288\24575
8. Verify VOI-LUT tags as follows:
a. Search the DICOM header for tag 0028x3010VOILUTSequence.
b. No VOILUTSequence tag should be present. If a VOILUTSequence is present, the image
was not sent correctly. Resend the image as Burn-on-Send.
5.7.3.3 Verifying WC and WW values
No-Burn Mode (PACS Test Image #1)

The DICOM header of each PACS Test Image is always sent with WC/WW=5226/2654. The values
displayed on the PACS may appear differently. This is acceptable according to DICOM standards.
The values can show up as 8192/16384, 5226/2654, or something else. The most common and
preferred implementation is to show values of 8192/16384 on the PACS.
1. Open PACS test image #1.
2. Verify that the WC/WW values are 8192/16384.
If the values do not appear as 8192/16384, check that the VOI-LUT is enabled on the PACS.
The VOI-LUT often can be enabled with a drop-down list on the image or through hanging
protocols.
Note: This does not indicate that the PACS does not support VOI-LUTs. Support for VOI-LUTs
is strictly determined by the visual appearance of PACS test images #1 and #6.
3. Record the results in Table 5-4 (see 5.7.4 PACS image comparison results on page 111).
Burn-on-Send Mode (PACS Test Image #6)

2. Verify that the WC/WW values are 8192/16384.
If the values do not appear as 8192/16384, check that the VOI-LUT is enabled on the PACS.
The VOI-LUT often can be enabled with a drop-down list on the image or through hanging
protocols.
3. Record the results in Table 5-4 (see 5.7.4 PACS image comparison results on page 111).
5.7.3.4 Checking for image saturation

2. Check that the clinical chest area appears with no saturation in the lung or abdomen region.
5.7.3.5 Testing reduced dynamic range with Burn-on-Send

The Burn-on-Send configuration causes a reduced dynamic range in the image if you change the
window level of the image on the PACS.
2. Change the window level on the PACS to attempt to see the five squares in all twelve bands.
Start by changing the WC value to 0 and the WW value to 500 (the appropriate values may
vary among different PACS workstations).

The loss of dynamic range is most common in the top dark band. If reduced dynamic range
occurs, the five squares will not be visible in the top dark band (band #1).
5.7.4 PACS image comparison results

Use the values in Table 5-4 to quantitatively compare images. For example, to determine if a PACS
supports GE VOI-LUTs, compare PACS test images #1 and #6. If the number of distinct bands and
visible squares are equal, then the PACS correctly supports VOI-LUTs.
Tests Results
WC = __________
DICOM header on PACS (image #1 No-Burn) WW = __________
VOI-LUT (Yes/No)
WC = __________
DICOM header on PACS (image #6 Burn-on-Send) WW = __________
VOI-LUT (Yes/No)
WC = __________
Values displayed on PACS viewer (image #1)
WW = __________
WC = __________
Values displayed on PACS viewer (image #6)
WW = __________
Saturation visible in lung or abdomen region
Able to see all five squares in top band of image #6
Able to see all five squares in top band of image #1
Images #1, 4, 5 appear visually identical
Images #6, 7, 8 appear visually identical
PACS able to select Normal/Harder/Softer
VOI-LUT not present;
DICOM header on PACS (image #9 CR-Fallback).
correct WW/WC
Table 5-4 PACS image comparison results


Chapter 6 Mechanical adjustment procedures
THE POTENTIAL FOR INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRICAL AND

HAZARDS MECHANICAL HAZARDS IS HIGH. CAREFULLY READ AND FOLLOW
EXIST INSTRUCTIONS. ALWAYS LOTO THE SYSTEM BEFORE ATTEMPTING
SERVICE OF ANY KIND, AS DESCRIBED IN Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin.
Section 6.1 Column related assemblies

6.1.1 Column balance procedure
6.1.1.1 Personnel requirements

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20
6.1.1.2 Preliminary requirements
6.1.1.2.1 Tools and test equipment

6.1.1.2.2 Consumables
• Loctite 242 (GE part# 46-170686P2) or equivalent
6.1.1.2.3 Replacement parts

• None
6.1.1.2.4 Safety
• None
6.1.1.2.5 Required conditions

• None
Chapter 6 Mechanical adjustment procedures Page 113

6.1.1.3 Procedure
1. Remove the apron hanger bracket from the vertical column. See Figure 6-1.
Item Description
1 Apron hanger bracket
Figure 6-1 Apron hanger bracket
2. You now can see the top of the compressed spring assembly (see Figure 6-2). There is up to
1.5 inches of adjustment before the tool insertion becomes un-usable.
Note: The column comes pre-adjusted such that the fine adjustment range falls within the physical
adjustment opening in the column (see Figure 6-2, Item 2). Do not attempt to adjust the spring
tension if the tool does not engage in the adjustment holes easily.
Page 114 Section 6.1 Column related assemblies

1
2
Item Description
1 Counterbalance adjustment holes
2 Physical adjustment opening in the column
Figure 6-2 Vertical counterbalance adjustment
3. Raise the tube arm to approximately 2.5 cm (1 in) from the top of the column. This reduces
spring tension, allowing easier adjustment.
4. Using a 4 mm hex key inserted into the adjustment holes (see Figure 6-2), you can adjust the
spring tension for up to 5 lbs of balance force.
5. Rotating the assembly clockwise reduces the tension on the spring resulting in less buoyancy
of the arm.
6. Rotating the assembly counter-clockwise increases the tension on the spring resulting in more
buoyancy of the arm.
7. Adjust the spring tension such that 80% of the main travel is stable. 10% at the lowest tube
position and 10% of the highest tube position should have minimal to no movement when the
brakes are engaged.
8. Apply thread locker (i.e. Loctite 242 [blue]) to the apron hanger bracket screws. Install the
bracket and tighten the screws.

6.1.2 Tube latch to arm pin adjustment procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

• None
6.1.2.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
6.1.2.3 Procedure
Note: The tube latch assembly mounted to the main body of the mobile unit (called the Thorax assembly)
has minimal to no adjustment capability. Therefore, the adjustments must be performed relative to
the tube latch pin arm mounting assembly. There is up to 13 mm of adjustment capability for smooth
and reliable engagement of the tube latch assembly.

1. Ensure the tube latch assembly is properly secured to the Thorax. See Figure 6-3.
Item Description
1 Tube latch assembly
Figure 6-3 Tube latch assembly on Thorax
2. Adjust the screw tension of the tube latch pin assembly on the horizontal arm (see Figure 6-4)
such that it is snug but can be moved forward/backward with slight effort.
3. Make sure the arm is fully retracted/compressed.

Item Description
1 Tube latch pin assembly
Figure 6-4 Tube latch pin assembly
4. Lower the horizontal arm so that it engages with the Thorax tube latch assembly. Manually
slide the tube latch pin assembly to facilitate the engagement.
5. Manually release the Thorax side of the tube latch such that the horizontal arm side of the pin
assembly is not disturbed.
6. Carefully torque fasteners of the tube latch pin assembly to 8.1 N-m (6 lb-ft) - no thread locker
is used. See Figure 6-4.
7. Raise and lower the horizontal arm such that the arm latching feature can be engaged and
disengaged several times to ensure smooth and reliable functionality.

6.1.3 Column rotational detent procedure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

• None
6.1.3.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
6.1.3.3 Procedure
1. Ensure the tube latch to arm pin adjustment procedure has been completed (see 6.1.2 Tube
latch to arm pin adjustment procedure on page 116).
2. Disengage the tube latch and raised the tube slightly above the tube latch.
3. Using the collimator left/right lock switch buttons, rotate the column such that you feel the
column rotation detent setting.
4. Release the collimator lock switches when the column rotational lock detent is felt.
5. Lower the tube to engage the tube latch assembly.
If the alignment is not correct, proceed with the following steps.

Column rotation detent adjustment

1. Remove the left side cover and left front cover. See 9.1.3 Front cover removal on page 316.
2. Locate the column detent eccentric adustment (Item 1) as shown in Figure 6-5. A 6mm Allen
wrench or adapter (for ratchet) is required for the adjustment.
IItem Description
1 Column detent eccentric adjustment
Figure 6-5 Column detent eccentric adjustment
3. Locate the column detent lock nut (Figure 6-6, Item 1) at the bottom of the column (under-side
of the chassis). While holding the eccentric adjustment from the top, loosen the detent lock
nut with a 3/4" wrench or socket.

IItem Description
1 Column detent lock nut
Figure 6-6 Column detent lock nut
4. The detent is adjusted through the use of an eccentric, using a 6 mm Allen wrench. Rotate the
eccentric to adjust the left-to-right positioning of the tube latch pin (located on bottom of the
horizontal arm) such that it squarely aligns with the tube latch assembly (located on top of the
Thorax). See Figure 6-7.

IItem Description
1 Tube latch assembly
2 Tube latch pin
Figure 6-7 Column detent latch alignment
5. While holding the eccentric adjustment in position to prevent movement, torque the 3/4"
column detent lock nut to 18N-m (13.3 lb-ft).
6. Using the collimator left/right lock switches to disengage the locks, rotate the column left and
right such that it stops in the detent and then verify the tube latch mechanism engages
smoothly and reliably from both clockwise and counterclockwise rotational directions. Re-
adjust as necessary.
7. Install the front and side covers.

Chapter 7 Regulatory testing

When instructed to do so during installation, planned maintenance, or repair procedures, complete
the tests in this chapter to meet U.S. federal regulatory compliance requirements and to ensure that
X-rays are generated properly.
Section 7.1 U.S. federally required tests

Note: Important! The regulatory tests described in this section are required by the United States Health
and Human Services (HHS) Department for U.S. installations. US-only or as required by local
regulations.
7.1.1 Required test equipmentte

Gather the test equipment, tools, and materials listed below. Record the serial number and
calibration due date, if applicable. Also record the manufacturer if not specified below.
• HHS test kit (GE 46-303879G1, 46-315694G1)
• Oscilloscope
• Radiation meter with integrate mode
• Probe test stand
• Light meter with 5% accuracy rating
• Digital multimeter
• Light to X-ray field test pattern (GE 46-303843P1 or equivalent)
• Ground tester (Hioki 3157 or equivalent)
• Leakage tester (Dale 601/601E or equivalent)
7.1.2 Preparing for testing

For all tests, verify that the DAP meter is removed from the collimator rails unless otherwise
specified.
Before beginning testing, perform the required calibrations (see Chapter 5 Calibration).
Chapter 7 Regulatory testing Page 123

7.1.3 Collimator testing

Perform these tests to verify that:
• The collimator lamp illuminates properly
• The light field and X-ray field are aligned
• The field size matches the expected size per the settings on the collimator
7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity

Use this procedure to verify that the collimator high-intensity field lamp illuminates at a distance of
100 cm (39.37 in) from the focal spot at no less than the light intensity specification in Table 7-1.
Site location Light intensity

Within the U.S. 160 lux (14.9 ft-c)
Table 7-1 Light intensity specification
1. Verify that the light meter has an accuracy of 5% or better.

2. Remove the collimator covers.
3. Adjust the CLS (collimator lamp supply) potentiometer so that the voltage at the collimator
lamp is 20.0 - 22.0 V.
Note: Ignore voltage polarity. The lead positions dictate polarity.
4. Place the light meter on a horizontal surface 40 inches from the X-ray tube focal spot. Direct
the sensor toward the collimator light source.
5. Turn on the collimator lamp.
Note: Important! To ensure that the lamp reaches full brightness, wait while the lamp illuminates and
then automatically shuts off after 30 seconds. Then turn on the lamp again and proceed to the next
step.
6. Use the dials on the front of the collimator to adjust the field size to 10 x 10 inches.
7. Turn off the collimator lamp.
8. Turn off the room lights and use the light meter to measure the ambient light level. Record the
ambient light level here:
Ambient light level: ______________
9. Turn on the collimator lamp.
10. Position the light meter in the center of each quadrant and record the intensity of the light field
here:
Quadrant 1: ____________________
Quadrant 2: ____________________
Quadrant 3: ____________________
Quadrant 4: ____________________
11. Turn off the collimator lamp.
12. Calculate the average illumination by summing the light levels of the 4 quadrants and dividing
by 4, then subtracting the ambient light level. Record the average illumination here:
Average illumination: ______________
Page 124 Section 7.1 U.S. federally required tests

13. Verify that the average illumination is greater than the ambient brightness by the specification
listed in Table 7-1.
7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray field alignment

Use this test to verify that the light field and X-ray field are aligned laterally and longitudinally. Total
misalignment may not exceed the specification that pertains to the site, given below.
Table 7-2 Light field to X-ray field alignment specification by site
Site location Total misalignment

Within the U.S. Not to exceed 1.8% of SID
Be sure to follow the instructions for Optima XR200amx or Optima XR220amx, as appropriate. For
example, the Optima XR200amx uses a cassette as a receptor, whereas the Optima XR220amx
uses a digital detector.
This procedure requires a light to X-ray test pattern, GE p/n 46-303843P1.
7.1.3.2.1 Preliminary test - light field accuracy
Note: If this test fails, then the Light to X-ray field alignment test on page 126 will fail.
1. Place the X-ray receptor on a flat, horizontal surface such as a table or floor 40 inches from
the source.
2. Place the light to X-ray field test pattern on the receptor and center it squarely.
3. Align the X-ray tube to the receptor.
4. Set the source-to-image distance (SID) to 40 inches.
5. Use the collimator dials to adjust the light field settings to 10 X 10 inches on the collimator
scales.
6. Turn on the field light and squarely center the crosshair on the test pattern.
7. Minimize the room lights.
8. See Figure 7-1. Measure the light field projection edges on the test pattern marks to the 10 X
10 inches test pattern scale for each North, South, East, and West vector. (This is the error
measurement.)
- If the light field is outside the test pattern scale, record it as a positive (+) value.
- If the light field is inside the test pattern scale, record it as a negative (-) value.
Enter the measurements here:
Error measurement: N _____ S_____ E_____ W_____

N
1
W E
Item Description
1 Light field to X-ray field test pattern
2 Light field or X-ray field
Figure 7-1 Light to X-ray field test
9. Calculate the absolute error value for N+S and E+W and record it here:
ABS(N+S) error: _____
ABS (E+W) error: _____
10. Determine the percentage of misalignment and record it here:
ABS(N+S) error / SID * 100 = __________
ABS(E+W) error / SID * 100 = __________
Pass criteria is  1.8% SID
7.1.3.2.2 Light to X-ray field alignment test

1. Prepare for an exposure.
2. Align the X-ray tube to the receptor for a SID = 40 inches.
3. Place the test pattern on the receptor and center it squarely.
4. Use the collimator dials to adjust the light field settings to 10 X 10 inches on the test pattern.
5. Minimize the room lights.
6. Select 50 kVp and 1 mAs (small spot).
7. Make an exposure.
8. Continue with the appropriate procedure below:
- For Optima XR200amx, see 7.1.3.2.3 Light field to X-ray field alignment (Optima

XR200amx ) on page 127.

- For Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade, see 7.1.3.2.4 Light
field to X-ray field alignment (Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital
upgrade) on page 127.
7.1.3.2.3 Light field to X-ray field alignment (Optima XR200amx )

1. Open the collimator blades to 12 X 12 inches.
Be careful not to bump the receptor or test pattern.
2. Make another exposure on the same receptor.
3. Develop the film in a dark room.
4. Use a light box to locate the edges of the 10 X 10 inch field, and make a pencil mark on the
North, South, East, and West edges of the 10 X 10 inch X-ray field.
5. Measure from the 10 X 10 inch test pattern mark (light field) to the pencil mark of the 10 X 10
inch X-ray field for each North, South, East, and West vector. This is the error measurement.
- If the light field is outside the test pattern scale, record it as a positive (+) value.
- If the light field is inside the test pattern scale, record it as a negative (-) value.
Enter the measurements in the X-ray field row of Table 7-3.
Value N S E W
Light field 5 5 5 5
X-ray field
Error
Table 7-3 Optima XR200amx light field to X-ray field alignment
ABS(N +S) error / SID * 100 = __________
ABS(E +W) error / SID * 100 = __________
8. Verify that the percentage of misalignment is within the specification in Table 7-2.
7.1.3.2.4 Light field to X-ray field alignment (Optima XR220amx or Optima

XR200amx with digital upgrade)
1. Select the RAW image, select Annotation, select Measurement Tools, then select line cursors.
2. Using the Line Measurement Tools, measure the text pattern scale number seen for each
North, South, East, and West edge of the image. This is the X-ray field dimension (for example,
4.7).

Enter the measurements in the X-ray field row of Table 7-4.
Value N S E W
Light field 5 5 5 5
X-ray field
Error
Table 7-4 Optima XR220amx light field to X-ray field alignment
3. Determine the error (difference) between the light field and X-ray field values for the N, S, E,
and W vector.
- If the X-ray field value is greater than 5, record the error as a positive (+) value.
- If the X-ray field value is less than 5, record the error as a positive (+) value.
ABS(N +S) error / SID * 100 = __________
ABS(E +W) error / SID * 100 = __________
6. Verify that the percentage of misalignment is within the specification in Table 7-2.
7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR200amx)

For Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade, see 7.1.3.4 Testing field size
indicator accuracy (Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 129.
Use this test to ensure that the difference between the indicated field size and the actual field size
is not greater than the specification that pertains to the site, given below.
Site location Total difference

Within the U.S. Not to exceed 1.8% SID in either direction
Table 7-5 Field size indicator specification by site

3. Set the SID to 100 cm.
4. Set the X-ray angle to 0 degrees.
5. Set the field size to 25 x 25 cm.
6. Select 50 kVp and 1 mAs.
7. Take an exposure.
8. Develop the film in a dark room.
9. Use a light box to locate the edge of the first X-ray field, and place a pencil mark on the North,
South, East, and West edges of the X-ray field.
10. Measure from the pencil mark to the 25 x 25 cm exposure edges.
11. Record the measured value of the North-South distance (d1) here:
d1: _____________
12. Record the measured value of the East-West distance (d2) here:

d2: ______________
13. Calculate the indicator to actual size error.
25 cm - actual size d1 25 cm - actual size d2
---------------------------------- x 100 -------------------------------- x 100
100 cm 100 cm
14. Record the error values here:
(d1) = height of image % error __________
(d2) = width of image % error ___________
15. Verify that the difference between indicated field size and actual field size does not exceed the
specification in Table 7-5.
7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR220amx or Optima

XR200amx with digital upgrade)
For Optima XR200amx, see 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR200amx) on
page 128.
Use this test to ensure that the difference between the indicated field size and the actual field size
is not greater than the specification that pertains to the site, given below.
Table 7-6 Field size indicator specification by site
Site location Total difference

Within the U.S. Not to exceed 1.8% SID in either direction
To determine image size and centering, exposures are to be completed in Application mode. All
measurements are to use the RAW image.
3. Set the SID to 100 cm.
4. Set the X-ray angle to 0 degrees.
5. Set the field size to 25 x 25 cm.
6. Select 50 kVp and 1 mAs.
7. Take an exposure.
8. Select the Measurement Tools icon, and select Line.
9. Using the Line Measurement tool, measure the size of the X-ray image at the detector plane.
Line values are displayed in the bottom right corner of the screen.
10. Measure the distance between the front blade and rear blade of the image. Record that value
as d1, here:
d1 _____
11. Measure the distance between the left blade and right blade of the image. Record that value
as d2, here:
d2 _____
12. Calculate the indicator to actual size error, using d1 and d2 from above.
25 cm - actual size d1 25 cm - actual size d2
---------------------------------- x 100 -------------------------------- x 100
100 cm 100 cm
13. Record the error values here:
(d1) = height of image % error __________

(d2) = width of image % error ___________

14. Verify that the difference between indicated field size and actual field size does not exceed the
specification in Table 7-6.
7.1.4 Generator tests
7.1.4.1 Operator warning message

Verify that the following warning message is displayed on the control panel (ensure the warning
label of the applicable language is legible as required by local regulations):
"Warning: This X-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe exposure
factors, operating instructions and maintenance schedules are observed. To be used by
authorized personnel only."
7.1.4.2 Testing kVp accuracy

Perform the kVp accuracy test to determine whether actual X-ray energy generated by the system
at a particular voltage matches the expected energy (within a specified tolerance).
kVp accuracy is measured using a non-invasive meter
7.1.4.2.1 Piranha test meter setup

Setting up the Piranha and Palm OS for wireless connectivity
1. Power on the Piranha using the power switch.
2. Place the Piranha under the tube or mount it on a stand as needed.
Position the Piranha in such a way that the detector area is orientated perpendicular to
the anode/cathode axis.
3. Collimate the X-ray field slightly larger than the Piranha active sensor.
QABrowser for kVp Accuracy Test
Note: DO NOT SELECT THE "AMX-4" MODE (UNDER SETTINGS/WAVEFORM) ON THE METER.
THE "AMX-4" MODE IS NOT VALID FOR USE WITH THIS PRODUCT.
1. Turn on the Palm OS.

2. Launch the QABrowser by tapping on the QABrowser icon.
* Please note that All needs to be selected at the top of the screen for the QABrowser
icon to be visible.
3. The handheld searches for available Bluetooth devices and shows them to you.
4. Select the Piranha meter and Press Ok.
* Please note that the Piranha meter might be selected automatically thus proceeding
to the next step.
5. From the Select Type of Measurement Menu select Radiography and press Select.
6. From the Select Parameter Menu select Tube Voltage and press Select.
7. Tap Appl to open application list.
8. From Select Application Menu choose Accuracy and then tap the Back button to bring
you back to the kVp measurement screen.

7.1.4.2.2 Procedure
1. Turn on system power and boot up the system.
2. Position the tube above the kVp meter at a SID of 100 cm (39.4 in).
3. Collimate the beam to slightly larger than the kVp meter active sensor.
4. Select the kV and mAs as defined in Table 7-7 (for 15 kW generator) or Table 7-8 (for 30 kW
generator).
Table 7-7 kV and mAs settings for kVp accuracy - 15 kW generator
Sample Selected kV Selected mAs Exposure Time (See Note)

1 50 2.5 <40mS
2 80 2.5 <40mS
3 125 1.6 <40mS
4 50 25 >40mS
5 80 20 >40mS
6 125 12.5 >40mS
Note: Exposure Time reference is for generator specifications (not selectable).
Table 7-8 kV and mAs settings for kVp accuracy - 30 kW generator

1 50 2.5 <40mS
2 80 2.5 <40mS
3 125 1.6 <40mS
4 50 25 >40mS
5 80 32 >40mS
6 125 25 >40mS
5. Make an exposure and measure the kVp value. Record the values in Table 7-9 (for 15 kW
generator) or Table 7-10 (for 30 kW generator).
Table 7-9 kVp values for kVp accuracy - 15 kW generator
Sample Measured kVp Acceptance Criteria

1 +/- 4 kVp and +/- 2% of selected kVp
4 +/- 4 kVp of selected kVp

Table 7-10 kVp values for kVp accuracy - 30 kW generator
Sample Measured kVp Acceptance Criteria

6. Verify that the kVp accuracy passes the regulatory limits for each test exposure.
7.1.4.3 Testing mAs accuracy
7.1.4.3.1 Overview
mAs accuracy is measured using a non-invasive kVp meter and oscilloscope connected to the mA
test point of the generator. Considering a threshold of 75% of the requested kV, the mAs is the
integral of the mA during the exposure time:
The exposure time (pulse width) is the time between when the kV waveform rises above the
threshold and when the kV falls back below the threshold.
For short exposure times (< 15 mSec), it is necessary to accurately measure and calculate the mAs
by integrating the mA and time in defined intervals. (Three are used for this example.)
The integrated values are the sum of the weighted means of the measured time intervals for
the full exposure time.
Mt1+ Mt2 + Mt3 = MT
Where
M = mean of the measured mA
t1, t2, t3 = time interval of the measured mean of mA (Mt1, Mt2, Mt3)
T = total exposure time @ 75% of kVp rise and fall value.
MT * T = mAs
This is simplified by the use of an oscilliscope that supports signal integration. The TDS 3000 family
of scopes provides this function using vertical cursors and gating cursors selections. So a single
measurement can be made for the full exposure defined as T above with a highly accurate result.

Figure 7-2 mA waveform, example 1
For exposures > 15 mSec the waveform stabilizes and the effects of Mt1 and Mt2 become
negligible.
Using the cursor gating function find the mean of the entire waveform.
Figure 7-3 mA waveform, example 2
Note: Because of the nature of the design of the high frequency generator, the use of a kV meter to
determine kVp rise time is not necessary. The rise/fall of the kVp waveform has negligible impact
upon the mAs measurement.
7.1.4.3.2 Procedure
1. Connect a CH 1 scope probe to TP5 (signal scale is 100mA = 1V) of the generator and chassis
ground. See Figure 7-4.
Note: TP4 is the mA Anode Negative signal and can be used in place of TP5.

TP4
TP5
Figure 7-4 Generator TP4 & TP5 mAs test points
2. Select the kV and mAs as defined in Table 7-11 (for 15 kW generator) or Table 7-12 (for 30
kW generator).
Table 7-11 kV and mAs settings for mA accuracy - 15 kW generator

1 50 2 <15mS
2 125 1.25 <15mS
3 50 25 >15mS
4 125 12.5 >15mS
Table 7-12 kV and mAs settings for mA accuracy - 30 kW generator

1 50 2 <15mS
2 125 1.25 <15mS
3 50 25 >15mS
4 125 25 >15mS
3. Adjust scope settings to display a single waveform.

4. Using the vertical cursor measurement functions, position the cursors on the mA waveform at
75% of the rise/fall for the entire exposure.
5. Using the undisturbed vertical cursor measurement functions, record the mean of the mA
waveform for the entire exposure. This requires using the integration function of the
oscilliscope. Each scope can vary as to how this is performed.
For the TDS 3000 Series scopes, the following applies.

a. Press the MEASURE button. Press the GATING button (ignore on/off state).
b. Press the BETWEEN THE V BAR CURSORS button.
c. Press SELECT MEASUREMENT FOR CH 1 button.
d. Change selections as need and select MEAN.
6. Record the CH 1 Mean value in Table 7-13 (for 15 kW generator) or Table 7-14 (for 30 kW
generator).
Table 7-13 Ch1 Mean value - 15 kW generator
Sample Ch1 Mean value Measured Time Acceptance Criteria

1 +/- 20% or 0.1mAs, whichever is greater
Table 7-14 Ch1 Mean value - 30 kW generator
Sample Ch1 Mean value Measured Time Acceptance Criteria

7. Verify that mAs accuracy passes the regulatory limits for each test exposure.
7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and linearity of exposure
7.1.4.4.1 Overview
Reproducibility: For any specific combination of selected technique factors, the estimated
coefficient of variation (C.V.) of radiation exposures shall be no greater than 0.05.
Linearity: The quotients of the average measured dose divided by the selected technic
values at 2 consecutive settings shall not exceed 0.10 times their sum result for
HHS.
7.1.4.4.2 Piranha test meter setup

Setting up the Piranha and Palm OS for wireless connectivity
1. Power on the Piranha using the power switch.
2. Place the Piranha under the tube or mount it on a stand as needed.
Position the Piranha in such a way that the detector area is orientated perpendicular to
the anode/cathode axis.
3. Collimate the X-ray field slightly larger than the Piranha active sensor.
QABrowser for Reproducibility Test
Note: DO NOT SELECT THE "AMX-4" MODE (UNDER SETTINGS/WAVEFORM) ON THE METER.
THE "AMX-4" MODE IS NOT VALID FOR USE WITH THIS PRODUCT.

1. Turn on the Palm OS.

2. Launch the QABrowser by tapping on the QABrowser icon.
* Please note that All needs to be selected at the top of the screen for the QABrowser
icon to be visible.
3. The handheld searches for available Bluetooth devices and shows them to you.
4. Select the Piranha meter and Press Ok.
* Please note that the Piranha meter might be selected automatically thus proceeding
to the next step.
5. From the Select Type of Measurement Menu select Radiography and press Select.
6. From the Select Parameter Menu select Dose and press Select. This brings you to the
mGy (dose) measurement screen.
7. Tap Appl to open application list.
8. From Select Application Menu choose Reproducibility and then tap the Back button
twice. This brings you back to the mGy (dose) measurement screen.
Note: When the exposure is less than 5ms:

The default time on the Piranha is set to 5ms, which records a low signal continuously since the
exposure time is shorter than 5ms.
1. Tap the i symbol.
2. Under Conditions Menu select Internal Detector.
3. Under Delay drop down menu select Off.
7.1.4.4.3 Procedure
Data collections for each sample set defined in the tables below consist of 10 exposures each.
Each sample of 10 exposures must be completed within 1 hour of start. There are a total of
60 exposures required to complete this section.
1. Position the dose probe 30 cm above the floor to limit scatter effects.
2. Position the tube above the probe at a SID of 100 cm.
3. Collimate the beam to slightly larger than the dose probe active sensor.
4. Select the kV and mAs starting with Sample A in Table 7-15.
Table 7-15 kV and mAs values for reproducibility tests - 15kW and 30kW generator
Selected kV Selected mAs

Sample A 80 32
SID = 100 cm
Sample B 80 40
SID = 100 cm
5. Measure the exposure in uGy for each of the 10 exposures. Each sample of 10 exposures
must be completed within 1 hour of start.
After each exposure, recycle the technique (switch to other values and then return them to the
original values). Also vary the time between exposures to capture any filament heating
variations.

6. Measure and record the values in Table 7-16.
Table 7-16 Measured uGy values
Measured uGy for each exposure

Sample
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A
B
7. Repeat this process of 10 exposures with Sample B, using the correct techniques as given in
Table 7-15.
8. Verify that the reproducibility (Coefficient of Variation) for samples A and B is < 0.045 as
calculated.
Calculation:
[CV] = the Coefficient of Variation = [Std Dev] / [Average Mean]
[Std Dev] = the standard deviation of 10 samples [Sample A - exposures 1 through
10]
[Average Mean] = the average of 10 samples [Sample A - exposures 1 through 10]
Sample A: ______________
Sample B: ______________
9. Verify that the linerarity for samples A and B is < 0.10 for HHS. (This is a pass or fail solution.)
Calculation:
ABS[(avgmA/Selected mAs) - (avgmB/Selected mAs) <= (0.1((avgmA/Selected mAs) +
(avgmB/Selected mAs))]
[avgmX] = the average of 10 samples [Sample X = exposures 1 through 10]
Avg Mean Sample A = avgmA =________________

Avg Mean Sample B = avgmB =________________
Verify the linearity meets the regulatory limits.
7.1.5 Beam Quality Test
7.1.5.1 Measuring half value layer (HVL)

This test measures the combined HVL of the tube and collimator.
1. See Figure 7-5. Using a probe holder, position the probe a minimum of 30 cm (12 in) from a
flat level surface (to avoid scatter) and 30 cm (12 in) from the X-ray beam output port
(collimator).
2. Collimate the beam down to just cover the receptor of the dose probe.

X-ray
Focal Spot
Tube
Collimator
Additional Test
Filtration
Tape
30 cm (12 in)
Useful Beam
Probe
Maintain at least
Table or any 30 cm (12 in)
other object from any object
Figure 7-5 HVL test setup
3. Select kVp of 80, mAs of 12.5.

4. Remove or dial out all filters that are removable by the operator and collimate slightly larger
than the active volume of the probe using the light field.
5. Make an exposure and measure exposure with no added filters. Record the reading.
Exposure (without additional filtration) ___________
This represents 100% transmission level.
6. Place 3 mm additional filtration (using filters from HVL Attenuator, GE p/n 46-194427P274,
total aluminum filtration = 3.0 mm) in beam. Additional filtration must be as close to the source
as possible. Affix to the collimator rails using masking tape. Ensure tape does not encroach
upon the usable beam.
7. Make an exposure with additional filtration. Record the reading.
Exposure (with additional filtration) ___________
8. Determine the ratio.
Ratio = ________________ Exposure (with additional filtration) / Exposure (without additional filtration)
Note: The ratio of Exposure (with additional filtration) to Exposure (without additional filtration) shall be
equal to or greater than 0.5.
9. Enter the beam quality data in Table 7-17.
Table 7-17 Beam quality data (half value layer)
Radiation Reading Ratio Aluminum Manufacture

(with/without) Filtration Date
With Without
Value
Additional Filtration Additional Filtration
3.0 mm

7.1.6 Testing generator operator indicators
7.1.6.1 Testing tones, buzzers, and the X-ray ON indicator

1. On the system touchscreen, start an exam and select an exposure.
2. Make the exposure.
3. Verify that an X-ray tone sounds and the X-ray ON indicator illuminates during the exposure.
4. Verify that the selected kVp and mAs are displayed in the protocol modification frames and the
left side of the status bar. Both displays should match.
7.1.6.2 Testing the heat unit alarm

1. Change the generator configuration of the Tube HUR Alarm to 95%. Select COMMIT.
3. Make X-ray exposures (use appropriate radiation safety procedures, i.e. close collimator
blades, etc.):
- 80kVp
- 40mAs
4. When the Heat Units go below 95%, a tone is heard.
5. Return the Tube HUR Alarm to 20% (default). Select COMMIT.
Section 7.2 Testing electrical safety
Perform ground resistance testing & leakage testing only in the cases outlined in Table 7-18.
Site location Perform ground testing? Perform leakage testing?

Yes, if you replace a damaged plug
Within the United States or power cord or incoming AC Yes
circuitry.
Yes, if you replace the standard
U.S. style plug with a regionally
Outside of the United States compliant plug, or if you replace a Yes
damaged plug or power cord or
incoming AC circuitry.
Table 7-18 Test requirements
7.2.1 Performing ground resistance testing

Ground resistance testing must be performed if the AC power plug has been replaced or disturbed.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Voltage present!
Disconnect the AC charging plug from any wall outlet power source.
7.2.1.1 Gathering test equipment

Obtain a Hioki 3157 grounding tester or equivalent. For sites in Europe, use the cables that are
provided with the Hioki tester. For sites outside of Europe, obtain the following:
• Two green/yellow ground stranded wire cables:
- Cable A = 2.5 mm² (12 AWG), 3 m (9.8 ft)
- Cable B = 2.5 mm² (12 AWG), 5 m (16.4 ft)
• Two lugs to fit 0.64 cm (0.25 in) terminals to the meter end of each cable (Figure 7-6).
• Two clamps to fit onto the other end of the cables (Figure 7-6).
Figure 7-6 Lug and clamp on ground wire
7.2.1.2 Attaching test cables

1. On the tester, loosen both the current output (Source) terminal knob (top right) and the voltage
measurement (Sense) terminal knob (bottom right) by turning them counterclockwise.
2. Connect Cable B to the current output knob.
3. Connect the short bar between the current output and voltage measurement knobs as shown
in Figure 7-7.
Page 140 Section 7.2 Testing electrical safety

Figure 7-7 Test Cable B and short bar installation
4. Turn the two knobs clockwise to tighten.

5. Loosen the other current output (Source) terminal (top left), attach Cable A, and retighten the
knob.
The resulting connections should look as shown in Figure 7-8.
Figure 7-8 Cable A, Cable B, and short bar connections

7.2.1.3 Setting test parameters

1. Turn on the tester by pressing the POWER button.
The tester enters the ready state five seconds after startup (the model name and version
display during startup).
2. Verify that the tester displays the test parameters specified in Table 7-19.
Test parameters Values

Canada: 30.0 A
Current
All other countries: 25.0 A
Test value 0.100 Ohms
Timer 5.0 sec
Table 7-19 Ground resistance test parameters
If it does not, perform the following steps to change the parameters as needed (the system will
save the settings even after system power is turned off). See Figure 7-9.
A. While in the ready state, press the or button until the output current display
begins flashing.
B. Press the or button to change the output current. The value changes in
0.1-A increments. To change the value by 1.0-A increments, press + or
button.
C. Press the button again to move to each of the other settings (Maximum Test
Value, Timer, and Frequency).
D. Use the or + buttons as needed to adjust the values.
E. Press .
Figure 7-9 Test parameter value settings
3. While in the ready state, press the + buttons to display the Optional function
setting screen.
The Output Current Frequency is the first digit displayed, where the value is 0 for 50 Hz or 1
for 60 Hz. The Pass/Fail hold function is represented by the second digit.
4. Press the or button until the second digit begins flashing.

5. Press the button to change the value to 1 (Figure 7-10).
6. Press the + buttons to save this setting and return to the ready state. The unit will
display and hold the measured resistance value after the test.

Figure 7-10 Current setting on the tester
7.2.1.4 Performing zero adjustment

Ground measurements may be affected by a voltage drop in the A and B cables. To account for the
voltage drop, perform the zero adjustment procedure before taking ground measurements.
1. Confirm that the unit is in the ready state.
2. Short circuit cable A with cable B.
Figure 7-11 Cable A and cable B short-circuited
3. Press the button.

The orange test indicator is displayed, the 0ADJ indicator begins flashing below the resistance
value, and the zero adjustment begins. During the zero adjustment, a preset current is output
through the shorted leads. When zero adjustment is complete (about three seconds), the unit
enters the ready state, and the 0ADJ lamp lights.
If the test cables are too resistive, the offset cannot be set. Use less-resistive cables and try to
set the offset again. The zero adjustment function is automatically disabled if the output current
value is changed or if data settings are changed.
Zero adjustment is possible within a range equivalent to a resistance between 0.000 Ohms and
0.100 Ohms on the resistor indicator. If the measured value falls outside this range, the
resistance value flashes, and the unit enters the ready state.

Figure 7-12 Tester during and after zero adjustment

7.2.1.5 Taking ground measurements

1. Turn off system power and main circuit breaker.
2. Connect cable A to the grounding pin on the electrical plug.
3. Connect cable B to the first measurement point listed in Table 7-20.
4. On the tester, press the green START button.
The orange indicator is displayed, the Test Current display value quickly increases from 0.0 to
the preset output current (25.0 A or 30.0 A), and the timer value decreases from 5.0 seconds
to 0.0 seconds.
If the test passes, the green Pass indicator is displayed. Record the displayed resistance value
in Table 7-20.
5. Press Stop.
6. Move cable B to the next measurement (Table 7-20), then repeat steps 4 and 5.
The voltage must not exceed 2.5 V (0.1 ohms).
Component Measurement point Measured resistance

Tube endcap screws or HV cable nuts
Tube
See Figure 7-13
Skin guards
Collimator
See Figure 7-14
Scroll support rivets
Column
See Figure 7-15
Inside hinge screws of accessory access cover
Bin
See Figure 7-16
Tube latch on top cover
Tube latch
See Figure 7-17
Table 7-20 Ground measurement test points

Figure 7-13 Tube test points
Figure 7-14 Collimator test points

Figure 7-15 Column test point
Figure 7-16 Rear bin accessory access cover test point

Figure 7-17 Tube latch test point

7.2.2 Performing leakage current testing

If ground testing is required for this system, verify that the ground testing results (see Table 7-20)
are < 0.1 Ohms before conducting leakage testing.
Leakage testing must be performed if the AC power plug has been replaced or disturbed.
The leakage current must not exceed 300 uA.
Before you begin, verify these steps:
1. Complete ground testing, if required (see 7.2.1 Performing ground resistance testing on
page 139).
2. Ensure that all system covers are installed.
3. Obtain a Dale 601/601E test meter or equivalent.
Perform leakage testing under the five specific conditions outlined in Table 7-21:
Test meter
Condition Power X-ray on Section reference
outlet
7.2.2.1 Condition 1: Power off, normal outlet,
1 Off Normal No
X-ray off
7.2.2.2 Condition 2: Power off, reversed
2 Off Reversed No
outlet, X-ray off
7.2.2.3 Condition 3: Power on, normal outlet,
3 On Normal No
X-ray off
7.2.2.4 Condition 4: Power on, reversed
4 On Reversed No
outlet, X-ray off
7.2.2.5 Condition 5: Power on, normal outlet,
5 On Normal Yes
X-ray on
Table 7-21 Leakage current test conditions

7.2.2.1 Condition 1: Power off, normal outlet, X-ray off

1. Turn off the system power, main circuit breaker ON.
On the test meter, set the Function switch to ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE, the L2 switch to
CLOSED, the Outlet switch to Normal and the M.A.P/Lift Gnd to OFF (Figure 7-18).
Figure 7-18 Dale 601 meter

2. Insert the black coil cord with clamp into the CHASSIS connection located on the top of the
test meter (Figure 7-19).
Figure 7-19 Dale 601 meter, top view
3. Connect the Dale 601 test meter to a wall outlet.

4. Important! Connect the System AC power cord to the receptacle on the test meter.
5. Using the clamp, connect to all conductive surfaces listed in Table 7-22. Record the readings.
Readings should be close to 0.0. Address high readings by checking for damaged ground wire
or internal system wiring that could be causing current to flow to the tested component or
chassis.
Condition 1: Condition 2: Condition 3: Condition 4: Condition 5:

Power off, Power off, Power on, Power on, Power on,
Conductive surface normal outlet, reversed outlet, normal outlet, reversed outlet, normal outlet,
X-ray off X-ray off X-ray off X-ray off X-ray on
Leakage current
Tube
Collimator
Column
Bin
Tube latch
Table 7-22 Leakage current test results
7.2.2.2 Condition 2: Power off, reversed outlet, X-ray off

1. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Reversed.
2. Verify the system power is OFF, main circuit breaker ON.
3. Using the clamp, connect to all conductive surfaces.
4. Record the readings in Table 7-22.

7.2.2.3 Condition 3: Power on, normal outlet, X-ray off

1. Turn on the system power.
2. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Normal.
7.2.2.4 Condition 4: Power on, reversed outlet, X-ray off

1. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Reversed.
2. Verify that system power is on.
7.2.2.5 Condition 5: Power on, normal outlet, X-ray on
Wear a lead vest to protect yourself from radiation.
1. On the test meter, set the Outlet switch to Normal.

2. Verify that system power is on.
3. Make an exposure (see Table 7-23) while using the clamp to connect to all conductive
surfaces.
Generator power kVp mAs

15 kW 125 100
30 kW 125 100
Table 7-23 Exposure technique

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
Section 8.1 System self recovery

The system hardware has incorporated a design feature which monitors specific components of
the system. This monitoring checks configuration details during each system power up. If a
mismatch is detected, the user is prompted as to what the correct action should be. This feature
enables the system to be self-healing to a limited extent.
If a mismatch is detected, the following screen will be presented.
If this screen is presented for what was a normally operating system (no parts have been
changed), always select RESTORE. Failure to do so can result in erratic or failed system behavior.
If parts have been replaced, see the Replacement Procedures of the System manual, finalization
section for the correct selection.
The following table defines the correct selection when a component is replaced.

Board Data Module (BDM) X
Spyder board X
Firefly board X
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Page 153


Locust board X
Djinn Control Module X
Djinn Main Aux Box X
Djinn HV Tank X
Theory:
The Board Data Module (BDM) is the backup device which contains two basic types of information
for each of the intelligent boards within the system.
- Fingerprint data of each component
* Serial Number
* FW Rev
* FPGA Rev
* DSP Rev
* CPLD Rev
- Firmware
* This is the operating system elements for each board
Upon system power-up the BDM initiates a system check. If a mismatch is found, the system boot
is halted and the user is presented with the BDM Mismatch screen. The system will proceed
based upon the user selection. If the user chooses to ignore the correct selection, a Firmware
download (Load from Cold) may be required to recover.
Configuration Definitions:
BDM = Spyder + Firefly (Fingerprint and FW data)
Spyder = Spyder + Locust + 3 Djinn modules (FW data only)
Firefly = Firefly (Fingerprint and FW data)
Locust = Locust (Fingerprint and FW data)
Djinn Control Module = Control + Main Aux + HV Tank (Fingerprint and FW data)
Djinn Main Aux Box = (Fingerprint and FW data)
Djinn HV Tank = (Fingerprint and FW data)
30 kW Aux Box = Nothing. No Intelligence in this box
The following table describes what happens when a component is changed and a selection is
made:

Replaced Part Name Restore Action Cancel Action

If data exists on BDM, all the BDM Updated with Spyder and
Board Data Module (BDM) system boards are overwritten Firefly Fingerprint data sets and
with incorrect data and FW correct FW files.
BDM updated with Spyder
Fingerprint data.
Fingerprint data and Bad FW file.
Spyder board Spyder downloaded with
Spyder contains wrong FW files for
correct FW and updated with
all boards.
board fingerprint datasets.
BDM Updated with Firefly
BDM updated with Firefly
Fingerprint data.
Firefly board Fingerprint data and Bad FW file.
BDM downloads correct FW to
Firefly contains wrong FW file.
Firefly.
BDM Updated with Locust BDM updated with Spyder
Fingerprint data. Fingerprint data and correct FW file.
Locust board
BDM downloads correct FW to Locust board contains wrong FW
Locust. file.
BDM Updated with Djinn BDM updated with Spyder
Djinn Control Module
BDM downloads correct FW to Djinn Control module contains the
Djinn. wrong FW file.
BDM Updated with Djinn BDM updated with Spyder
Djinn Main Aux Box
BDM downloads correct FW to Djinn Main Aux Box contains the
Djinn. wrong FW file.
BDM Updated with Djinn
Djinn HV Tank Fingerprint data and correct FW file.
Fingerprint data.
Djinn contains the correct FW file.
Section 8.2 Performing diagnostics

Follow these steps to diagnose system issues:
1. Review the error log to help determine what system functionality is affected.
- Connect the USB service key to a left-side USB port. Before starting the SUIF, attach the
external CD/DVD drive (both USB connections must be made) and insert the Class C or
M service docs CD for this product into the CD/DVD drive. You must wait approximately
1 minute for the drive to stop spinning before launching the SUIF.
2. Speak with the system operator to determine under what circumstances issues occur.
3. Test specific areas of the system using the applicable Diagnostic tests in the SUIF.
8.2.1 Running diagnostics on the system

1. At the SUIF, press the DIAGNOSTICS button.
2. At the left navigation bar, select from among the diagnostic categories (Table 8-1).

3. Press a diagnostic test and follow the on-screen instructions.
Table 8-1 System diagnostic categories
Category Description
System Power See 8.2.1.1 Testing system power
System Control See 8.2.1.2 Testing system control
Drive and Brakes See 8.2.1.3 Testing the drive system and brakes
Generator See 8.2.1.4 Testing the generator
Detector Tethered See Section 8.5 FlashPad Detector Troubleshooting on page 269
Wireless Detector See Section 8.5 FlashPad Detector Troubleshooting on page 269
Communication Details included on product
8.2.1.1 Testing system power

Table 8-2 describes the system power tests available in the SUIF.
Table 8-2 System power tests
Test Description
Power Control Comm Low level communication and control test of the Spyder control board
and other hardware controllers.
Power Control Limits Compares actual battery voltage and current readings to limits.
Power Supply Thermal Compares internal temperature readings to limits.
Collimator Light Reports system recognition of collimator lamp on/off commands from
various inputs.
On/Off Button Disables system shutdown while in diagnostics.
Breaker Trip Tests whether the system is able to control the breaker.
AC Present Tests whether the system recognizes that the power plug is connected
to the receptacle.
8.2.1.2 Testing system control

Table 8-3 describes the system control tests available in the SUIF.
Table 8-3 System control tests
Test Description
Drive Login Reports system recognition of keypad functionality.
System Sanity Includes several tests, including:
• System monitoring checks: Tests actual board voltages of local
and remote supplies against the limits.
• Memory test: Verifies the memory function of the Spyder board.
• Integrity check: Performs board flash storage cyclic redundancy
checks (CRC) to determine if the software code is valid.
• Communication tests: Checks the Spyder ability to test local and
system communications.
Page 156 Section 8.2 Performing diagnostics

Table 8-3 System control tests
Test Description
Overlay Test Visual check of X-ray on indicators.
Audio Check Audio check of X-ray on indicators.
Video Test Displays the color bar test pattern, and black and white screens to
check for bad pixels.
Wired Hand Switch Tests the X-ray generation initiation circuitry.
8.2.1.3 Testing the drive system and brakes

Table 8-4 describes the drive system and brake tests available on the SUIF.
Table 8-4 Drive system and brake tests
Test Description
Drive Handle Test Tests whether the system recognizes handle switch activation.
Drive Tests Tests drive directional and speed control functionality.
Brake Tests Tests the drive brakes, vertical column release, column rotation and
arm extension releases, and the tube park latch to determine if each is
able to receive a system signal.
Tube Interlocks Tests whether the system recognizes that the tube park is latched.
Detector Parked (Optima Determines if the bin switch recognizes when the detector is in the bin.
XR220amx or Optima
XR200amx with digital
upgrade only)
Bumper Determines if the system is properly reading signals from the switches
on the bumper.
8.2.1.4 Testing the generator

Table 8-5 describes the generator tests available on the SUIF.
Table 8-5 Generator tests
Test Description
Rotation Test A compound test that includes tube filament impedance and 70C circuit
tests.
Tube Rotor Impedance Tests tube stator winding impedance.
Power Supplies Checks the +13 V, 48 V, 3 V3 power supply.
Resonant Components Determining if the system receives one pulse from each side of each
resonant component.
Inverter Test Tests with low DC bus value and independently driven switches.
Test 70C Circuit Tests to determine if the internal temperature for the HV tank and
control circuitry is within limits.
Rise Time/Regulation Tests the generators ability to recognize and control the DC Bus.
Real Time Lines Test Tests the real time circuitry of components.

Table 8-5 Generator tests
Test Description
Fil 1 Drv Clsd Loop Tests filament driver 1 in closed loop.
Fil 1 Xfmr Primary Tests open load transformer primary for filament 1.
Fil 1 Drv Short Test Tests filament driver 1 in short circuit.
Fil 2 Drv Clsd Loop Tests filament driver 2 in closed loop.
Fil 2 Xfmr Primary Tests open load transformer primary for filament 2.
Fil 2 Drv Short Test Tests filament driver 2 in short circuit.
MA Measurement Tests mA measurement.
KV Measurement Tests kV measurement.
KV Test A compound test that includes:
• kV measurement
• Inverter test
• Resonant component verification
MA Test A compound test that includes:
• mA measurement
• Filament driver 1 in short circuit
• Filament driver 2 in short circuit
• Open load transformer primary for filament 1
• Open load transformer primary for filament 2
• Filament driver 1 in closed loop
• Filament driver 2 in closed loop
Auto Test Tests both mA and kV measurement circuitry in a simulated system
level.
8.2.1.5 Testing the tethered detector (Optima XR220amx or Optima

Table 8-6 describes the tethered detector tests available on the SUIF.
Table 8-6 Detector (tethered) tests
Test Description
Built In Self Test Performs the internal power on diagnostic sequence of
Flash memory, Image and Software SDRAM (Tether and
Gbit ethernet, Image SDRAM (Wireless), Ethernet digital
and analog loopback, Internal wireless loopback.
LED Info Meanings of the detector LEDs and illumination pattern
definitions.
Ping A simple communication test using small packet
transmissions.
Ethernet Stats Verifies ability to transfer images through communication
channels with CRC and Image data integrity checking.
Temperature Reports the values of the internal detector sensors with
limits.

Table 8-6 Detector (tethered) tests
Test Description
PS Full Load Reports the internal detector power supply values in
imaging mode with limits.
PS Partial Load Reports the internal detector power supply values in
standby mode with limits.
PS Unloaded (Tether) Enables the unloaded source power supply to isolate
potential Tether/Connector failures.
Shock Sensors Demonstrates detector sensor functionality by using a
defined test method.
Grid Sensor Verifies the detectors ability to sense if a Grid is attached
properly.
8.2.1.6 Testing the wireless detector (Optima XR220amx or Optima

Table 8-7 describes the wireless detector tests available on the SUIF.
Table 8-7 Wireless detector tests
Test Description
Wireless Comm Presents the various stages of UWB connection,
authentication, and signal strength. The visual status aids
in identification of root cause for basic communication
faults and data transfer performance issues.
Signal Strength Resides in the Configuration Tab of the SUIF. It is a
subset of the Wireless Comm diagnostic.
Battery Health Reports the percentage of the full charge capacity over
the design capacity of the Battery.
Built In Self Test Performs the internal power on diagnostic sequence of
Flash memory, Image and Software SDRAM (Tether and
Gbit ethernet, Image SDRAM (Wireless), Ethernet digital
and analog loopback, Internal wireless loopback.
LED Info Meanings of the detector LEDs and illumination pattern
definitions.
Ping A simple communication test using small packet
transmissions.
Ethernet Stats Verifies ability to transfer images through communication
channels with CRC and Image data integrity checking.
Temperature Reports the values of the internal detector sensors with
limits.
PS Full Load Reports the internal detector power supply values in
imaging mode with limits.
PS Partial Load Reports the internal detector power supply values in
standby mode with limits.
Grid Sensor Tests user interaction and status display.

8.2.1.7 Testing network communication

Table 8-8 describes the network communication tests available on the SUIF.
Table 8-8 Communication tests
Test Description
Hospital Network Performs low-level TCP-IP checks to determine if the
system can communicate with the network.
Port to Port Diag Isolates the ports on the PC and, instead, connects them
to one another to test ability to send and receive signals.

Section 8.3 Boundary Scan

8.3.1 Boundary Scan (Bscan) overview
• Bscan is software specifically designed for GE Field Engineers to diagnose failures.
• Guided tests, run on a component level, makes troubleshooting more efficient. Often saves
both time and money by minimizing guess work.
• Bscan provides a means to test interconnects and clusters of logic, memory, and components
without using physical test probes. Provides about 80% coverage of the system.
• Multiple test execution modes – individual, batch, loop.
8.3.1.1 Bscan principles
Based on a test methodology developed

by JTAG, Joint Test Action Group, in the
mid-80’s (IEEE1149.1).
Originally developed to provide a means

for IC manufactures to test interconnects
and clusters of logic, memory, and
components without using physical test
probes.
Figure 8-1

ICs can be bussed (multiplexed) together into a JTAG Scan Chain. This adds the capability to
check not only at a device level, but also at a PWA (board) level. Individual components can be
added/removed dynamically.
How does it work?

Bscan programs a device pin to selectively override the functionality of that pin.
It drives a signal onto that pin that travels across an individual trace on the board.
The cell at the destination of the board trace is programmed to read the value at the pin,
verifying that the board trace or component properly connects the two pins.
Figure 8-2
The JTAG scan chain is cabled between boards such that all
Bscan devices can be accessed from a single USB port.
Figure 8-3
Page 162 Section 8.3 Boundary Scan

8.3.2 Bscan toolbar definitions
Table 8-9
Toolbar
Toolbar Sub-Menus Definition
Menu
Create a new database. At least 1 database is
Create New
required.
Database
Set Active Database Select the database to be used in testing.
Export Save the database to a user-defined folder.
Import a GEAR file into the current database.If
File Import you use multiple databases, you must import a
Test Package GEAR file into each one.
Enable/Disable Enable/disable tests or groups of tests.
Generate a report based on test results for
Generate Report
user-defined Units and time periods.
Exit Terminate the Bscan application.
Select the specific unit that will be tested. Also
Select Unit Under Test
can be used to add new Unit information.
Run the selected test(s) on the selected unit.
Run
Test results are automatically saved to laptop.
Test
Stop Stop test execution.
Loop on test(s) until either an error occurs or
Cycle Mode
the loop count has been reached.
Add Notes Add notes to test results.
Contents Not implemented.
Help About Shows Bscan name and revision.
Submit Feedback Send comments/suggestions to engineering.
8.3.3 Installing and configuring Bscan

1. Order, download and install the Bcan software:
a. Go to the Global Webshop at:
http://bronze-web-prod.health.ge.com/webshop/welcome.jsp
b. Navigate to Software / Other Manufacturer. See Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4
c. Scroll down the list and select Product Part Number 2640 (should be Boundary Scan) to
order the software. You will receive an email when your order has been processed and
the Bscan software package is ready for downloading to the laptop.
d. Download and install the Bscan software.
2. Create a Bscan database:
a. Start up the Bscan application.
b. If this is the first time that Bscan is being run, you must create a database:
i. From the toolbar, select File / Database / Create New.
ii. Enter a database name, then click CREATE.
c. Select the database to be used:
i. From the toolbar, select File / Database / Set Active Database.
ii. Select the desired database from the drop-down list, then click ACTIVATE.
* This database will be the default database used each time the Bscan application
runs.
* It can be changed at any time by selecting File / Database / Set Active
Database.

3. Download and import the GEAR file into the Bscan database:
a. Go to the following Support Central website:
http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=16297
b. From the Tools section, select and download Boundary Scan Gear File rev x.x.
See Figure 8-6.
Figure 8-5
c. From the toolbar, select File / Test Package / Import, then browse to the saved
GEAR file (it should have a “.GEAR” file extension type), highlight it and click OPEN. See
Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-6
d. An Overwrite Files window will pop up; select the OVERWRITE ALL button. An
Unpack Log window pops up while the GEAR file is being unpacked.
e. If you create multiple databases, you will need to import the GEAR file into each
database.
4. Enter unit information:
a. If this is the first time that Bscan is being run, you must enter details about the unit(s) you
wish to test:
i. From the toolbar, select Test / Input Unit Under Test or click the ... (Unit
Selector) button on the home page (see Figure 8-7).

Figure 8-7
ii. There are 12 fields that must be filled in to identify each unit and its location. Refer to
Table 8-10 and Figure 8-8 for details. ALL 12 fields must have at least one non-
space character or your entry will not be accepted.
iii. Once a field has been filled in (i.e. Country = USA, State = WI, Segment = XR, etc.),
those choices will now be present in the drop-down lists.
iv. If a field has never been filled in before, then only the field name is shown as <field
name> (i.e. <Country>, <City>, <State>, etc.) in the drop-down lists. You will have to
click one or more of the ADD XXXX buttons to bring up the associated windows to
enter text in these fields. See Figure 8-8.
b. If this is NOT the first time that Bscan is being run and you have already entered the
information about the unit(s) you wish to test, then you can select the unit to be tested
directly from the Unit Selector window.
Table 8-10 Field definitions, examples, and buttonology
Field Name Definition Example Buttonology

Country Country name USA
State/Province State/Province name WI
City City name Waukesha
Address Hospital address 123 Main St. Unit Selector > Add Unit > Add Site
ZIP code City ZIP code 53188
Location
Hospital name Memorial Hospital
(Name)
Unit Selector > Add Unit >
Network Hospital network name Health Care Services
Add Site > Add Network
Unit Selector > Add Unit >
Segment Modality XR
Add Product > Add Segment
Product Product name(s) Mobiles XR285/200/220amx Unit Selector > Add Unit > Add Product
Unit identifier = System
Unit 1234567WK8 - Mobile #1
ID + Unit name
Unit Selector > Add Unit
Serial Unit serial number 1234567WK8
System ID Unit system ID 123456BR285

Figure 8-8

8.3.4 Using Bscan
8.3.4.1 Hardware requirements

• GE-issued laptop running Windows XP version 4.0 or greater with SP 2 or greater
• Standard USB cable: Type-A to Mini Type-B (see Figure 8-9)
Type A Type B
Figure 8-9
8.3.4.2 Connect laptop to system

1. The system should be plugged into the AC outlet. The laptop should be running off batteries
(not plugged in).
2. Turn off system power.
3. Remove right side cover. See 9.1.1 Side cover removal on page 314.
4. Connect USB cable:
- Mini-B end goes to Spyder J23 connector (see Figure 8-10)
- USB-A end goes to laptop USB port
J23 JTAG USB
USB cable
Figure 8-10

6. Start up the Bscan application on your laptop.
7. Select the database. This was already done above, but if you need to confirm or change the
database choice, see step c. Select the database to be used: on page 164.

8. Select the Unit to be tested: From the toolbar, select Test / Select Unit Under Test.
Use the drop-down lists to select the desired Unit, then click SELECT. The screen will update
to show data for the selected Unit.
9. Select the test(s) that will be executed: From the toolbar, select File / Test Package /
Enable/Disable. See Figure 8-11.
There are 3 groups of tests:
- All Tests All tests will run, user interaction will be required
on some tests.
- No Tester Interaction Required Only tests that don’t require user interaction
will run.
- Tester Interaction Required Only tests that required user interaction (pressing
buttons & switches, confirming system actions
such as locks activating, etc.) will run.
To enable/disable test(s), click the box preceding the test name(s) to place/remove a
checkmark. Select OK when the desired tests have been enabled. For example, in Figure 8-
11 all tests requiring user interaction are enabled.
Figure 8-11

10. Individual tests can be selected from the list. Additional test information is displayed when a
test is selected and is updated when the test is executed. Connectivity to the Unit under test
can be confirmed in the lower right corner of the screen. See Figure 8-12.
Item Description
1 Expandable list of tests
2 Test information
3 Connectivity status (red = disconnected, green = connected)
Figure 8-12
11. To start executing the selected tests, click on RUN. See Figure 8-13, Item 2.
To stop executing the selected tests, click on STOP. See Figure 8-13, Item 3.
To enter a dispatch number, click in the text box and enter number. See Figure 8-13, Item 1.
To add notes, click on ADD NOTES. See Figure 8-13, Item 4.

Item Description
1 Add a dispatch number
2 Start execution of tests
3 Stop execution of tests
Add notes. Notes can be added to a test that you have already run, or one that you will
4
run in the future. They can be viewed when you generate a report.
Figure 8-13
12. Test results (Pass/Fail) will be displayed on the screen. See Figure 8-14.
Use system schematics and interconnect diagrams to analyze test results and determine likely
failure points.
Figure 8-14

13. Notes can be added to the test results (previous or future runs) by clicking on the ADD NOTES
button or selecting Test / Add Notes from the toolbar. See Figure 8-15.
Figure 8-15
8.3.5 Generating a report

1. A report can be generated by selecting File / Generate Report from the toolbar.
2. Any tests that have Notes attached will have a ’page icon’ shown preceding the test name.
See Figure 8-16.
Figure 8-16
3. Select what you want to appear in the report; there are 3 major fields (see Figure 8-17):
- Selected Units Select units.
- Time Range Click to select a time period or date range.

- Test Results Click to place checkmarks in the boxes to select the tests to
include in the report.
Click the GENERATE REPORT button to generate the report.
Figure 8-17
4. A window pops up to tell you where the report gets saved (see Figure 8-18). Click OPEN
REPORT to view it. Unless you delete the report, it will remain on your computer. See
Figure 8-19 for a sample report.
Figure 8-18

Figure 8-19

8.3.6 Sync database

1. Shut down the Bscan application.
2. Connect the laptop to the internet.
3. From the toolbar, select Start / Programs / GE_BScan_Tool / SyncManager.
4. See Figure 8-20. Select the database(s) you wish to send, then click the SYNC NOW button.
5. The laptop connects to the engineering server and transfers the selected database(s). This
information can be used by engineering to evaluate product quality, track failure trends, etc.
Figure 8-20
Section 8.4 Djinn Generator Troubleshooting

8.4.1 Definitions
Table 8-11
Term or Acronym Definition

mA Tube emission in mA
kV Kilo Volts
HW Hardware
SW Software
DSO Digital Storage Oscilloscope
DVM Digital Value Multimeter
LVPS / LVLE Low Voltage Power Supply
FS (LF, SF) Focal Spot (Large Focal, Small Focal)
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
Page 176 Section 8.4 Djinn Generator Troubleshooting

Table 8-11
Term or Acronym Definition

HV High Voltage
BB Buck Boost (DC/DC converter in Power Module)
Fil Filament
8.4.2 Introduction
The purpose of this troubleshooting guide is to detect and isolate a faulty FRU, even though the
failure mode has not been isolated. A FRU is isolated when it is identified as the only possible root
cause of a detected problem.
It is important to note that you will only replace FRU and will not attempt to repair a faulty FRU.
Repair oriented troubleshooting is not addressed in this document.
The troubleshooting steps will involve:

- Indicator error: it is an observation of a problem detected on the Djinn Beetle Generator.
It will be used during the troubleshooting procedure. An indicator can be a reported error
or a visual observation (broken component, communication impossible, LED status, etc).
For each error indicator, a list of Potential GENERATOR FRU involved modes is given
with its FRU related;
- Diagnostic: the action taken to isolate a faulty part. It can be automated (performed by
the Generator CPU with PASS/FAIL status report), semi-automated (performed by the
Generator CPU, but need a manual set-up), or manual (electrical measurement,
observation of LED status, check if connection is not damaged, check external power
supply, replacement of a faulty FRU, check wiring, etc).
Procedure
The FRU can be directly isolated when the error occurs, otherwise a diagnostic sequence is
described in order to isolate the faulty FRU.
In each diagnostic sequence, a list of actions is listed. Based on this action result, some FRUs can
be excluded.If several FRUs are still possibly faulty, then another diagnostic will be applied, and so
on. However if only one FRU can be faulty, then the FRU is isolated and the action result is given.

8.4.3 FRUs for Beetle Djinn Generator

1. MAIN AUXILIARY FRU
N2 N1
Djinn Beetle Main Auxiliary - Note the Neons N1 N2 that indicate the presence of voltage. Also
note the connector for Rotation (2) and the connector for the TubeThermal Switch (1).
Connector with marking number 3 is for the battery input.

2. POWER MODULE FRU
Djinn Beetle Power Module - Note the Connector for 48V input (LVLE2)
3. HV TANK FRU
Djinn Beetle HV - See the mA/mAs Test points (Voltage measurement between TP4 and chassis
ANODE CATHODE
Djinn Beetle HV Tank - See the HV receptacles for Anode and Cathode where HV Cables shall be
connected.

4. OPTIONAL AUXILIARY FRU (30kW DJINN ONLY)
5. DJINN BEETLE SET OF CABLES (9 cables described below)


8.4.4 Error Code Structure

The error code structure described in this chapter applies to Djinn Beetle error detection.
It indicates that a problem has been detected by the Generator.
The fields of an error are described as the following structure :

- Error code : four numbers written in hexadecimal. The first two numbers describes the
Djinn module which the error is related, as you can see in the table below.
Module Code List :
Table 8-12
Module Code Module

01 Heater 1 (Small Filament)
02 Heater 2 (Large Filament)

Table 8-12
Module Code Module

04 Rotor
05 Boost / DC Bus
06 KV
07 Thermal
08 System
09 Boot
0A Various
0B MA Generation
81 CANOpen
- Description: it describes briefly the error detected in Djinn Beetle GENERATOR;

- Data: it shows detailed information over the state of the GENERATOR when the error
occurred. It is composed by 5 fields: data content (i.e. tank temperature), data description
(i.e. temperature), data value (i.e. type float with 2 decimal parts), data gain (i.e.
multiplication by 10) and data unit (i.e. mA);
- Precise description: it shows additional information of the error. It defines with details the
description of the error with their database value;
- Error class: there are three classes of errors that correspond to different levels of impact
to the system. The class of errors correspond to the seriousness of the error and it says
how the system software will manage operations. In the Djinn Beetle Generator, the “error
class” can be: inhibit, abort or warning (see below).
Remark: A Djinn inhibit error will abort the ongoing X-ray exposure, and go to an error state, which
needs to be cleared before the Generator can go back to a standby state (i.e. safety loop open).
A Djinn abort error will abort the ongoing X-ray exposure and immediately go back to a standby
state (i.e. tube arc).
A Djinn warning is for information only. The Generator will not abort the ongoing X-ray exposure
and it will not go back to a standby state (i.e. input voltage slightly out of range).
See the annex 2 for the detailed description of all errors belonging to Djinn Beetle seen by the
system.
8.4.5 Diagnostics
A diagnostic sequence in Djinn Beetle Generator is described for each error possible in order to
isolate the faulty FRU. It is composed of one or several actions.
Based on the result of this action, some FRUs can be excluded. If several FRUs are still possibly
faulty, then another diagnostic will be applied, and so on.
This action can be of three types:
- Automated: when the diagnostic is performed automatically by the Generator CPU by a
software diagnostic (when the name is associated with a Diagnostic Id) which gives a

PASS/FAIL status report. It is used normally to check communication between the

system and the Generator and to check the Generator parties via software ;
- Semi-automated: when the diagnostic is performed by the Generator CPU, but it needs
a manual set-up;
- Manual: it can be a visual test (i.e. observation of LED status), an electrical
measurement, a connection or disconnection of a cable, an observed misbehavior, a
check of external power supply, a replacement of a FRU faulty, etc.
The structure of a diagnostic is:

- Diagnostic name
- Diagnostic type: software, hardware or visual
- Tooling required, if applicable
- Software diagnostic used, if applicable
- Description of the diagnostic
8.4.6 Error Code Handling and Actions
8.4.6.1 Heater 1 (Small Filament)

Error 0x0100 Unknown FW error
Potential GENERATOR FRU involved: POWER MODULE
Diagnostic sequence: Restart Djinn Generator (Power OFF / Power ON). If problem persists, re-
download Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace POWER MODULE.
Error 0x0101 Soft over current (measured current > estimated current)
Diagnostic sequence: Restart Djinn GENERATOR (Power OFF / Power ON) if problem persists,
replace POWER MODULE
Error 0x0102 Soft open circuit (measured current < estimated current)
Potential GENERATOR FRU involved:
- TUBE
- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
- HV CABLES
- FIL TO HV TANK CABLE

Diagnostic sequence:
Error 0x0102
Diag : Fil 1 Drv Short Test
PASS
FAIL
Replace
POWER MODULE
Diag : Fil 1 Xfmr Primary
FAIL PASS
Filament HV Tank Filament HV Cable

Power Connection Test Connection Test
FAIL PASS
FAIL PASS
END : END :
Fil Impedance through
Replace / Connect END : Improve HV Cable
HV Cable test
Fil to HV Tank Replace HV Tank connection
Cable
FAIL PASS
Fil Impedance END :

Tube side test Replace HV Tank
FRU
FAIL PASS
END : END :
Investigate Tube Investigate HV Cable
Error 0x0103 Demand too high (target > max heater)

Error 0x0104 Demand too low (target < min heater)


Error 0x0105 Inverter OFF and current not zero

- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
- HV CABLES
Error 0x0105
Diag : Fil 2 Drv Clsd Loop
FAIL
OTHER Error code 0x620
Diag : Fil 2 Drv Short Test Diag : Fil 1 Drv Clsd Loop
FAIL
PASS FAIL PASS
Error code 0x620
END :
END :
END : Fil Impedance through Improve HV Cable
Replace Power
Replace HV Tank HV Cable test connection on Tube
Module
and HV Tank sides
PASS FAIL
END : END :
Replace HV Tank Investigate HV Cable
Error 0x0107 Over current detected by FPGA


Error 0x0108 Heater 1 stopped by 48V out of range

- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
- CAN RIBBON CABLE (POWER MODULE TO MAIN AUXILIARY)
Diagnostic sequence: Restart Djinn GENERATOR (Power OFF / Power ON). If problem persists,
replace inverter.
Error 0x0108
Diag : Power Supplies
PASS FAIL
LVPS CAN Cable

Connection test
Fail or causes error PASS FAIL

PASS
0A81h or 0466h or 0108h
END :
Battery Voltage
Measurement test
Investigate 48V
No Fil Power Tank ConnectionDiag :
Fil 1 Drv Short Test CAN cable
FAIL PASS
Fail or causes error
Other case
0A81h or 0466h or 0108h
END : 48V Measure No
END : Check Batteries Power
Replace Tank
PASS FAIL
fails or causes
error 0A81h or 0466h or 208h
END : END : END :
Replace Power Replace Power Investigate
PASS
module Module LVLE
No Fil Power Tank ConnectionDiag:

Rise Time/Regulation Fil 2 Drv Short Test
Other case
causes error
PASS Fail or causes error
0A81h or 0466h
0A81h or 0466h or 0208h
END : END :
Diag : ResonantComponents END :
Replace Power Replace Power
Replace Tank
Module Module
causes error PASS

0A81h or 0466h
LVPS CAN Cable

Connection test
END :
Replace Power FAIL PASS
Module
END :
Battery Voltage
Investigate 48V Measurement test
CAN cable
FAIL PASS
END :
48V Measure No Power
Check Batteries
FAIL PASS
END : END :
Investigate Replace Power
LVLE Module

Error 0x0181 Unexpected firmware state

Error 0x0183 Filament drive 1 autodiag failed

Error 0x0183
Check ALL Djinn

and Tube
connections
Generator does not report

Error 0x0183 anymore
PASS FAIL
END : END :
No Error Replace POWER MODULE
8.4.6.2 Heater 2 (Large Filament)

Error 0x0200 Unknown FW error
Error 0x0201 Soft over current (measured current > estimated current)

Error 0x0202 Soft open circuit (measured current < estimated current)
- TUBE
- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
- HV CABLES
Error 0x0202
FAIL PASS
Replace
POWER MODULE
Diag : Fil 2 Xfmr Secondary
FAIL PASS
Filament HV Tank Filament HV Cable

Power Connection Test Connection Test
FAIL PASS
FAIL PASS
END : END : Fil Impedance through

END :
Replace / Connect Improve HV Cable HV Cable test
Replace HV Tank
Fil to HV Tank Cable connection
FAIL PASS
Fil Impedance END :

Tube side test Replace HV Tank
FRU
FAIL PASS
END : Investigate END : Investigate HV

Tube Cable
Error 0x0203 Demand too high (target > max heater)

Error 0x0204 Demand too low (target < min heater)


Error 0x0205 Inverter OFF and current not zero

- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
- HV CABLES
Error 0x0205
Diag : Fil 1 Drv Clsd Loop
FAIL
OTHER Error code 0x620
Diag : Fil 1 Drv Short Test Diag : Fil 2 Drc Clsd Loop
PASS FAIL FAIL

PASS
Error code 0x620
END :
END :
END : Fil Impedance through Improbe HV Cable
Replace Power
Replace HV Tank HV Cable test connection on Tube
Module
and HV Tank sides
PASS FAIL
END : END : Investigate HV

Replace HV Tank Cable
Error 0x0207 Over current detected by FPGA


Error 0x0208 Heater 2 stopped by 48V out of range

- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
Diagnostic sequence: Restart Djinn GENERATOR (Power OFF / Power ON). If problem persists,
replace inverter.
Error 0x0208
Power Supplies
PASS FAIL
LVPS CAN Cable

Fil 1 Drv Short Test
Connection test
Fail or causes error PASS FAIL

PASS
0A81h or 0466h or 0108h
END :
Battery Voltage
Measurement test
Investigate 48V
No Fil Power Tank Connection
Fil1 CAN cable
FAIL PASS
Other case
0A81h or 0466h or 0108h
END : 48V Measure No
END : Check Batteries Power
Replace Tank
PASS FAIL
fails or causes
END : END : END :
Replace Power Replace Power Investigate
PASS
module Module LVLE
Rise Time/ No Fil Power Tank Connection

Regulation Fil2
Other case
causes error
PASS Fail or causes error
0A81h or 0466h
0A81h or 0466h or 0208h
END : END :
Resonant END :
Components Replace Power Replace Power
Replace Tank
Module Module
causes error PASS

0A81h or 0466h
LVPS CAN Cable

Connection test
END :
Replace Power FAIL PASS
Module
END :
Battery Voltage
Investigate 48V Measurement test
CAN cable
FAIL PASS
END :
48V Measure No Power
Check Batteries
FAIL PASS
END : END :
Investigate Replace Power
LVLE Module

Error 0x0281 Unexpected firmware state

Error 0x0283 Filament drive 2 autodiag failed

Error 0x0283
Check ALL Djinn

and Tube
connections
Generator does not report

Error 0x0283 anymore
PASS FAIL
END : END :
No Error Replace POWER MODULE

8.4.6.3 mA Generation
Error 0x0981 Boot autodiag failed
Potential GENERATOR FRU involved :
- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
- HV TANK TO CONTROL RIBBON CABLE
Error 0x0981
mA measurement
Connection test
PASS FAIL
End : HV Tank to
Control ribbon mA measurement
cable not correctly cable and resistor test
plugged
FAIL
PASS
(pin-to-pin)
FAIL
Replace HV Tank (resistor values)
to Control ribbon
End : Replace
cable
POWER MODULE
End : Replace
HV TANK

Error 0x0B81 mA measured while inverter is OFF

- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
Error 0x0B81
mA measurement
Connection test
PASS FAIL
End : HV Tank to
plugged
FAIL
PASS
(pin-to-pin)
FAIL
(resistor values) End : Replace
Replace HV Tank to
Control ribbon cable POWER MODULE
End : Replace
HV TANK

Error 0x0B82 No mA measured at the beginning of the pulse

- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
Error 0x0B82
mA measurement
Connection test
PASS FAIL
mA measurement
End : HV Tank to
cable and resistor test
Control ribbon
cable not correctly
plugged
FAIL
PASS
(pin-to-pin)
FAIL
(resistor values) End : Replace
Replace HV Tank to POWER MODULE
Control ribbon cable
End : Replace
HV TANK

Error 0x0B83 Inconsistency between mA anode and mA cathode

- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
Error 0x0B83
mA measurement
Connection test
PASS FAIL
End : HV Tank to
mA measurement
Control ribbon
cable and resistor test
cable not correctly
plugged
FAIL
PASS
(pin-to-pin)
FAIL
(resistor values)
Replace HV Tank to End : Replace
Control ribbon cable POWER MODULE
End : Replace
HV TANK

Error 0x0B84 mA too low

- TUBE
- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
- HV CABLES
Error 0x0B84
Diag: Fil 1 Drv Short Test
FAIL PASS
Replace
POWER MODULE
FAIL PASS
Replace
Filament HV Tank
POWER MODULE
Power Connection Test
FAIL PASS
END : Filament ageing

Replace / Connect clearing test
Fil to HV Tank Cable
PASS
FAIL
No more error
END : End : Fil ageing

Investigate TUBE was corrupted

Error 0x0B85 mA too high

- TUBE
- POWER MODULE
Error 0x0B85
FAIL
PASS
End : Replace
POWER MODULE
FAIL PASS
End : Replace
POWER MODULE
Filament ageing clearing test
FAIL PASS
End : No
End : Investigate
replacement
Tube
needed

Error 0x0B86 Filament ageing saturated

- TUBE
- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
- HV CABLES
Error 0x0B86
FAIL PASS
Replace
POWER MODULE
FAIL PASS
Replace
POWER MODULE Filament HV Tank
FAIL PASS
END :
Filament ageing
Replace / connect
clearing test
PASS
FAIL
No more error


Error 0x0B87 mA out of range

- TUBE
- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
- HV CABLES
Error 0x0B87
FAIL PASS
Replace
POWER MODULE
FAIL PASS
Replace
Filament HV Tank
POWER MODULE
FAIL PASS
END : Filament ageing

Replace / Connect clearing test
PASS
FAIL
No more error


8.4.6.4 Boost and DC Bus

Error 0x0500 Unknown firmware error
Error 0x0501 Bad DC Bus output voltage reference

Error 0x0503 DC Bus Rise time too fast

- POWER MODULE
- MAIN AUXILIARY
- OPTIONAL AUXILARY 30kW
Error 0x0503
DC Bus cable
connection test
FAIL PASS
End : reconnect
DC Bus cable SW download with
between Main correct database
Auxiliary and (15kW / 30kW)
Power Module
Error still No more
reported error
End : Problem
solved no action
Is Djinn in 30kW configuration needed
YES NO
End : replace
End : replace MAIN
OPTIONAL
AUXILIARY 15kW
AUXILIARY 30kW
Is error 0x0503 still reported Is error 0x0503 still reported
YES NO NO YES
End : replace MAIN End : problem End : problem End : replace

AUXILIARY 15kW solved solved POWER MODULE
Is error 0x0503 still reported
NO YES
End : problem End : replace

solved POWER MODULE

Error 0x0504 DC Bus Rise time too slow

- POWER MODULE
- MAIN AUXILIARY
- OPTIONAL AUXILARY 30kW
Error 0x0504
SW download with
correct database
(15kW / 30kW)
Error no longer Error still

reported reported
End : problem
Is Djinn in 30kW configuration
solved
YES NO
End : replace
End : replace MAIN
OPTIONAL
AUXILIARY 15kW
AUXILIARY 30kW
Is error 0x0504 still reported Is error 0x0504 still reported
YES NO NO YES
End : replace MAIN End : problem End : problem End : replace

AUXILIARY 15kW solved solved POWER MODULE
Is error 0x0504 still reported
NO YES
End : problem End : replace

solved POWER MODULE

Error 0x0505 NO BB input current detected while on

Error 0x0510 Over output DC Voltage

Error 0x0511 Unknown BB state

Error 0x0520 Over input current

Error 0x0523 Zero Voltage Switching Timeout

Error 0x0524 Snub Over current

Error 0x0525 Boost timeout

Error 0x0580 Timeout when waiting for DC Bus


Error 0x0581 Input Voltage detected is too low

- POWER MODULE
- MAIN AUXILIARY
- POWER MODULE to MAIN AUXILIARY cable
Error 0x0581
Battery breaker check
Breaker was Breaker was

OFF ON
End : Have
breaker in ON
position Input Power connection test
PASS FAIL
Input Voltage Measurement test End : Plug battery

input to Djinn
FAIL
PASS
XJ1 Voltage
End : replace FAIL
POWER MODULE FAIL
J1 Power Module
Cable check
Voltage
End : replace POWER End : check

End : replace MAIN
MODULE to MAIN battery wiring on
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY cable Superbee side

Error 0x0582 Input voltage is too high

- POWER MODULE
Error 0x0582
Input voltage measurement test
PASS FAIL
End : Check /
End : Change
correct charger
POWER MODULE
voltage

Error 0x0583 DC Bus voltage is too low

- POWER MODULE
- MAIN AUXILIARY
Error 0x0583

OFF ON
End : Have
breaker in ON
PASS FAIL
End : Plug battery

Input Voltage Measurement test
input to Djinn
PASS FAIL
End : check
Djinn Main Auxiliary Fuse test battery wiring on
Superbee side
FAIL PASS
End : replace MAIN

AUXILIARY Input Power connection test 2
PASS FAIL
End : replace POWER

End : replace
MODULE to MAIN
POWER MODULE
AUXILIARY cable

Error 0x0584 No input voltage detected

- POWER MODULE
- MAIN AUXILIARY
Error 0x0584

OFF ON
End : Have
breaker in ON
PASS FAIL
End : Plug battery

input to Djinn
PASS FAIL
End : check
Djinn Main Auxiliary Fuse test battery wiring on
Superbee side
FAIL PASS
End : replace MAIN

AUXILIARY Input Power connection test 2
PASS FAIL
End : replace POWER

End : replace
MODULE to MAIN
POWER MODULE
AUXILIARY cable

Error 0x0585 Input current detected while BB is off

Error 0x0408 No DC Bus detected

- POWER MODULE
- MAIN AUXILIARY
Error 0x0408
Change POWER
MODULE
No Error Error 0408
END End : Change

MAIN AUXILIARY
Error 0x0420 DC Bus always discharged

Potential GENERATOR FRU involved: MAIN AUXILIARY
download Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace MAIN AUXILIARY.

8.4.6.5 kV
- Diagnostic sequence: Restart Djinn Generator (Power OFF / Power ON). If problem
persists, re-download Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace POWER MODULE.
Error 0x0602 kV anode unbalanced

- POWER MODULE
- HV TANK
- RIBBON CABLE FROM HV TANK TO POWER MODULE
Error 0x0602
Diag: KV Measurement
PASS
Error on KV swapped HV cables

No more error
the same side tank side test
FAIL
End : Change End : Improve HV

Error on Cable conenction
HV TANK
the other side or replace HV
Cables
Error on KV swapped HV cables Error on

the same side Both sides test the other side
No more error
End : Investigate End : Investigate
HV CABLES TUBE
End : Improve HV
Cable connection
or replace HV
Cables KV measurement resistor
and cable test
FAIL
PASS
Resistor value
FAIL
Pin to pin
End : Change End : Change End : Change

HV TANK ribbon cable from POWER MODULE
HV Tank to Power
Module

Error 0x0603 kV cathode unbalanced

- POWER MODULE
- HV TANK
Error 0x0603
Diag : KV Measurement
PASS
Error on KV swapped HV cables

No more error
the same side tank side test
End : Improve HV
End : Change FAIL
Cable conenction
HV TANK Error on or replace HV
the other side Cables
Error on KV swapped HV cables Error on

the same side Both sides test the other side
End : Investigate No more error End : Investigate

HV CABLES TUBE
End : Improve HV
Cable conenction
or replace HV
Cables
KV measurement resistor
and cable test
FAIL
PASS
Resistor value
FAIL
Pin to pin
End : Change
End : Change End : Change
ribbon cable from
HV TANK POWER MODULE
HV Tank to Power
Module

Error 0x0604 kV max anode error

- POWER MODULE
- HV TANK
Error 0x0604
PASS
KV swapped HV cables FAIL

Error on tank side test
the same side
Error on
the other side
End : Change End : Investigate

HV TANK HV CABLES
KV measurement connection test
FAIL PASS
End : Cable was

not correctly
KV measurement resistor plugged
and cable test
FAIL
PASS
Resistor value
FAIL
Pin to pin

HV Tank to Power
Module

Error 0x0605 kV max cathode error

- POWER MODULE
- HV TANK
Error 0x0605
PASS
FAIL
KV swapped HV cables
Error on tank side test
the same side
Error on
the other side
End : Change End : Investigate
HV TANK HV CABLES
FAIL PASS
End : Cable was

not correctly
KV measurement resistor plugged
and cable test
FAIL
PASS
Resistor value
FAIL
Pin to pin

HV Tank to Power
Module

Error 0x0606 Too many spits

- HV TANK
Error 0x0606
Check Spit side
Anode or Both sides

cathode (A+C)
End : Investigate
HV Cable connector Tube side
TUBE
test
FAIL PASS
End : improve
connection or
HV Cable connector HV TANK side
replace HV Cable
test
PASS FAIL
End : improve
kV swapped HV Cables both connection or
Sides test replace HV Cable
Spits on Spits on
the other side the same side
at 125kV at 125kV
End : improve
End : Investigate
connection or
TUBE
replace HV Cable

Error 0x0607 Inverter resonant current timeout

- POWER MODULE
- HV TANK
- ILR CABLE FROM HV TANK TO POWER MODULE
Error 0x0607
Diag: Inverter Test
PASS FAIL
End : Change
KV inverter Tank ILR POWER MODULE
connection test
FAIL PASS
End : reconnect
POWER MODULE
KV Tank ILR Primary
to HV TANK ILR
Connection Test
cables
FAIL PASS


Error 0x0608 Inverter over current

- POWER MODULE
Error 0x0608
Is too many spits in the error log
YES NO
End : change End : change

POWER MODULE POWER MODULE
Error 0x0609 kV not ready


Error 0x060A kV zero

- POWER MODULE
- HV TANK
Error 0x060A
FAIL PASS
KV measurement connection test Inverter Test
PASS FAIL
PASS FAIL
End : Change
ribbon measure End : Change End : Change
cable from HV KV measurement resistor HV TANK POWER MODULE
Tank to Power and cable test
Module
FAIL
PASS
Resistor value
FAIL
Pin to pin

HV Tank to Power
Module
Error 0x060C Unknown kV regulation state


Error 0x060E kV regulation out

- POWER MODULE
- HV TANK
Error 0x060E
kV Check DC Bus error value
FAIL
FAIL
DCBUS < 250V
Go to error 0x0583
Diag Sequence Is error ‘too many spits’
in the error log ?
NO
YES
End : Change
HV TANK
FAIL PASS
KV measurement connection test Diag: Inverter Test
PASS FAIL FAIL

PASS
ribbon measure POWER MODULE
cable from HV KV measurement resistor
and cable test End : Change
Tank to Power HV TANK
Module
FAIL
PASS
Resistor value FAIL
Pin to pin
End : Change
End : Change
HV TANK
POWER MODULE
End : Change ribbon
cable from HV Tank to
Power Module
Error 0x060F Timeout firmware FPGA


Error 0x0681 Exposure command while not ready

Error 0x0682 Power Module internal cables missing or damaged

Error 0x0683 Measurement cable between tank and power missing or damaged
- POWER MODULE
Error 0x0683
KV measurement
connection test
PASS FAIL
End : reconnect
KV measurement POWER MODULE
Resistor and cable test to HV TANK ribbon
cable
PASS
FAIL
But error 0x0683
Resistor value
FAIL still reported
Pin to pin
End : Change HV End : Change End : Change

TANK ribbon cable from POWER MODULE
HV Tank to Power
Module

Error 0x0684 kV detected while off

- POWER MODULE
- HV TANK
Error 0x0684
PASS FAIL
End : Change
POWER MODULE
FAIL PASS
End : Cable was

KV measurement resistor not correcly
and cable test plugged
FAIL
PASS
Resistor value FAIL
Pin to pin
End : Change ribbon

cable from HV Tank to
Power Module
Error 0x0685 ILR not zero while off


Error 0x0981 Boot autodiag failed data (kV)

- POWER MODULE
- HV TANK
Error 0x0981
mA measurement
Connection test
PASS FAIL
End : HV Tank to
plugged
FAIL
PASS
(pin-to-pin)
FAIL
Replace HV Tank (resistor values)
to Control ribbon
End : Replace
cable
POWER MODULE
End : Replace
HV TANK

8.4.6.6 Rotation
Error 0x0401 No CAN message received within 5 sec

Error 0x0402 Database not correct

Error 0x0403 Current overload

- MAIN AUXILIARY
Error 0x0403
Diag: Tube Rotor Impedance
Tube Impedance NO DCBUS

error detected
Measure Chain
error
Power Bridge error
End : Investigate
TUBE
End : Change
MAIN AUXILIARY
MAIN AUXILIARY MAIN AUXILIARY

Error 0x0404 Open Load

- MAIN AUXILIARY
Error 0x0404
NO DCBUS
detected
Tube Impedance
error Measure Chain
Power Bridge error
error

MAIN AUXILIARY MAIN AUXILIARY MAIN AUXILIARY
Rotor tube connection Rotor side test
FAIL PASS
End : Improve /
replace rotor Rotor Tube connection Tube side test
cable connection
on Djinn side
PASS FAIL
End : Improve /
replace rotor
Tube stator Resistor
cable connection
and isolation tube side test
on Tube side
PASS FAIL
End : Improve / replace

End : Investigate
rotor cable connection on
TUBE
Tube side

Error 0x0405 Phases unbalanced

- MAIN AUXILIARY
Error 0x0405
Tube Impedance NO DCBUS

error detected
Measure Chain
error
Power Bridge error

MAIN AUXILIARY MAIN AUXILIARY
End : Change
MAIN AUXILIARY
Tube stator Resistor and

isolation tube side test
PASS FAIL
End : Improve /
replace rotor End : Investigate
cable connection TUBE
on Tube side
Error 0x0407 Inverter permanent overcurrent

Error 0x0408 No DC Bus detected

Error 0x0409 Hardware database configuration error


Error 0x0412 HW/FW configuration error

Error 0x0413 HW/FW IUVW short circuit error

- MAIN AUXILIARY
Error 0x0413
Tube stator
Resistor and isolation
tube side test
PASS FAIL
End : Investigate
Rotor tube TUBE
connection
Tube side test
FAIL PASS

rotor cable connection
on Tube side Rotor tube
connection
Rotor side test
FAIL PASS

End : change MAIN
AUXILIARY
on Tube side
Error 0x0458 Acceleration command while no tube selected


Error 0x0459 Acceleration command while database not OK

Error 0x0460 Database download while rotor speeding

Error 0x0462 Acceleration whine in error

Error 0x0464 Speed value command not correct


Error 0x0467 Incorrect current waveform

Error 0x0467
Tube stator
Resistor and isolation
tube side test
PASS FAIL
End : Investigate
Rotor tube TUBE
connection
Tube side test
FAIL PASS

on Tube side Rotor tube
connection
Rotor side test
FAIL PASS

End : change MAIN
AUXILIARY
on Tube side
Error 0x0468 Current sensor O/P out of spec


Error 0x0480 Communication problem

- MAIN AUXILIARY
- POWER MODULE
- CAN RIBBON CABLE BETWEEN POWER MODULE AND MAIN AUXILIARY
Error 0x0480
Rotor Check comm error data
DATA = 3 DATA = 0
DATA = 2 End : Reload Djinn SW

(included rotor FW)
DATA = 1 If fails, replace MAIN
End : Change AUXILIARY
MAIN AUXILIARY
LVPS CAN cable connection test
Auxiliary LEDs Health test
FAIL
Yellow LED Yellow LED quickly PASS
slowly Red blinking
End : CAN link was
faulty
End : Reload Djinn SW End : Change
Yellow LED quickly
(included rotor FW) MAIN AUXILIARY
No RED
If fails, replace MAIN
AUXILIARY
End : Change ribbon
cable between MAIN
AUXILIARY and POWER
End : Change
MODULE
POWER MODULE
Is error still reported
YES NO
End : Change End : Problem

MAIN AUXILIARY solved
Is error still reported
YES NO
End : Change End : Problem

POWER MODULE solved
Error 0x0481 Rotor reset


Error 0x0482 Rotor accelerating but not configured

Error 0x0483 Rotor braking but stop not demanded

Error 0x0484 Rotor accelerating but stop demanded

Error 0x0485 Protocol break during power up.

Error 0x0486 Rotor prep timeout

Error 0x0487 Inconsistency between command and feedback

Error 0x0488 Returned speed command incorrect

Error 0x0489 Filament Rotor Board Combination mismatch

Error 0x078B Rotation not ready when requested temperature


Error 0x078C No rotor temperature feedback or error in replied temperature


8.4.6.7 System Communication

Error 0x0601 Exposure logic error
- POWER MODULE
Error 0X0601
Ground wiring test
FAIL PASS
End : change
End : correct System to Djinn
ground wiring link
Error still reported
YES NO
End : RTL generator

on system side End : problem
failure OR replace solved
POWER MODULE

Error 0x0611 RTL2 error

- POWER MODULE
Error 0x0611
Ground wiring test
FAIL PASS
End : correct
Investigate System to Djinn link
ground wiring
PASS FAIL
End : RTL generator

End : Investigate
on system side
System to Djinn
failure OR replace
link
POWER MODULE

Error 0x0613 RTL4 error

- POWER MODULE
Error 0x0613
Ground wiring test
FAIL PASS
End : correct
ground wiring
PASS FAIL
End : RTL generator

End : Investigate
on system side
System to Djinn
failure OR replace
link
POWER MODULE

Error 0x0801 Timeout when waiting for exposure start

- POWER MODULE
Error 0x0801
Ground wiring test
FAIL PASS
End : correct
ground wiring
PASS FAIL
End : RTL generator

End : Investigate
on system side
System to Djinn
failure OR replace
link
POWER MODULE
Error 0x0805 System Identifier mismatch

Diagnostic sequence: Restart system and Djinn Generator (Power OFF / Power ON). If problem
Error 0x0806 Unknown System Command received


Error 0x0807 Timeout while waiting for Prep Start

Error 0x090B RTL2 signal rising at bootup

- POWER MODULE
Error 0x090B
Ground wiring test
FAIL PASS
End : correct
ground wiring
PASS FAIL
End : RTL generator

End : Investigate
on system side
System to Djinn
failure OR replace
link
POWER MODULE

Error 0x8110 CANopen communication overrun

- POWER MODULE
Error 0x8110
Ground wiring test
FAIL PASS
End : correct
ground wiring
PASS FAIL
End : RTL generator

End : Investigate
on system side
System to Djinn
failure OR replace
link
POWER MODULE
Error 0x8130 CANopen node guarding failure


8.4.6.8 Low Voltage Power Supplies

Error 0x0466 LVPS O/P out of spec
- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
(UURU[

'LDJ3RZHU6XSSOLHV

PASS FAIL

/936&$1&DEOH
'LDJ)LO'UY6KRUW7HVW
&RQQHFWLRQWHVW
PASS
PASS FAIL
0A81h or 0466h or 0108h
(1'
%DWWHU\9ROWDJH
1R)LO3RZHU7DQN&RQQHFWLRQ 0HDVXUHPHQWWHVW
,QYHVWLJDWH9
'LDJ)LO'UY6KRUW7HVW 'LDJ)LO'UY6KRUW7HVW &$1FDEOH
FAIL PASS
Other case
0A81h or 0466h or 0108h
(1' 90HDVXUH1R
(1' &KHFN%DWWHULHV 3RZHU
5HSODFH7DQN
PASS FAIL
fails or causes
(1' (1' (1'

5HSODFH3RZHU 5HSODFH3RZHU ,QYHVWLJDWH
PASS
PRGXOH 0RGXOH /9/(

1R)LO3RZHU7DQN&RQQHFWLRQ
'LDJ)LO'UY6KRUW7HVW
5LVH7LPH5HJXODWLRQ
Other case
PASS
causes error
0A81h or 0466h
0A81h or 0466h or 0208h

(1'
'LDJ5HVRQDQW (1'
5HSODFH3RZHU
(1'
&RPSRQHQWV 5HSODFH3RZHU 5HSODFH7DQN
0RGXOH 0RGXOH
causes error PASS

0A81h or 0466h

/936&$1&DEOH
&RQQHFWLRQWHVW
(1'
5HSODFH3RZHU
0RGXOH
FAIL PASS
(1'
,QYHVWLJDWH9
%DWWHU\9ROWDJH
0HDVXUHPHQWWHVW
&$1FDEOH

FAIL PASS

(1'
90HDVXUH1R3RZHU
&KHFN%DWWHULHV

FAIL PASS

(1' (1'
,QYHVWLJDWH 5HSODFH3RZHU
/9/( 0RGXOH


Error 0x0A81 Internal power supplies out of specification

- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
(UURU[$
'LDJ3RZHU6XSSOLHV
3$66 )$,/
'LDJ)LO'UY6KRUW /936&$1&DEOH
7HVW &RQQHFWLRQWHVW
)DLORUFDXVHVHUURU
3$66 3$66 )$,/
$KRUKRUK
(1'
%DWWHU\9ROWDJH ,QYHVWLJDWH
'LDJ)LO'UY6KRUW7HVW 'LDJ)LO'UY6KRUW7HVW
0HDVXUHPHQWWHVW 9&$1
FDEOH
)$,/ 3$66
)DLORUFDXVHVHUURU
2WKHUFDVH
$KRUKRUK
(1'
90HDVXUH1R
&KHFN 3RZHU
(1'
%DWWHULHV
5HSODFH7DQN
3$66 )$,/
IDLOVRUFDXVHV
HUURU$KRUKRUK
(1' (1' (1'
5HSODFH 5HSODFH ,QYHVWLJDWH
3$66
3RZHUPRGXOH 3RZHU0RGXOH /9/(
'LDJ5LVH7LPH5HJXODWLRQ 'LDJ)LO'UY6KRUW7HVW
2WKHUFDVH
FDXVHVHUURU
3$66 )DLORUFDXVHVHUURU
$KRUK
$KRUKRUK
'LDJ5HVRQDQW (1' (1'

(1'
&RPSRQHQWV 5HSODFH 5HSODFH
5HSODFH7DQN
3RZHU0RGXOH 3RZHU0RGXOH
FDXVHVHUURU 3$66
$KRUK
/936&$1&DEOH
&RQQHFWLRQWHVW
(1'
5HSODFH )$,/ 3$66
3RZHU0RGXOH
(1'
,QYHVWLJDWH %DWWHU\9ROWDJH
9&$1 0HDVXUHPHQWWHVW
FDEOH
)$,/ 3$66
(1'
90HDVXUH1R
&KHFN 3RZHU
%DWWHULHV
)$,/ 3$66
(1' (1'
,QYHVWLJDWH 5HSODFH
/9/( 3RZHU0RGXOH


8.4.6.9 Cooling / Thermal

Error 0x0701 Tube overtemp switch open
(UURU[
'LDJ7HVW&&LUFXLW
Interface Sensor
error error
(QGFKDQJH
7KHUPDOVHQVRUUHVLVWDQFHWHVW
0$,1$8;,/,$5<
FAIL PASS
(QG,QYHVWLJDWH
(QG,QYHVWLJDWH 7KHUPDOVZLWFK
78%( OLQNIURP78%(WR
0$,1$8;,/,$5<

Error 0x0702 Tank temperature too high

Potential GENERATOR FRU involved: HV TANK
persists, re-download Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace HV TANK.
Error 0x0703 Inverter temperature too high

Error 0x0704 Filament-bias temperature too high

Error 0x0705 Rotor board temperature too high

persists, re-download Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace MAIN AUXILIARY.

Error 0x0706 Tank is getting hot

Potential GENERATOR FRU involved: HV TANK
persists, re-download Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace HV TANK.
Error 0x0707 Inverter is getting hot

Error 0x0708 Filament-bias is getting hot

Error 0x0709 Rotor board is getting hot

persists, re-download Djinn Software. If the problem persists, replace MAIN AUXILIARY.
Error 0x0782 Tank sensor failure

- HV TANK
(UURU[
N9PHDVXUHPHQWUHVLVWRUDQG
FDEOHWHVW
3$66 )$,/
(QGULEERQFDEOH
EHWZHHQ+97DQN
(QGFKDQJH
DQG32:(5
+97$1.
02'8/(ZDV
IDXOW\

Error 0x0783 Inverter sensor failure


Error 0x0784 Tube thermal protection error

Error 0x0785 Single wire device configuration attempt failure

Error 0x0786 Single Wire device not correctly configured

- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
(UURU[
&KHFN*HQHUDWRUERDUGV61
LQ717
)LODPHQW61 ,QYHUWHU61
717B)%B61 717B3:B61
5HSRUWHGLV 5HSRUWHGLV
&RQWURO61 +97$1.61
(QG&KDQJH
717B&%B61 717B7$1.B61
32:(502'8/(
5HSRUWHGLV 5HSRUWHGLV
(QG&KDQJH (QG&KDQJH
32:(502'8/( 32:(502'8/(
.90HDVXUHPHQW
&RQQHFWLRQWHVW
3$66 )$,/
.90HDVXUHPHQW (QG&KDQJH
5HVLVWRUDQGFDEOHWHVW .90HDVXUHPHQW
5LEERQFDEOH
3$66 )$,/
(QG&KDQJH
(QG&KDQJH .90HDVXUHPHQW
7DQN 5LEERQFDEOH

Error 0x0787 Single wire communication impossible

- HV TANK
- POWER MODULE
(UURU[
N9PHDVXUHPHQWUHVLVWRUDQG
FDEOHWHVW
3$66 )$,/
(QGULEERQ
FDEOHEHWZHHQ
+97$1.DQG 7KHUPDOVHQVRUQRWDQNWHVW
32:(5
02'8/(ZDV
IDXOW\ (UURUUHSRUWHG (UURUUHSRUWHG
[ [
(QG&KDQJH (QG&KDQJH
+97$1. 32:(5
02'8/(
Error 0x0788 Filament-Bias sensor failure

Error 0x0789 Temperature conversion can not be started

Error 0x078A Thread controlling single wire devices is not responding


8.4.6.10 Miscellaneous
Error 0x0802 Watchdog error - CanCtrl task is stopped
Error 0x0803 Watchdog error - DevCtrl task is stopped

Error 0x0804 Watchdog error - SysCtrl task is stopped

Error 0x0614 Watchdog error – Rose RT task is stopped

Error 0x0901 Download requested

Error 0x0902 No software or software corrupted

Error 0x0903 No database or database corrupted

Error 0x0905 No database or database corrupted

Error 0x0906 Application not compatible with Boot


Error 0x0907 FPGA missing or corrupted

Error 0x0908 FPGA not compatible with application software

Error 0x0909 Rotation firmware not compatible with application software

Error 0x090A Boot Corrupted

Error 0x090C ST10 watchdog error

Error 0x0A87 Simulated version on actual Generator

Error 0x0A90 NVRAM battery is low

Error 0x0A91 Real-time clock not working

Error 0x0AA0 Reboot caused by an unexpected exception

Error 0x0AA1 FPGA communication watchdog error



8.4.6.11 Problems Not Reported by Djinn but detected at system level

Communication with Djinn impossible
persists, re-download Djinn Software. If the problem persists, perform the following diag sequence :
Communication
with Djinn
impossible
Investigate System communication

cable with Djinn
PASS
FAIL
Investigate system
End : replace
cable/comm
POWER MODULE
board

Exposure does not start

- POWER MODULE
Exposure does not

start
Ground wiring test
FAIL PASS
End : correct
ground wiring
FAIL PASS
End : Investigate RTL

generator on system
End : Replace
side failure OR
POWER MODULE
replace POWER
MODULE

Djinn reboots without any indication in the event log of something that could have gone
wrong
- POWER MODULE
No system
communication
Power Comm LEDs test
FAIL PASS
Go to
communication
error diag
LVPS CAN cable connection test sequence
PASS FAIL
End : reconnect or
replace ribbon
cable betwwen
LVLE output voltage test
MAIN AUXILIARY
and POWER
MODULE
PASS FAIL
End : check /
End : change
Investigate system
POWER MODULE
LVLE

8.4.7 List of diagnostics and Field Engineers actions

The list of all diagnostics used in Djinn Beetle GENERATOR is given below.
8.4.7.1 Diagnostics
Tube Rotor Impedance
Type: Software
Description: Impedance tube stator measurement
Power Supplies
Type: Software
Description: +/-13V, 48V, 3V3 power supply checking. This test checks that internal power supplies
are within the proper range when all the modules are turned off
Resonant Components
Type: Software
Description: Resonant components verification one pulse on each side. This test drives the
MOSFETs gates in order to confirm the inverter resonant components are functional.
Inverter test
Type: Software
Description: Inverter Test with low DC bus value and switches. This test drives the MOSFETs gates
in order to confirm the inverter is functional.
Test 70C Circuit

Type: Software
Description: This diagnostic checks the status of thermal switch connected to rotation board.
RTL Test
Type: Software
Description: This test checks that the RTL commands sent by system are properly received by
Djinn.
Fil 1 Drv Clsd Loop

Type: Software
Description: This test sends 3 targets of current on Fil1 and checks then if measured feedbacks are
in a correct range. It also checks if feedback measured on inactive filament Fil2 to determine if there
is no short-circuit between the two filaments.
Fil 1 Xfmr Primary

Type: Software
Description: This test drives the inverter of Fil1 and creates a resonant current through the parasitic
magnetic inductance at primary transformer pins. Then it verifies if measured current is different
from 0.

Type: Software
Description: This test drives the Fil1 inverter at 2 fixed frequency with a short-circuit at the output of
the Fil1 using a relay on Fil-Board output. Then it verifies if measured current is in a proper range.
Fil 2 Drv Clsd Loop

Type: Software
Description: This test sends 3 targets of current on Fil2 and checks then if measured feedbacks are
in a correct range. It also checks if feedback measured on inactive filament Fil1 to determine if there
is no short-circuit between the two filaments.
Fil 2 Xfmr Primary

Type: Software
Description: This test drives the inverter of Fil2 and creates a resonant current through the parasitic
magnetic inductance at primary transformer pins. Then it verifies if measured current is different
from 0.

Type: Software
Description: This test drives the Fil2 inverter at 2 fixed frequency with a short-circuit at the output of
the Fil2 using a relay on Fil-Board output. Then it verifies if measured current is in a proper range.
MA Measurement
Type: Software
Description: This test injects a known current in the mA measurement circuit and checks if real
measured value is in a specified range.
KV Measurement
Type: Software
Description: This test applies a known voltage on the KV measurement circuit and checks if real
measured value is in a specified range.
KV Test
Type: Software
Description: This diagnostic performs the following group of standalone diagnostic tests simulating
normal system functionality:
- HV Tank connection test
- KV Measurement
- Inverter test
- Resonant component verification
mA Test
Type: Software
- HV Tank connection test
- KV Measurement

- Inverter test
- Resonant component verification
Rotation Test
Type: Software
- Check the communication with the rotation board
- Tube Rotor impedance
- Test 70C circuit
- Sequence start and brake
- Discharge test
- Verify Checksum rotation
Auto Test
Type: Software
Description: This test runs automatically at start-up and encompasses the mA measurement and
kV measurement tests.

8.4.7.2 FE Actions

For all invasive procedures, perform LOTO and verify with a DVM that all stored electrical
energy has been dissipated prior to performing the service action.
SW Download with correct database (15kW / 30kW)

Type: SW
Tooling:
Through the system interface load the Djinn Beetle generator SW with the correct database (15kW
or 30kW).
Filament HV Tank Power connection Test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohm meter
Description: Check that the heater cable J5 from the tank is connected to the power module J6 and
is not in short circuit. Inspect connectors for pushed or damaged pins. Perform pin to pin continuity
check.
Filament HV Cable connection Test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Wrench for HV Cables
Description: Remove cathode HV cable at the tank and inspect for insulator cracks, damaged pins,
or High Voltage arc tracks. Clean or replace as necessary, apply HV grease and reconnect. Ensure
High Voltage cable is properly seated and tightly secured.
Filament impedance through HV Cable Test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohms meter, Wrench for HV Cables
Description: With HV Cable disconnected from tank and connected to tube. Check with a multimeter

that the filament impedance measured on the HV Cable pins are below the following values.
- C to S = 5 ohms
- C to L = 5 ohms
- S to L = 5 ohms
Note; these are maximum values.
If these values are significantly different, perform the same measurements at the tube with the HV
cable removed. This will isolate a tube or HV cable issue.
Filament impedance Tube side Test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohms meter, Wrench for Tube HV receptacle
Description: With HV Cable disconnected from Tube. Check with a multimeter that the filament
impedance measured on the Tube HV Receptacle pins are below the following values.
- C to S = 5 ohms
- C to L = 5 ohms
- S to L = 5 ohms
Note; these are maximum values.
This will isolate a tube or HV cable issue.
LVPS CAN cable connection test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohm-meter
Description: Checks that the LVPS CAN cable (cable between POWER MODULE J1-F and MAIN
AUXILIARY connector labelled CAN is connected properly on both sides and is not visibly
damaged. Perform cable pin-to-pin continuity check.
Battery Voltage measurement Test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Voltmeter
Description: With the system in Idle state, measure the battery voltage directly on the cable
connected to Djinn. Check that the voltage remains in an acceptable range (higher than 144Vdc).
Rise Time/Regulation
Type: Visual / HW
Tooling:
Description: Switch off the system and wait for 3 min (for capacitors to discharge). Switch on the
system, check the Error log, search the BB Error reported after the system Boot up (Error in
0X05xx).
48V Measure no Power

Type: Visual / HW

Tooling: Voltmeter
Description: With the LVPS CAN cable (cable between POWER MODULE J1-F and MAIN
AUXILIARY connector labelled CAN disconnected, measure 48V power supply on Djinn side, at the
level of the connector coming from LVLE2 to the POWER MODULE connector J2-F. Check that
measurement is 48V ± 2.5V.
No Fil Power tank connection Fil1
Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Voltmeter
Description: Disconnect the 4-wire cable between POWER MODULE J6 and HV TANK J5. Perform
cable pin to pin continuity check.
No Fil Power tank connection Fil2

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Voltmeter
Description: Disconnect the 4-wire cable between POWER MODULE J6 and HV TANK J5. Perform
cable pin to pin continuity check.

Filament ageing clearing test

Type: SW
Tooling: None
Description: Clear filament ageing. Perform filament calibration. Ensure it completes without error
(0X0B84, 0X0B85, 0X0B86). Retest system using the same techniques that originally failed.
Filament HV Tank no tube test

Type: Visual / HW
Description: With HV cathode cable disconnected from the tube. Check that both diagnostics Fil1
Drv Clsd Loop and Fil2 Drv Clsd Loop fail. Make sure the disconnected HV cable is isolated from
ground.
Filament current will be present during the diagnostic."
Filament HV Tank no HV Cable

Type: Visual / HW
Description: With HV cathode cable disconnected from the tank. Check that both diagnostics Fil1
Drv Clsd Loop and Fil2 Drv Clsd Loop fail.
mA measurement connection test

Type: SW
Tooling: None
Description: Check that the measurement ribbon cable between HV TANK J6 and POWER
MODULE J7 is properly connected. Press on connectors on both sides. Launch mA Measurement
diagnostic and check that the result is PASS.
mA measurement cable and resistor test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohm meter
Description: Disconnect measurement ribbon cable between HV TANK J6 and POWER MODULE
J7 and perform pin-to-pin continuity. Then reconnect the cable at the HV TANK end connector J6
ONLY.
With an ohmmeter, at the Power module cable end, measure the resistance between pins 5 and 8,
and between pin 6 and 12. Resistance measured should be 10 ohms ± 0.5 for each measurement
set.
At the Power module cable end, measure the resistance between pins 10 and 8, then between pins
12 and 14. Resistance measured should be 1000 ohms ± 100 ohms for each measurement set.

DC Bus cable connection test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohm meter
Description: Check that the DC Bus (shielded cable with 3-points connectors) is correctly connected
to the MAIN AUXILIARY XJ2 and the POWER MODULE J1 (DC-BAT-GND) and that all wire
connections are tight. Tighten screws if necessary. Alternately, disconnect cable at both ends and
perform visual inspection for damage and pin-to-pin resistance check.
Input Power connection test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: As needed
Description: Check that the Input power cable (END A) is correctly connected to the J6 connector of
Cricket and that there is no loose screw.
Check that the Input power cable (END B) is correctly connected to the XJ1 connector of MAIN
AUXILIARY and that there is no loose screw

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: As needed

Description: Ensure the systems main breaker is functional and transferring battery voltage
correctly.

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Multimeter
Description: Ensure that the cable from the batteries to Djinn MAIN AUXILIARY XJ1 is connected
correctly, screws are tight, and cable is not damaged. Verify the battery voltage of 144Vdc minimum
is present on XJ1 pins 1 and 2. Ensure that the cable from MAIN AUXILIARY XJ2 to POWER
MODULE J1 (DC-BAT-GND) is not damaged and perform continuity check. Check that the
POWER MODULE connection J1 (DC-BAT-GND) is secure. Verify the battery voltage of 144Vdc
minimum is present at the POWER MODULE end of the cable on J1 pins 2 and 3.
Djinn Main Auxiliary Fuse test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohm meter
Description: Check the continuity between the + BAT of the XJ1 connector and the +BAT of the XJ2
connector of the Main Auxiliary Module
KV with swapped HV cables tank side test

Type: Visual / HW
Description: Swap the HV cables on the tank side. Generate kV using no load kV mode, and
increase kV value until a spit is detected. Check if the detected spit is detected on the cathode or
anode side.

KV with swapped HV cables both sides test

Type: Visual / HW
Description: Swap the HV cables on the tube side and the tank side. Generate kV using no load kV
mode, and increase kV value until a spit or an error is detected. Check if the error is detected on
the cathode or anode side.

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling:
Description: Check that the measurement ribbon cable between HV TANK J6 and POWER
MODULE J7 is correctly connected and is not damaged (open or shorted). Push on both ends to
ensure proper connection.
KV measurement resistor and cable test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohm meter
Description: Disconnect measurement ribbon cable between HV TANK J6 and POWER MODULE
J7 and perform pin-to-pin continuity. Then reconnect the cable at the HV TANK end connector J6
ONLY.
With an ohmmeter, at the Power Module cable end measure impedance between pins 9 and 13,
then between pins 9 and 15. Measured value should be between 40k and 42k.
New Control HV Tank meas cable test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling:
Description: Replace the cable between Power Module and Auxiliary module by a new one. And
perform again the test.
KV check DC Bus error value

Type: SW
Tooling:
Description: Read the error data value associated with the error that arose during troubleshooting.
It
should correspond to the measurement of the DC bus at the time the error was triggered.
KV measurement resistor and cable test

Type: SW
Tooling:
Description: Read the generator boards S/N in the TNT:
- Filament board SN: TNT_FB_SN value must be nonzero
- Control board SN: TNT_CB_SN value must be nonzero
- Inverter board SN: TNT_PW_SN value must be nonzero
- HV Tank board SN: TNT_TANK_SN value must be nonzero
KV inverter tank ILR connection test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohm meter
Description: Check that the two small cables that connect the POWER MODULE to the HV TANK
are properly connected.
KV tank ILR Primary connection test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohm meter
Description: Disconnect MAIN AUXILIARY module from POWER MODULE. On HV TANK, connect
ohmmeter between 2 inverter connection terminals. Check that the measured impedance is lower
than 2 ohms

Rotor tube connection rotor side test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling:
Description: Check that the tube rotation cable (END A) is correctly connected to the J6 connector
of MAIN AUXILIARY and that there is no loose cable or screws. Tighten screws if necessary. Check
that the cable shield is correctly connected to the MAIN AUXILIARY module.
Rotor tube connection tube side test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling:
Description: Check that the tube rotation cable is correctly connected to the tube (END C terminals
1 2 3).
Tube stator resistor and isolation tube side test

Type: Visual / HW

Tooling: Ohm meter

Description: With tube rotation cable disconnected from tube. Measure on tube stator connector
resistance between Common and Phase, then between Common and Auxiliary. Check the
resistances are within specification. Measure isolation of each phase with respect to the chassis.
Make sure isolation resistance is very high.
Rotor check comm. Error data

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling:
Description: Check error log and read the value of the error data associated with the rotor
communication error 0X0480
If the data = 0 ==> Protocol error
If the data = 1 ==> Consistent CAN acknowledge error
If the data = 3 ==> CAN Bus error
If the data = 4 ==> Rotor board not powered
Auxiliary Neon check

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling:
Description: With system On check the Neon on auxiliaries module. If they are On, the test is PASS.
Auxiliary LEDs Health test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling:
Description: Check that on the MAIN AUXILIARY, the yellow LED is on and blinking and that the
red led is NOT blinking.
Ground wiring test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohm meter
Description: With the ohmmeter check that the impedance between any of the Djinn Modules
chassis and the system chassis is lower than 5 ohms.

Thermal sensor resistance test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Ohm meter
Description: Disconnect cable from Tube at generator component Y J5 and measure tube thermal
switch resistance (END B). Verify it is less than 2 ohms. If greater than 2 ohms, measure tube
thermal switch at the tube with feedback cable disconnected. Verify thermal switch is less than 2
ohms. This will isolate the fault to the tube or the associated cabling.
Thermal Sensor no Tank test

Type: SW
Tooling:
Description: Disconnect the ribbon cable between HV TANK J6 and POWER MODULE J7. Reboot
Djinn after about 10 seconds, read Djinn hardware configuration. If Error 0787h (Software; Single
wire communication impossible) is reported, test is failed.
Power comm. LEDs test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling:
Description: Check that on the POWER MODULE the red led is off and that both green leds are on
and blinking quickly (several times per second).
Investigate System to Djinn Link

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling:

Description: Check that the System communication cable (END B) is correctly connected to the J1
connector of Power module and that there is no loose screw.
LVLE2 output voltage test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Voltmeter
Description: Troubleshoot the LVLE2 system power supply. Disconnect from the Djinn and verify
the no load voltage is 48Vdc +/- 2.5V (END B). Connect to Djinn and measure at Power Module J2-
F connection pins 1 and 2. If voltage is out of spec, determine if LVLE2 is faulty with system
diagnostics. Power Module may be root cause resulting in LVLE2 overcurrent shutdown.
Check spit side test

Type: SW
Tooling:
Description: Check error log and read the error data value associated with the too many spits error
(Error 0x0606).
If the data = 1 then arcs are at Anode side
If the data = 2 then arcs are at Cathode side
If the data = 3 then arcs are at Anode + Cathode sides
HV Cable connector tube side test

Type: Visual / HW
Tooling: Wrench for HV cables
Description: Remove HV cables at the tube and inspect for insulator cracks, damaged pins, or HV
arc tracks. Clean or replace as necessary, apply HV grease and reconnect. Ensure HV cable is
properly seated and tightly secured.
HV Cable connector Tank side test

Type: Visual / HW


Description: Remove HV cables at the tank and inspect for insulator cracks, damaged pins, or HV
arc tracks. Clean or replace as necessary, apply HV grease and reconnect. Ensure HV cable is
properly seated and tightly secured.
Is too many spits in the log

Type: Visual / HW
Description: Read the error log and check if among recent errors "0X0606: too many spits error"
was reported.

8.4.8 Annex 1 : Djinn Beetle Interconnection

8.4.9 Annex 2 : Description of Djinn Beetle Errors

Table 8-13
Device Error Code Origin Why

Heater 1 0x0100 FW Unknown FW error
Heater 1 0x0101 FW Soft over current (measured current > estimated current)
Heater 1 0x0102 FW Soft open circuit (measured current < estimated current)
Heater 1 0x0103 FW Demand too high (target > max heater)
Heater 1 0x0104 FW Demand too low (target < min heater)
Heater 1 0x0105 FW Inverter OFF and current not zero
Heater 1 0x0107 FW Over current detected by FPGA
Heater 1 0x0108 FW Filament 1 driver stopped by 48V out of range
Heater 1 0x0181 SW state SW Unexpected firmware state
Heater 1 0x0183 SW Id SW Filament 1 driver diag failed
Heater 2 0x0200 FW Unkwn FW error
Heater 2 0x0201 FW Soft over current (measured current > estimated current)
Heater 2 0x0202 FW Soft open circuit (measured current < estimated current)
Heater 2 0x0203 FW Demand too high (target > max heater)
Heater 2 0x0204 FW Demand too low (target < min heater)
Heater 2 0x0205 FW Inverter OFF and current not zero
Heater 2 0x0207 FW Over current detected by FPGA
Heater 2 0x0208 FW Filament 2 driver stopped by 48V out of range
Heater 2 0x0281 SW state SW Unexpected firmware state
Heater 2 0x0283 SW Id SW Filament 2 driver diag failed
Rotor 0x0400 FW Unkwn FW error
Rotor 0x0401 FW CAN message received within 5 sec
Rotor 0x0402 FW Database not correct
Rotor 0x0403 FW Current overload
Rotor 0x0404 FW Open load
Rotor 0x0405 FW Phases unbalanced
Rotor 0x0406 FW Phase error
Rotor 0x0407 FW Inverter permanent over current
Rotor 0x0408 FW DC bus detected
Rotor 0x0409 FW HW/DB configuration error
Rotor 0x0412 FW HW/FW configuration error
Rotor 0x0413 FW IUVW short circuit error
Rotor 0x0420 FW DC bus always discharged
Rotor 0x0458 FW Acceleration command while tube selected
Rotor 0x0459 FW Acceleration cmd while database not OK
Rotor 0x0460 FW Database download while rotor speeding

Table 8-13

Rotor 0x0462 FW Acceleration while in error
Rotor 0x0464 FW Speed value command not correct
Rotor 0x0466 FW 48V LVPS out of specification
Rotor 0x0468 FW Current sensor out of specification
Rotor 0x0480 SW Communication problem
Rotor 0x0481 SW Rotor Reset
Rotor 0x0482 SW state SW Accelerating but stop configured
Rotor 0x0483 SW state SW Braking but stop demanded
Rotor 0x0484 SW state SW Accelerating but stop demanded
Rotor 0x0485 SW step SW Protocol break during power up.
Rotor 0x0486 SW Rotor preparation time-out
Rotor 0x487 SW Inconsistency between command and feedback
Rotor 0x488 SW Returned speed command incorrect
Rotor 0x489 SW Filament-Rotor Board Combination mismatch
BB 0x0500 FW Unknown FW error
BB 0x0501 FW Bad DC output voltage reference
BB 0x0503 FW DC bus rising time too fast
BB 0x0504 FW DC bus rising time too slow
BB 0x0505 FW Buck Boost input current detected while ON
BB 0x0510 FW Over output DC voltage
BB 0x0511 FW Unknown BB state
BB 0x0520 FW Over input current
BB 0x0523 FW Zero Voltage Switching timeout
BB 0x0524 FW Buck-Boost over current
BB 0x0525 FW Boost timeout
BB 0x0580 SW Timeout when waiting for DC bus
BB 0x0581 SW input voltage detected too low
BB 0x0582 SW input voltage detected too high
BB 0x0583 SW DC bus voltage too low
BB 0x0584 SW input voltage detected
BB 0x0585 SW Input current detected while BB is OFF
kV 0x0600 FW Unknown FW error
kV 0x0601 FW Exposure logic error
kV 0x0602 FW kV Cathode unbalanced
kV 0x0603 FW kV Anode unbalanced
kV 0x0604 FW kV max anode error
kV 0x0605 FW kV max cathode error
kV 0x0606 FW Too many spits

Table 8-13

kV 0x0607 FW Inverter resonant current time out
kV 0x0608 FW Inverter over current
kV 0x0609 FW kV not ready
kV 0x060A FW kV zero
kV 0x060C FW Unknown kV regulation state
kV 0x060E FW bus voltage measured when error
kV 0x060F FW Watchdog firmware error
kV 0x0611 FW RTL 2 error
kV 0x0613 FW RTL 4 error
kV 0x0614 FW Watchdog error - Rose RT task is stopped
kV 0x0615 FW ADC frozen
kV 0x0616 FW Resonant limit reached too many times
kV 0x0681 SW Exp cmd while not ready
kV 0x0682 SW Power module internal cable missing or damaged
kV 0x0683 SW Measurement cable between tank and power missing or damaged error
kV 0x0684 SW kV detected while inverter is OFF
kV 0x0685 SW ILR not zero while OFF
kV 0x0686 SW Measure connection failure
Thermal 0x0701 SW Tube overtemp switch open
Thermal 0x0702 SW Tank temperature too high
Thermal 0x0703 SW Inverter temperature too high
Thermal 0x0704 SW Filament-Bias temperature too high
Thermal 0x0705 SW Rotor board temperature too high
Thermal 0x0706 SW Tank is getting hot
Thermal 0x0707 SW Inverter is getting hot
Thermal 0x0708 SW Filament-Bias is getting hot
Thermal 0x0709 SW Rotor board is getting hot
Thermal 0x0710 SW Fan driver error
Thermal 0x0782 SW Tank sensor failure
Thermal 0x0783 SW Inverter sensor failure
Thermal 0x0784 SW Tube Thermal protection
Thermal 0x0785 SW Single wire device configuration attempt failure
Thermal 0x0786 SW Single Wire device not correctly configured
Thermal 0x0787 SW Single Wire communication impossible
Thermal 0x0788 SW Filament-bias sensor failure
Thermal 0x0789 SW Temperature conversion can’t be started
Thermal 0x078A SW Thread controlling single wire devices is not responding
Thermal 0x078B SW Rotation not ready when requested temperature

Table 8-13

Thermal 0x078C SW rotor temperature feedback or error in reply temperature
System 0x0801 SW Timeout while waiting for Exposure Start
System 0x0802 SW Watchdog error - CanCtrl task is stopped
System 0x0803 SW Watchdog error - DevCtrl task is stopped
System 0x0804 SW Watchdog error - SysCtrl task is stopped
System 0x0805 SW System Identifier mismatch
System 0x0806 SW System Unknown Command
System 0x0807 SW Timeout while waiting for Prep Start
Boot 0x0901 SW Download requested
Boot 0x0902 SW No software or software corrupted
Boot 0x0903 SW No database or database corrupted
Boot 0x0905 SW Database not compatible with software
Boot 0x0906 SW Application not compatible with Boot
Boot 0x0907 SW FPGA missing or corrupted
Boot 0x0908 SW FPGA not compatible with application software
Boot 0x0909 SW Rotation firmware not compatible with application firmware
Boot 0x090A SW Boot corrupted
Boot 0x090B SW RTL2 is rising at bootup
Boot 0x090C SW ST10 watchdog error
Various 0x0A81 SW Internal power supplies out of specification
Various 0x0A90 SW NVRAM battery is low
Various 0x0A91 SW Real-time clock not working
Various 0x0AA0 SW Reboot caused by an unexpected exception
Various 0x0AA1 SW FPGA communication watchdog error
mA 0x0B81 SW mA measured while inverter is off
mA 0x0B82 SW No mA measured at the beginning of the pulse
mA 0x0B83 SW Inconsistency between mA anode and mA cathode
mA 0x0B84 SW mA too low
mA 0x0B85 SW mA too high
mA 0x0B86 SW Filament ageing saturated
mA 0x0B87 SW mA out of range
CANopen 0x8110 SW CANopen communication overrun
CANopen 0x8130 SW CANopen node guarding failure

Section 8.5 FlashPad Detector Troubleshooting

8.5.1 Detector Overview
8.5.1.1 Detector Components
8.5.1.2 Communication Methods
8.5.1.3 Detector Modes of Operation
8.5.1.4 Detector LEDs and Indicators
8.5.1.5 Battery LEDs, TEST Pushbutton, Pins, and Charging
8.5.1.5.1 Battery Charging
8.5.1.5.2 Battery Calibration (DEEP CYCLE CHARGE)
8.5.1.6 Host PC Radio Board LEDs
8.5.1.7 Detector Icons
8.5.1.8 Detector Registration and Management
8.5.1.9 Detector Sensors
8.5.1.10 Detector Boot Routine
8.5.1.11 Detector Sense in a Charging Bin vs Table or Wall Stand
8.5.1.12 Warning Levels
8.5.1.13 Service User Interface (SUIF)
8.5.1.14 Detector Block Diagram
8.5.1.15 Host PC Connectivity
8.5.2 Failure Modes
8.5.2.1 Communication Failures
8.5.2.2 Environmental and Physical Failures
8.5.2.2.1 Temperature
8.5.2.2.2 Voltage
8.5.2.2.3 Sensors (shock and grid)
8.5.2.2.4 Detector Panel Defects or Damage
8.5.2.3 Battery and Charging Failures
8.5.2.4 Detector – System Firmware/Software Compatibility
8.5.3 Detector Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
8.5.3.1 SUIF Diagnostic Tool Set
8.5.3.1.1 Diagnostics for Communication Failures
Wireless Communication Diagnostic (Wireless Operation Only)
BIST (Built In Self Test) Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)
PING Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)
Ethernet Stats Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)
8.5.3.1.2 Diagnostic for Temperature Issues
Temperature Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)
8.5.3.1.3 Diagnostics for Voltage Issues
PS Full Load Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)
Partial Load Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)
PS Unloaded Diagnostic (Tethered Only)
PS Unloaded (Docked)
8.5.3.1.4 Diagnostics for Shock and Grid Sensor Reported Issues

Shock Sensor Diagnostic (Tether Only)

Grid Sensor Diagnostics (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)
8.5.3.1.5 Diagnostics for Battery and Charging Failures
Docking Connector Voltage Diagnostic (GbEthernet Only)
Battery Health Diagnostic (Wireless or GbEthernet Only)
Page 270 Section 8.5 FlashPad Detector Troubleshooting

Glossary of Terms
Term Definition
ARC Apollo Readout Circuit performs data module readout.
Authentication The process by which the host PC “authenticates” a detector.
Charging Bin Mobile units have a specialized storage assembly that provides 12 vdc
power for charging the Detector Battery.
Bandwidth The term used to indicate the signal rate between host PC and detector.
Beacon The search function, or “call out” which is initiated by the host Radio Board
when trying to establish communication with any detector.
Detector Connect Detector Connect is the status of the detector response to the Beacon
Docked The mechanism to provide the detector input power and signal
communication in a table tray or wall stand in a fixed X-ray system.
DPM Detector Power Module, used on a mobile, provides 12VDC
Error A report of an exception condition, as generated by the error management
facility. Errors are logged to the system error log.
Event Any important system activity or occurrence that is to be logged to the
system event log.
GbE Gigabit Ethernet communication. Currently a hardwire connection.
Link Quality An indicator of the system/detector ability to reject electronic noise
LSL Lower Specification Limit
LVLE2 A power supply used in the mobile
Mbps Mega Bits Per Second, a data transfer rate measurement.
Operator UIF Operator User Interface
PAA Primary Application Area
PNA Primary Navigation Area, consists of both the SAA and the SNA
Port Connection A device located on the system that provides GbEthernet connectivity
RSSI Receiver Signal Strength Indicator
SAA Secondary Application Area
SNA Secondary Navigation Area
SRB Switching Regulator Board
SSB System Status Bar frames, located below the PAA framework
SUIF Service User Interface
Tether A specialized cable used to connect the Detector to the System. Provides
power and communications for control and Raw Image Data transfer.
TIB Tether Interface Box is used on fixed rad systems
URP Wireless Detector
USL Upper Specification Limit
UWB Ultra Wide Band, a wireless communications technology

8.5.1 Detector Overview
8.5.1.1 Detector Components

• The detector contains a panel consisting of a two-dimensional pixel array. It converts a two-
dimensional X-ray image to a two dimensional array of electrical signals with each value
providing a representation of the amount of X-ray accumulated in the respective area since
last read.
• The panel support provides an assembly medium and heat isolation between the panel from
the motherboard as well as heat spreading. It also provides a cushioned support between the
glass panel array/motherboard and detector case via shock mounts to reduce the possibility
of shock acting on the panel.
• The detector case protects inside components against loading, drop, impact, patient body
fluid, cleaning agents etc. It also provides shielding for EMC and EMI.
• The motherboard together with the firmware and software controls detector operation
including system initialization, image acquisition, data communication, power management,
diagnostics, environmental monitoring etc. It also provides regulated voltage to panel, scan
modules, and data modules.
• Data modules read out the signals stored in pixels along each column of the two-dimensional
pixel array on the panel in parallel.
• Scan modules select the row or rows of the pixel array to be read by the data modules.
• The power supply and management are accomplished with a switching regulation board
(SRB). The SRB provides motherboard-required voltages from a battery or an external input
voltage. It is also responsible for managing battery charging and monitoring.
• The battery provides power while detector is in Wireless applications.
• The docking mechanism provides GbEthernet link and both charging power and input power
when detector is in the table tray or wall stand.
• The mobile storage bin provides only battery charging power.

8.5.1.2 Communication Methods

The user will be allowed to configure the method of communicating between the detector and the
host pc using one of three different technologies:
• GbEthernet (gigabit cable connection)
• Tether (megabit cable connection)
• Wireless UWB (ultra wide band, no cable connection, requires battery in detector)
During start up, the system searches for the detector in priority of GbEthernet, Tether, then
Wireless. The block diagram indicates this priority. See Figure 8-21.
Start
Detector on
Docking?
Yes
No
Tether
Yes
plugged in?
No
Setup 100BT Ethernet Setup Wireless Setup GbEthernet

Communication Communication Communication
Initialize Communication
Figure 8-21
The detector will communicate with the host pc using only ONE method at one time. The detector
can be used with compatible mobile, fixed RAD, and Fluoro systems and employ combinations of
these three communication technologies.
8.5.1.3 Detector Modes of Operation

The detector operational states are defined below:
• Power-off - The detector is completely powered down.
• Sleep - The detector is in a power saving mode.
• Charging - The detector is charging battery in storage bin.
• Idle - The detector is idle and waiting for exam command.
• Standby - The detector is ready for imaging.
• Imaging - The detector is acquiring images.

8.5.1.4 Detector LEDs and Indicators

The detector has four LEDs on board to indicate various conditions of operation. The LEDs can
display Green, Red, Yellow, or can be Dark. See Figure 8-22.
Detector Status LED

Wireless LED
Wakeup Button
Battery LED 1
Battery LED 2
Figure 8-22
Wireless LED:
• Green: Excellent signal strength with throughput no less than 20 Mbps;
• Yellow: Wireless connected but with degraded performance (<20 Mbps);
• Red: No wireless connection after beacon has been detected.
• Dark: No color when used in GbEthernet mode, Tethered mode, or a Beacon has not been
detected.
Detector Status LED:

• Green: Normal
• Red: Fault Condition
Battery LEDs represent the following conditions:

• LED 1 & LED 2 = Green: Indicating no less than 60% remaining power
• LED 1 = Dark + LED 2 = Green: Indicating between 35% and 60% remaining power
• LED 1 = Dark + LED 2 = Yellow: Indicating between 10% and 35% remaining power
• LED 1 = Dark + LED 2 = Red: Indication no more than 10% remaining power
• LED 1 & LED 2 = Dark: A tether is connected (Battery Removed)
10% is the minimum remaining battery capacity in order to prevent the battery from entering
sleep mode. Battery charging time will be significantly increased when it is in sleep mode.
Thus, 10% is really 0% for the customer. When the battery LEDs become LED 1 = Dark +
LED 2 = Red, the battery has to be either recharged or replaced before continuing operation.
Some Interactive Conditions:

• A red wireless LED and/or a red battery LED will trigger the red detector status LED. This is a
FAULT condition and the battery may need to be replaced.
• In Wireless operation - press & hold the Wake Up button to activate sleep mode (power saver
mode). The Wireless and Status LEDs will go dark, but the battery LEDs will remain on. Press
the Wake Up button to restore operation.
• In Tethered operation – press & hold the Wake Up button and the detector will power off, all
LEDs will go dark. Press the Wake Up button to restore operation.

The typical Detector LED condition for Wireless Communication:

• Wireless LED = Green
• Detector Status LED = Green
• Battery LEDs = Green + Green (~60% -100% charge)
The expected Detector LED condition for Tether Communication:

• Wireless LED = Dark (off)
• Battery LEDs = Dark (off) + Dark (off)
The typical Detector LED condition for GbEthernet (Docked) Communication:

• Wireless LED = Dark (off)
• Battery LEDs = Green + Green (~60% -100% charge)
Note: If the battery is inserted into the detector it will be charged when the detector is in “Stand By” mode.
The charging is stopped during image acquisition.
8.5.1.5 Battery LEDs, TEST Pushbutton, Pins, and Charging

The battery is necessary and must be inserted into the detector for Wireless Communication. The
detector will not work properly if any other battery is installed. See Figure 8-23.
Figure 8-23
Press the TEST pushbutton on the battery to determine what percentage of charge is remaining in
the battery. Note that this percentage is relative to the capacity of the battery, and this capacity will
deteriorate with charging cycles, time, and use. Regularly performing a battery calibration will
ensure that the reported charge amount is accurate.

Detector Troubleshooting
Figure 8-24 below shows the pin definition located on the bottom of the battery. The battery key is
a connector mating guide pin. There is no conductor in this pin. There are 5 conductors on battery
connector where:
• -: Common return
• T: Thermistor (used by the system to monitor and report temperature)
• D: Data
• C: Clock
• +: Voltage (in/out)
- T D C + Battery Key
Figure 8-24
8.5.1.5.1 Battery Charging

Place the battery into a battery charger to charge or calibrate (Deep Cycle Charge).
Place the detector w/battery into a table tray or wall stand.
Place the detector w/battery into the charging bin on a mobile.
The customer may complain the battery is not holding the charge or the battery may not be lasting
for as long as usual. An average use of 2.0 hours time on a calibrated battery is typical.

8.5.1.5.2 Battery Calibration (DEEP CYCLE CHARGE)

The battery can be calibrated (drained and recharged) by using the Deep Cycle Charging mode on
the charger. See Figure 8-25.
Figure 8-25
Insert the battery into the left receptacle and press the refresh button to start the calibration. The
LED on the left will be Yellow and blink to indicate calibration.
Both receptacles can be used for normal battery charging without pressing the refresh button.
LED Status:
• Steady Green = fully charged
• Flashing Green = charging
• Flashing Yellow = refresh in process, or waiting to start charge
• Flashing Red = Bad battery

8.5.1.6 Host PC Radio Board LEDs

The mobile and fixed X-ray system will have a small board and antenna (see Figure 8-26) that is
used to transmit and receive between the host and the detector, in Wireless Communication. This
small board has five status LEDs. A summary is below:
Figure 8-26
PWR LED Power applied to the radio board

BEACON LED Host PC is calling out to any detector
RESP LED Indicates the host PC has received a response from a detector
READY LED Indicates association to a single detector has been completed
DATA LED Flashes during data transfer between detector and host PC
The following table defines host radio board LED status for various communication states.
Note: READY LED flashes too fast to be seen. Advise monitoring PWR, BEACON, RESP, and DATA.
Radio Board LED Status State or Conditions of Communication

All LEDs off (power off) No host pc to radio board communication
PWR On, all others are OFF No communication between host PC and radio board. Can’t
transmit

PWR and BEACON are ON The host PC is communicating with the radio board, radio board
is transmitting, but no detectors seen yet
PWR and BEACON are ON Detector Wireless LED is Red, Battery LEDs are ON.
Host PC is communicating with the radio board, radio is
transmitting, but no detector seen yet.
PWR, BEACON, and RESP Detector Wireless LED Red, Battery LEDs ON.
are ON but intermittent If detector is powered off and RESP goes out, problem could be
RESP LED an issue with detector firmware
PWR, BEACON, and RESP Detector Wireless LED Red, Battery LEDs ON.
are ON but intermittent Intermittent RESP on Radio board and/or intermittent Wireless
RESP LED LED on Detector, then the host radio board is seeing activity,
but the detector is (out of range), or positioned too far away
from the host radio board antenna to communicate effectively,
or there is RF blockage.
PWR, BEACON, RESP, and Detector Wireless LED Yellow, Battery LEDs ON.
READY are ON Detector Host can communicate with the detector and the detector is
Wireless LED Yellow, Battery registered and active. This could be caused by a weak signal
LED's ON between detector and host PC. Check the operator UIF for
exposure inhibits or related error messages.
UWB PC radio board LEDs Detector Wireless LED = Green, Detector Status LED = Green,
(PWR, BEACON, RESP, Battery LEDs = Green
READY, DATA) ON Host SW Successful Exposure, Readings Available - Host can
'hear' a detector and successfully exchanges keys, detector
'device' is in 'Configured' state. Exposure Successful (no
errors). This is the perfect condition.
8.5.1.7 Detector Icons

The table below defines various detector Icons. A single Icon will appear on the Operator UIF.
Icon Description
Active Wireless Detector ready for exposure.

Battery charge level 100% - 51%. - 2 green bars
Active Wireless Detector ready for exposure.

Battery charge level 50% - 26%. - 1 green bar
* Active Wireless Detector ready for exposure.

Battery charge level 25% - 1%. (actually 25% - 11%) – 1 yellow bar
* The Icons indicate the battery is too low to power the detector in Wireless
operation. The Icon indicates 0% charge (actually 11%) and the warning
indicator will toggle on/off.
The Icon is a WARNING of possible lost communication between the host PC

and detector.
No Primary Detector selected by the user.

Active GbEthernet (Docked = Fixed Rad) Detector
Any time a detector is tethered it becomes the active detector by default. See
8.5.1.2 Communication Methods on page 273.
Active / Primary Detector in Sleep mode (Wireless Only), or in bin on mobile.
System is in a Cassette exam.
* Remember 10% is really 0% for the customer. By design, 10% is the minimum remaining battery
capacity in order to prevent the battery from entering sleep mode.

8.5.1.8 Detector Registration and Management

The following section describes the registration and management features and functions.
• Detector Registration feature will display the detector(s) that have been registered on the
system.
• The Detector System List indicates the system(s) on which the detector can be utilized.
• Detector Sleep Time is a function that allows the operator to program the amount of time a
detector is in the energy savings mode (Sleep Time).
• The Operator Manual for the system should include these screens and describe the functions.
1. Navigate to the screen below and click on Wireless Detector. See Figure 8-27.
Figure 8-27
2. The screen for Wireless Detector will appear. Click on Detector Registration: Edit. See Figure
8-28 .
Figure 8-28

3. The Detector Registration screen will appear. See Figure 8-29.
Figure 8-29
4. Detector Registration is the initial process performed with a tether to recognize the detector in
relation to the system. Add and Edit functions require a tether be connected between the host
PC and the detector. Remove and Identify functions will work without a tether connection.
See Figure 8-30.
Figure 8-30
5. Clicking on the detector Icon shown on the operator UIF will enable the Detector Management
feature and the screen will appear. This screen displays the details of the detector(s) that have
been set up for use with the system. Only one detector can be Active at any time.

6. Click the Identify button. Observe the detector Status LED blinking for 15 seconds. See
Figure 8-31.
Detector Status LED – Should be

blinking RED for 15 sec
Figure 8-31
8.5.1.9 Detector Sensors

The detector design includes sensors that combined with software provide warnings to the operator
for certain conditions. There are diagnostics that can be run to check these conditions. If these
diagnostics report a FAILED status, replace the detector. DO NOT ATTEMPT A REPAIR.
• Voltages internal to the detector are monitored for conformance to lower spec limit (LSL) and
upper spec limit (USL). Voltage failure conditions are reported to the operator UIF. The event
is recorded. Depending on severity, exposure may be inhibited, and a request for detector
service will be posted.
• Temperature sensors are positioned in the detector to monitor panel temperature (for image
quality) and surface temperature (for patient safety). Defective sensor detection is employed
and the detector enters error-handling process once a new bad sensor is detected. A
temperature sensor is also integrated into the battery.
• Shock sensors monitor G-forces to detect any physical event that may have happened. There
is a 3-axis accelerometer inside the detector, which is used to monitor the amount of shock
received by the detector. There are two warning levels that can be reported to the operator
based on acceleration, levels 3 and 5. Level 3 indicates a shock of 200+ G's in magnitude,
and level 5 is between 100 to 200 G's. If the event(s) have been severe, the detector may not
be reliable and degraded image quality could be the result.
• Grid sensors detect the placement and removal of the grid on the front of the detector. Two
polarized magnets on the grid are used to accomplish this monitoring. Placement of a grid on
the rear of the detector will create a FAULT. The detector will monitor the presence of a grid

and send the system a grid status change message when the grid is attached to or removed
from the detector. If the grid is attached on the wrong side of the detector, the detector sends
a level 3 warning message.
8.5.1.10 Detector Boot Routine

The operator UIF will display the code and description of these processes during a Normal start of
the host to detector communication. The code #’s are different, but the routine is the same for
Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet (Docked) communication.
• Code # - Digital Cassette Detector Boot In Process
• Code # - Digital Cassette Detector Calibration Data Upload In Process
• Code # - Digital Cassette Detector Boot Completed
• Code # - Digital Cassette Detector Calibration Data Upload Completed
8.5.1.11 Detector Sense in a Charging Bin vs Table or Wall Stand
Figure 8-32
The detector/system has the ability to know when a detector is in a mobile bin or in the fixed-room
dock. This is accomplished by sensing the resistance between the connector pins, shown in the
yellow circle, in Figure 8-32 above. This figure is shown in the diagnostics section, also.
• In mobile bin, these two pins shall be open where the resistance shall be no less than 1M ohm.
(>1M ohm)
• While in fixed room dock including both table and wall-stand, the two pins shall be shorted and
the resistance shall be no more than 1 ohm. (< 1 ohm)
This connector is replaceable, a (FRU).
8.5.1.12 Warning Levels

• Level 3: Indicating a critical event is detected. This warning indicates the performance of
the detector may be downgraded or detector surface temperature is approaching
safety limitation. The system shall inhibit the use of the detector with by-pass
function and direct the operator to stop using the detector except emergency use.
• Level 5: This warning is indicating a serious event was detected. The system shall warn
the operator of preparing for further action.

8.5.1.13 Service User Interface (SUIF)
PNA
PAA
SSB
Nav 1 Nav 2 Nav 3 Nav 4 Nav 5 Nav 6 Nav X
SNA SAA
SSB
Nav 1 Nav 2 Nav 3 Nav 4 Nav 5 Nav 6 Nav X
Folder Instructions
Subfolder
Feature Feature Name
More Info
Purpose Statement Detailed
Instructions
Pre-requisites
User Controls Results
SSB

8.5.1.14 Detector Block Diagram
Figure 8-33
8.5.1.15 Host PC Connectivity

Assure all Ethernet cables are connected to the correct locations on the Host PC. Reference the
system wiring diagram, observe cable marking, and host PC connector marking.
8.5.2 Failure Modes
8.5.2.1 Communication Failures

An error message, error code, and Warning Icon will appear on the operator UIF when
communication between the host and detector is lost or fails to be established during detector boot.
Communications failures can occur at anytime whenever there is a failure to establish or maintain
the handshake between the host PC and the detector.

8.5.2.2 Environmental and Physical Failures
8.5.2.2.1 Temperature
A detector motherboard problem or internal power issue can raise panel or surface temperature
resulting in a warning posted to the operator UIF. Increased panel temperature may contribute to
image artifacts and may inhibit exposures. Extreme surface temperature is a risk to patient safety.
The battery may contribute to a temperature problem. Temperature sensors in the detector and
battery can also fail.
8.5.2.2.2 Voltage
The Switching Regulator Board (SRB) could develop a problem, which could cause a
communication failure or a temperature issue. The Power Supply Board could also become
defective and fail to provide the required voltages.
8.5.2.2.3 Sensors (shock and grid)

If the detector was dropped or somehow physically damaged, the detector may cause degraded
image quality. Shock sensors can fail.
If the grid was placed on the backside of the detector, the detector will not image. The polarized
magnets, which detect the grid placement, could be missing from the grid.
8.5.2.2.4 Detector Panel Defects or Damage

If the detector panel becomes damaged, internal problems may develop which could contribute to
degraded system performance or poor image quality.
8.5.2.3 Battery and Charging Failures

Battery failure and low battery can be a cause of communication or system operation failure.
Charging bin connector/circuitry can fail. Docking connections and circuitry can fail or cause
degraded system performance. Battery charger failure or poor operation can occur resulting in an
undercharged or poorly calibrated battery.
8.5.2.4 Detector – System Firmware/Software Compatibility

Customers that acquire additional systems and multiple detectors may experience inhibits when
sharing detectors across these systems. The cause could be related to different detector firmware
versions or detector – system FW/SW incompatibility.
8.5.3 Detector Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

The following detector diagnostics and troubleshooting information is provided to assist the root
cause of issues associated to the system and detector. Specific diagnostics descriptions, pre-
requisites, and instructions are described. Pre-requisites include certain conditions. An example is
BIST Passes, or PING Passes. Verify these conditions are True, and use this information to isolate
root cause.
Diagnostics report individual test results, overall PASS or FAIL, or the status regarding expected
results of the test performed. Suggested follow up actions, based on the results of the diagnostics,
are provided in flow diagrams and supporting statements.

When a site has multiple systems, multiple detectors, multiple tethers, or just multiple
communication methods (Wireless, Tether, or GbEthernet), troubleshooting alternatives become
available. Some suggestions are the following:
• Try swapping between communication methods (Wireless, Tether, and GbEthernet) to root
cause
• If a detector is suspect, try moving it to a different system to root cause
• Swap detectors and retest on the same system and mode of operation
• Swap tether cables to root cause
• Try different charging methods to root cause
• Swap batteries to root cause
• Swap grids to root cause
Observe the LED indicators on the detector, battery, and host radio board during operation, during
diagnostic testing, and during troubleshooting. Typical LED information is shown in
8.5.1.4 Detector LEDs and Indicators on page 274. Compare observations and diagnostic results
to the expected NORMAL operation.
Verify the detector is within normal application distance of the host radio board during Wireless
operation. A Lost Communication message will appear if the detector is too far from the host radio
board/antenna. A RED detector Wireless LED will usually precede a message.
Identify the source of RF signal blockage or interference that may degrade the Wireless signal
(from host PC to detector or from detector to host PC).
Always review symptoms, error logs, intermittent failures, or unusual performance details with the
operator. This is “investigative troubleshooting”.
When troubleshooting a problem in a fixed RAD room that has a docking unit in the table or a wall
stand, check the docking unit LEDs. Run diagnostics on both docking systems and communication
paths and compare results.
Docking System LEDs
Figure 8-34 Table Tray LEDs Wall Stand LEDs
The left LED is the detector-in status. If it displays “Green”, that means the detector was
recognized by the system as being inserted into the table tray, or into the wall stand. If it displays

“Red”, this means the detector was not recognized by the system as being inserted. Troubleshoot
the respective table tray or wall stand sensors and switches.
The right LED is the communication status. After the communication is built successfully, it will
show “Green”. If communication build fails, it will show “RED.”
Query the operator to localize a communication or docking functional problem. Try the detector in
the table tray. Move the detector to the wall stand. Compare results and troubleshoot the path that
fails. Include everything between the host PC and the detector (PC ports, cables, connectors, table
tray and wall stand switches, docking receptacle and detector docking contacts).
8.5.3.1 SUIF Diagnostic Tool Set
8.5.3.1.1 Diagnostics for Communication Failures

There are several possible causes for communication failure between the system and detector.
Communication failures can happen in any communication method, and during any processes. Ask
the operator to describe the symptoms and any error that may have been posted.
Some unusual causes of communication failures are listed below:

• An extremely large patient may have blocked the UWB section of the detector preventing
responses back to the host radio board, on the system. This requires investigative
troubleshooting.
• A lead apron may have been left hanging on the mobile column in a position that blocks the
host radio board/antenna. This could cause transmit/receive problems. This requires
investigative troubleshooting.
• A lead apron may have been positioned on the patient, but too close to the UWB section of the
detector, and preventing responses back to the host radio board/antenna on the system. This
requires investigative troubleshooting.
• Other causes of communication failure can be loss of power from a source, external electronic
noise, RF signal blockage, or issues with interface boxes or cabinets, poor cable connections,
contaminated connectors and receptacle contacts or pins, intermittent UWB operation, and
internal detector issues.
• A detector/system that fails to communicate in one method may communicate
successfully in another method. This will allow continued, but limited use, until the root
cause can be repaired.
Wireless Communication Diagnostic (Wireless Operation Only)

This test will report the status of the host PC software to “call out” to the detector and will indicate
confirmation of the expected response back from the detector. The test also reports real time signal
conditions.
Channel 13 is displayed in Figure 8-35, representing the USA Zone default channel for this type of
wireless operation. The system will incrementally seek the next channel, Channel 14, if a conflict is
detected. This approach is the same worldwide for the respective zones.
Pre-requisites:
Verify power to detector, verify detector LEDs are Normal for Wireless Operation, verify Wireless
detector Icon is appearing on the operator UIF, verify the detector used in this test is shown as
“Active” on the Detector Management screen.

Instructions:
1. Ensure the Detector is turned Off.
2. Press Start.
3. A stand-alone tool will launch (the display below will appear).
Figure 8-35
4. Turn on the Detector when the Host Beacon Status Indicator turns Green.
5. Observe the Received Detector Connect Message, Signal Strength, Link Quality, Detector
Authenticated, and Bandwidth indicators.
6. Click on Close to terminate the screen for the stand-alone tool.
The indicator colors are:

• Green - if reported value is within the Excellent range
• Yellow - if reported value is within the Good range
• Red - if reported value is within the Bad range.
The channel number will be displayed for Host Beacon, Received Detector Connect Message, and
Detector Authenticated indicators.

Start
Wireless Communication
Diagnostic Status
Detector SIGNAL LINK

BEACON AUTHENTICATION BANDWIDTH
CONNECT is STRENGTH QUALITY
Is RED - Host is RED - Application is out of range
RED - Host PC is LOW Poor
PC sw can’t level comm failed.
SW didn’t
confirm Host PC didn’t
receive a
Beacon “authenticate” a
response to
transmission detector
the Beacon Relocate the detector to optimize signal quality
Use the SUIF

home page to Examine Verify detector is
Examine USB Determine Verify
verify Host PC Detector LEDs, registered and
connector, source of Authentication
Software, check battery active
cable, host electronic Indicator is
Firmware
Radio Board, noise Green
antenna outside the
Verify host PC connections system
Investigate for
Radio Board Verify detector Examine USB
any RF
has correct Firmware connector,
obstruction
Firmware cable, Radio
Check Link Check Board,
Quality and Bandwidth antenna
Verify the Bandwidth and Signal
Try a tether to Repeat Wireless connections
cable between Indicators Strength
establish Comm Diagnostic Indicators
host PC &
comm with the and observe Radio
radio board Check Signal
detector. Board LEDs
cable is good. Check detector Strength and
Wireless LED Link Quality
Indicators
Verify USB Verify the cable
Run BIST and
connector on between host PC &
PING using the
radio board is Radio Board cable
tether
good is good.
Wireless Comm Status for Signal Strength indicates the
detector signal level as seen by the Host. Both Host
Examine and Detector signal strength is important. Consider the
antenna for following possibilities:
damage
Strong Host, Strong Detector = BEST CONDITION
Weak Host, Strong Detector could be a Detector Issue
Strong Host, Weak Detector could be a Host Issue
Weak Host, Weak Detector could be an RF obstruction
or other issue
Figure 8-36
Additional Suggestions:
Test the Host PC ports by running Port to Port diagnostic. Examine the error log for inhibits and
review circumstances with the operator. Signal Strength, Link Quality, and Bandwidth are
interactive elements of wireless communication. The detector handle is also a FRU. It contains
battery/tether connector, wireless antenna, a wireless radio board, SRB, LEDs, detector wakeup
button, etc. If any one of these components fails, the detector handle needs to be replaced.

BIST (Built In Self Test) Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)

This diagnostic tests the detector functions including Flash, SDRam, GbEthernet Digital Loopback,
GbEthernet Analog Loopback, Wireless Loopback, and all communication paths. Any specified test
failure (within BIST) will result in BIST failure. BIST failure usually indicates there is a problem
internal to the detector.
The communication path in use (GbEthernet, Tethered, or Wireless) is checked during system start
up. This is accomplished by an applications version of BIST that runs automatically. BIST will not
run if detector is in Sleep mode.
Pre-requisites:
• PING Passes
• Verify power to detector, verify detector LEDs are Normal for Wireless, Tether, or GbEthernet
operation. Verify the appropriate detector Icon is appearing on the operator UIF. If the test is
being conducted in Wireless operation, verify the detector used in this test is shown as “Active”
on the Detector Management screen.
Instructions:
1. Ensure the detector is placed in the appropriate location for the test and not in a charging bin.
2. Ensure the Detector is powered on.
3. Press the Start button to begin.
4. Press the Cancel button to abort or return to the navigation menu.
Note: In wireless operation, BIST diagnostic will not perform SDIO bus Loopback test. In docked
operation, BIST diagnostic will not perform Digital Loopback and Analog Loopback tests.
Therefore, run BIST in multiple modes of operation to more thoroughly test all communication
functions of the detector.

Start
BIST Pass
Run PING
Fail
Wireless Tethered Ethernet

Operation Operation Operation
Try Ethernet
Try a tether or Try wireless
(docked) or
Ethernet and or tether and
Wireless and
repeat repeat the
repeat
diagnostic diagnostic
diagnostic
Figure 8-37
Try alternate modes of operation and repeat the diagnostic. If BIST continues to fail, in more than
one method of communication, the detector should be replaced.
PING Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)

This diagnostic sends is a simple ping message to the detector to determine if it is reachable across
an IP network. Packets sent and packets received functions are verified. The roundtrip time for
packets to be sent and echoed back is reported. Any % Lost Packets is a PING Failure.
Pre-requisites:
• BIST Passes

Instructions:
1. Ensure the detector is placed in the appropriate location for this test and not in a charging bin.
Wireless PING
Start
Pass
PING
Run Ethernet
Fail Stats
Try an alternate
detector and repeat Transfer Time Too Long
BIST and PING Run Wireless Comm Typical values are 12
Diagnostic to test sec for test execution,
host PC Xmit/Rcv Rate ~ 9000
mSec
Confirm Host PC OS/

FW vs. Det FW
Pass Fail
compatibility. SUIF Wireless
Home page. Comm
Correct as necessary.
Go to Wireless Comm
Diagnostic details.
Figure 8-38

Tethered PING Start
Pass
PING
Run Ethernet
Fail Stats
Mobile
Troubleshoot the Packets Lost
GbEthernet
connectivity for table &
wall stand. Compare Try
results. GbEthernet
Operation
Troubleshoot the
If PING fails on two or
tether, connectors,
more comm paths, Fail Pass
Repeat and TIB if used,
replace the detector
PING power source,
interconnect cable
in mobile
________________________________________________________________________

Start
GbEthernet PING
Run
Pass
PING Ethernet
Stats
Fail
Repeat PING
Run
Fail Pass on all
Port to Port
GbEthernet
Diag
devices
Repair/Replace
Host PC
If PING fails on only one
Observe the docking path... (table or wall Fail PING
unit LEDs stand), troubleshoot the Results Pass
failing path
Examine docking
connector and detector
contacts for damage or
contamination. Clean If PING fails on two
contacts GbEthernet paths (table
and wall stand, the
detector is highly suspect.
Troubleshoot the
GbEthernet connector
at host PC and cables
to the docking unit.
Repair or replace if
needed.
Figure 8-39
Ethernet Stats Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)

This diagnostic tests the detector communication under load conditions similar to the image
acquisition mode. “Dark” images (no X-ray required) are sent to the host PC and any re-transmit of
data that is required is recorded with results displayed to the user. Hardware involved is associated
with communication path elements of the system and modules within the detector.
Pre-requisites:
• BIST and Ping Passes

Instructions:
Start
Wireless Operation
Ethernet STATS Pass

Diagnostic
If all tests Pass, run

Fail QAP
ARC Failure, Digital

Test Pattern Failure, or
Dark Image Test
Failure
Try Tether or
GbEthernet operation
Fail Repeat Ethernet Pass

Stats Diagnostic
If the diagnostic fails on two
Run Wireless Comm
or more comm paths, the
Diagnostic
detector is highly suspect.
Try an alternate detector or

move the suspect detector to
another system and repeat
diagnostic
Figure 8-40

Start
Tether Operation
Ethernet STATS Pass

Diagnostic
Fail If all tests Pass,

run QAP
Perform continuity test on the

Tether. Examine connectors
for damage, Check connection
to TIB if used.
No Yes
Tether OK?
Try a alternate detector

Replace the or move suspect detector
tether to another system and
repeat diagnostic
Figure 8-41
GbEthernet Operation Start
Ethernet Pass
STATS
Diagnostic
If all diagnostics
Pass, run QAP
Fail
Run Port to Port

Diagnostic
Fail Pass
Port to Port
Results
Troubleshoot the failing
Replace PC
GbEthernet communication
path
If the diagnostic fails on two

or more comm paths, the Examine the detector
detector is highly suspect. contacts for damage or
contamination. Clean
contacts
Try an alternate detector or
move the suspect detector to
Examine the connector pins
another system and repeat
on the docking unit which
diagnostic
has the failure. Clean
contacts
Troubleshoot the GbEthernet

connectivity between docking
unit and host PC. Repair or
replace as needed.
Figure 8-42

8.5.3.1.2 Diagnostic for Temperature Issues

Detector temperature warning messages are reported to the operator UIF when panel or surface
temperatures exceed the USL. The panel USL is 40 degrees C and the surface USL is 41 degrees
C. If the USL is exceeded, the detector will go into “Sleep Mode”.
Temperature Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)

This diagnostic tests the ability of the temperature sensors to monitor panel and surface
temperatures and the battery temperature accurately. This diagnostic reports the USL and the LSL
for both the detector surface and for the panel temperatures. It also provides a PASS or FAIL result
for the diagnostic tests.
Pre-requisites:
• BIST and PING tests pass
• If the test is being conducted in Wireless Operation, verify the detector used in this test is
shown as “Active” on the Detector Management screen.
Instructions:
Start
Fail Temperature Pass

Diagnostic
If the detector has been

in an unusually hot
ambient, allow time for
the detector to cool and
repeat the diagnostic
Pass
Temp Diag
Fail
Continue to
use detector
If the diagnostic
reports panel or
surface temp >
USL, replace the
detector.
Figure 8-43

8.5.3.1.3 Diagnostics for Voltage Issues

Detector voltages critical to proper operation are monitored. Warning messages are posted to the
operator UIF when the values are outside the LSL and USL.
PS Full Load Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)

This diagnostic reports details of voltages under full load operation, the same as during imaging.
Pre-requisites:
• BIST Passes, run PS Partial Load first.
• If the test is being conducted in Wireless operation, verify the detector used in this test is
Instructions:
Start
Fail PS Full Load Pass

Diagnostic
Reload detector FW.

Repeat diagnostic
Pass
Results
Fail
Replace detector Detector is OK
Figure 8-44

Partial Load Diagnostic (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)

This diagnostic reports the details of the voltages inside the detector in idle operation (waiting for
exam command). It is best to run Partial Load, then Full Load.
Pre-requisites:
• BIST Passes
• If the test is being conducted in Wireless operation, verify the detector used in this test is shown
as “Active” on the Detector Management screen.
Instructions:
1. Ensure the detector is placed in the appropriate location, not in a charging bin.
Start
Fail PS Partial Load Pass

Diagnostic
Run PS Full Load

Detector OK
Diagnostic
Figure 8-45
PS Unloaded Diagnostic (Tethered Only)

This test enables the unloaded source power supply to isolate potential tether/connector failures.
Tether power sources can be a Detector Power Module (DPM) on mobile or Tether Interface Box
(TIB) power supply in a fixed RAD system.
Pre-requisites:
• Review error log and discuss any tether operation failures with the operator.

Instructions:
1. Ensure the Tether is connected to the appropriate port connection.
2. Ensure the Tether is not connected to the Detector.
4. Use a DVM to measure the detector side & tether power pins and verify proper voltages.
- Pin 11 (+12V) and Pin 12 (12V Return)
- Pin 13 (+12V) and Pin 14 (12V Return)
5. Enter DVM Values into provided fields.
6. Press the Complete Button after the values have been entered.
Start
Measure the voltage at the
Detector side of the Tether
No Is the Yes
Voltage within
spec?
Tether and PS
Measure the voltage at the OK
System side of the Tether
No Is the Yes
Voltage within
spec?
Investigate Tether
Disconnect the Tether and
connection quality, clean /
measure the output of the PS
replace contacts as needed
Is the Reconnect system side of
Yes
Voltage within Tether, investigate Tether
spec? conductor integrity by
Start verifying voltage measuring voltage while
No levels at each junction flexing the Tether. There
from the PS output to should be no fluctuation in
the Tether to isolate voltage, replace as
Troubleshoot PS the failure necessary.
Figure 8-46

See detector side and system side tether connector pinouts below:
Figure 8-47 Tether Connector - Detector Side
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
+12V -12V Return +12V -12V Return Tether spare spare Power
Sense Return
19 20 21 22 23 24 GND
MD2P MD2N MD1P MD1N Detector Detector Chassis
(GbEthernet) (GbEthernet) (GbEthernet) GbEthernet Present Present Ground
Figure 8-48 Tether Connector - System Side
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-12V MD1P MD1N +12V +12V MD2P MD2N -12V Detector
Return (GbEthernet) (GbEthernet) (GbEthernet) (GbEthernet) Return Presence
Detection *
* (Pins shorted internal to Detector)
PS Unloaded (Docked)
This procedure will verify the unloaded source power supply. The intent of this diagnostic is to
address a voltage level fault that is reported when the system does not recognize the detector that
is docked.

There is a power supply located in the bottom of the table and in the wall stand. This power supply
provides the 12VDC to the detector when it is used in a docking station. The power supply locations
are shown in Figure 8-49 below.
In mobile systems the power supply is located underneath the touchscreen monitor. It is the same
power supply as in the other systems, but it does not have the protective casing mounted to it.
Power Supply 12VDC Output

green LED Indicator
Table Location Wall Stand Location
Mobile Location
Figure 8-49

Failure modes:
• Detector can't be powered on in docking mode, but it works on tether mode
• Detector battery can't be charged in docking mode, but it works normal with charger
• Detector LED info displays incorrectly
.
Pre-requisites:
• DVM available
• Refer to docking connector illustration in Section 8.5.1.11 Detector Sense in a Charging Bin vs
Table or Wall Stand.
Instructions:
1. Power off the system, remove the TBL/WS cover
2. Disconnect the docking connector cable, power on system, measure the detector power
supply output voltage to see if it is within spec or not. If not, replace power supply directly. If
yes, continue with the steps below.
3. Log in SUIF==>Diagnostics==>Table/WS docked mode.
4. Ensure the Docking Connector is connected to the appropriate port connection.
5. Ensure the Docking Connector is not connected to the Detector.
6. For Table docking diagnostics, remove Table top/ION chamber and related housing, make
sure table docking connector could be accessible.
7. For WS docking diagnostics, remove all the detector housing covers, barriers and ION
chamber to ensure the Docking Connector is accessible for voltage measurement.
9. Measure the voltage on the detector side docking connector power pins.
10. Enter DVM values into provided fields.
11. Press the Complete Button after the values have been entered.

Power Source Start

Troubleshooting
No PS Unloaded (Docked) Yes

Voltages within Spec?
Power Source OK
Power off the system Problem is most likely in
and verify continuity the detector. Run BIST
from the docking
connector to the
power source.
Yes
Continuity
OK?
Measure
No Voltages
Troubleshoot connections at
docking unit and power
source. Clean docking unit
Yes
contacts and inspect for
Voltage OK
damage. Replace if
damaged. Replace cabling if
it is damaged.
No
Replace Power
Source
Figure 8-50
8.5.3.1.4 Diagnostics for Shock and Grid Sensor Reported Issues

The Shock Sensor Diagnostic can help determine the condition of a detector that may have been
damaged.
The Grid Sensor Diagnostic is used to verify the ability of the detector to sense grid placement on
the front or back of the detector. DO NOT attempt to replace or re-attach the grid magnets.
Shock Sensor Diagnostic (Tether Only)

Pre-requisites:
• BIST and PING PASS
• Test can only be conducted in Tethered operation. Verify the detector used in this test is
shown as “Active” on the Detector Management screen. Note: Perform the test shaking the
detector with low intensity. Repeat the test and shake the detector with much greater intensity.
Observe the reported sensor values after each test and compare.
Instructions: CAUTION!
Use extreme care. These are to be controlled events. Failure to follow directions explicitly can
result in permanent damage to the detector.

1. Start the Diagnostic.

2. Grasp the detector by a handle and an opposite corner.
3. Hold the detector about 1 inch above the floor.
4. Hands on each side of the detector.
5. Detector vertical to the floor.
6. Drop the detector so that 1 corner hits before the other corner.
7. Do not let the detector fall over.
8. Drop using gravity only.
9. Gently place the detector flat on a table.
10. Wait 10 seconds after detector has been motionless.
11. Press the Complete Button.
12. Failure to wait 10 seconds will result in a Failure in X, Y, and Z axis.
- All 3 axis will report (0) zero.
- Perform diagnostic again.
Start
Shock Sensor Pass

Diagnostic
Fail Sensors OK
Sensor values are LOW Sensor values are High
Repeat test More vigorously Repeat test Less vigorously
Always Low or
Always High Always changing
Sensor Values
Reported
The detector may be

Sensors are
damaged and should
working properly
be replaced
Figure 8-51

Grid Sensor Diagnostics (Wireless, Tethered, or GbEthernet)

There is a coin type of magnet built inside the frame of the grid. The detector detects the grid
presence signal with a magnetic sensor. When the grid is attached on the wrong side of the
detector, the magnetic sensor detects the magnet with reversed polarization.
This test reports the ability of the detector to:
- Sense install and removal on front of detector (as shown in Figure 8-52 below)
- Sense install on the back of detector, which is INCORRECT for imaging
Figure 8-52
Pre-requisites:
• BIST and PING PASS
• If the test is being conducted in Wireless operation, verify the detector used in this test is
Instructions:
1. Ensure the Grid is not attached to the Detector.
2. Start the Diagnostic.
3. Attach the grid to the front of the detector.
4. Remove and reattach the grid to the back of the detector.
5. Press the Complete button.

Start
Fail Grid Sensor Pass

Diagnostic
Grid Sense OK
Confirm the grid has two magnets, a
magnet should be present in the upper right
and left corner of the grid, where the grid
attaches to the detector handle.
If either magnet is missing, the system will

not be capable of detecting grid placement
or removal. The grid must be replaced.
Figure 8-53
8.5.3.1.5 Diagnostics for Battery and Charging Failures

Battery charging problems can happen due to issues with the bin contacts, charger system on the
mobile, and internal charging circuitry of the detector. These diagnostics will help root cause
charging issues.
Battery Health Diagnostic (Wireless or GbEthernet Only)

This reports the % of full charge capacity over the design capacity of the battery. Failure is <25%
of design capacity. This diagnostic will help determine battery calibration is or is NOT performed
by the operator.
Pre-requisites:
• BIST and PING Pass
• For Wireless mode, verify the detector used in this test is shown as “Active” on the Detector
Management screen.

Instructions:
1. Ensure the detector is not in a charging bin.
Start
Fail Battery Health Pass

Diagnostic
Result is < 25% of The result
design capacity life. shows >25%
design capacity
life, but, the
Replace the low battery battery may
with a freshly charged, need to be
and calibrated battery. calibrated (Deep
Try to calibrate the low Cycle Charge)
battery, test it, and
replace if it fails to
calibrate. (Red LED on
Charger)
Review the battery
charging process with the
operator. Train the
operator on the battery
calibration (DEEP CYCLE)
procedure

Charging errors may be reported with the detector docked in the table or wall stand. The system
will post a message and display a warning to direct the operator to clean up the connectors. The
connector monitoring is performed each time when the detector is docked. The docking connector
voltage test is used to check the connector electrical resistance. The connector contacting
resistance may increase due to surface contamination, damage, or wear.
Pre-requisites:
• BIST and PING Pass

Instructions:
1. Ensure the detector is Docked in Table (or Wall Stand).
Start
Fail Pass
Docking Connector
Voltage Diagnostic
Examine the detector

and docking connector
for damage and debris. Docking
Clean all contact points connector OK
Repeat Fail
Diag
Verify power supply output voltage is
correct. Replace the docking PS if
Pass
defective.
Docking connector OK
Power off the system and verify
continuity between docking connector
and power supply.
Replace the docking connector on the

detector if necessary.
Figure 8-54


Chapter 9 Replacement procedures
THE POTENTIAL FOR INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRICAL AND

HAZARDS MECHANICAL HAZARDS IS HIGH. CAREFULLY READ AND FOLLOW
EXIST INSTRUCTIONS. ALWAYS LOTO THE SYSTEM BEFORE ATTEMPTING
SERVICE OF ANY KIND, AS DESCRIBED IN Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin.
Section 9.1 Cover management

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): Depends on cover

• Security Torx screw bit = 5427920
• None

Item: Cover
Quantity: Depends on cover
9.1.0.2.4 Safety
• None

None
Chapter 9 Replacement procedures Page 313

9.1.1 Side cover removal

1. Loosen the 5 fasteners on the side cover(s) to be removed. See Figure 9-1.
2. Remove the side cover(s).
Figure 9-1 Side cover screws (left side shown)
9.1.2 Top cover removal

1. Remove the side covers. See Section 9.1.1 Side cover removal.
2. Remove the 3 capscrews from each side of the top cover. See Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Top cover screws
Page 314 Section 9.1 Cover management

3. Lift the top cover and disconnect the 3 cables. See Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-3 Top cover cables
4. Remove the top cover.

9.1.3 Front cover removal
9.1.3.1 Right front cover removal

1. Remove the right side cover. See Section 9.1.1 Side cover removal.
2. See Figure 9-4. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the bottom cable exit cover
(Item 2).
Item Description
1 Mounting screws (2 used)
2 Bottom cable exit cover
Figure 9-4 Bottom cable exit cover

3. Remove 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the side of the cover. See Figure 9-5.
Item Description
1 Rear mounting screws (2 used)
2 Front mounting screw (1 used)
3 Right front cover
Figure 9-5 Right front cover
4. Remove 1 mounting screw (Item 2) at the front of the cover.

5. Slide the cover sideways to remove.

9.1.3.2 Left front cover removal

1. Remove the left side cover. See Section 9.1.1 Side cover removal.
2. Remove the 3 mounting screws (Item 1) from the breaker tray (Item 2). See Figure 9-6.
Item Description
2 Breaker tray
Figure 9-6 Breaker tray
3. Remove the breaker tray.

4. Remove 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the side of the cover. See Figure 9-7.
Item Description
1 Rear mounting screws (2 used)
2 Front mounting screw (1 used)
3 Left front cover
Figure 9-7 Right front cover
5. Remove 1 mounting screw (Item 2) at the front of the cover.

6. Slide the cover (Item 3) sideways to remove.

9.1.4 Front bin removal

1. Remove the side covers. See Section 9.1.1 Side cover removal.
2. Remove the 3 capscrews on each side of the top cover, but do not disconnect any cables.
Leave the top cover in place. See Section 9.1.2 Top cover removal.
3. Remove the 3 capscrews (Item 1) on each side of the front bin (Item 2). See Figure 9-8.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Front bin
Figure 9-8 Front bin

4. See Figure 9-9. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the top cable exit cover (Item 2),
then remove the cover.
State: RELEASE - Document is released and under formal Change Control. Changes are subject to the ECR/ECO Process.
See the GEHC Myworkshop System to determine the status of this document.
Approved Document - 5555017DDW_r4.pdf Page 2 of 2
1 2
Item Description
2 Top cable exit cover
Figure 9-9 Cable exit covers
5. Slightly lift the rear of the top cover to clear the lip on the front bin.
6. Remove the front bin.
9.1.5 Rear bin removal

1. Remove the side covers. See Section 9.1.1 Side cover removal on page 314.
2. See Figure 9-10. For Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade,
disconnect the 2 cables (Items 1 and 2) at the right-side bottom of the rear bin (Item 3).

3
1
Item Description
1 Cable Assy - Detector Park Switch to Bulkhead
2 Cable Assy - Detector Charge to Bulkhead
3 Rear bin
Figure 9-10 Optima XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade rear bin cables
3. See Figure 9-11. Remove the 2 side mounting screws (Item 1) on each side of the rear bin.
Item Description
1 Rear bin side mounting screws
Figure 9-11 Rear bin side mounting screws

4. See Figure 9-12. Disconnect the exposure switch cable (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Exposure switch connector
2 Rear bin top mounting screws (3 used)
Figure 9-12 Rear bin top mounting screws
HEAVY WEIGHT
The rear bin is heavy. Support the bin when removing the screws and lifting the bin off of the
chassis.
5. Remove the three mounting screws (Item 2) at the top of the rear bin.
6. Remove the rear bin.

9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal

1. Remove the left side cover and left front cover. See Section 9.1.3 Front cover removal.
2. Rotate the tube column to access one of the mounting screws (Item 1), then remove the
mounting screw. See Figure 9-13.
Item Description
1 Mounting screw
2 Column skirt cover
Figure 9-13 Column skirt cover
3. Rotate the tube column to access and remove the other mounting screw.
4. Remove the column skirt covers (Item 2).

9.1.7 Tube head cover removal

1. If the lower tube cover needs to be removed, the collimator must be removed first. See Section
9.6.9 Collimator.
2. See Figure 9-14. Remove the 4 mounting screws (Item 1) from the bottom of the lower tube
cover (Item 2). The collimator can be rotated to provide access to the screws.
Item Description
1 Safety Torx screws (4 used)
2 Lower tube cover
3 Upper tube cover
4 Wireless USB Host Radio Board
5 X-ray tube
Figure 9-14 Tube covers
3. Remove the upper tube cover (Item 3).

4. Unplug the USB cable from the Wireless USB Host Radio Board (Item 4) - Optima XR220amx
or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only.
5. Remove the lower tube cover (Item 2).

Section 9.2 Cable replacement

9.2.1 General cable replacement

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): Depends on cable

• Anti-static (ESD) kit
• Cable ties

Item: Cable
Quantity: Depends on cable
9.2.1.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove covers to access the desired cable. See Section 9.1 Cover management.
• Perform LOTO on the system. See 1.2.2 Performing LOTO on page 26.
9.2.1.3 Procedure

LOTO must be performed. The mobile system is a battery-powered unit that can deliver lethal
current. Ensure you are not providing an earth ground path when practicing ESD procedures. See
Section 1.3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) on page 30.
1. Mark the location of all cable restraints on the old cable.

2. Cut or remove the cable restraints from the old cable.
3. Disconnect and remove the old cable.
4. Transfer the locations of the cable restraint marks from the old cable to the new cable.
5. Install and connect the new cable.
6. Install the cable restraints on the new cable.
7. Remove LOTO from the system. See 1.2.3 Returning system to service on page 29.
8. Install the covers.
Page 326 Section 9.2 Cable replacement

See Table 9-1 to determine required tests.
Table 9-1 Test matrix for cable replacement
Cable being replaced Tests that must be performed

Aux Box to Rotor Cable Assembly Functional Checks:
(See 9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement on • X-ray (see X-ray on page 37)
page 331 for the correct cable bundle
arrangement for the HV cable clamp)
Aux Box to Rotor Jumper Cable Functional Checks:
• X-ray (see X-ray on page 37)
Col Bulkhead to DAP Cable Assembly Functional Checks:
(See 9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement on • X-ray - Dose report (see X-ray on page 37)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Hornet HHS Checks:
• Generator operator indicators (see 7.1.6 Testing generator
operator indicators on page 139)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Locust Functional Checks:
• Drive (see Drive on page 36)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Djinn Functional Checks:
Cable Assy- Spyder to LVLE2 Functional Checks:
• Charging (see Charging on page 36)
• Light field buttons (see Collimator on page 35)
Cable Assy- Spyder to Firefly Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Spyder to Wired Handswitch Functional Checks:
Cable Assy- LVLE2 to Firefly Functional Checks:
(there are 2 separate cables) • Charging (see Charging on page 36)
Cable Assy- Locust to LVLE2 Functional Checks:
Cable Assy- LVLE2 to Djinn Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - LVLE2 to DPM-PC Functional Checks:
• X-ray (see X-ray on page 37), ensure images are created
Cable Assy- Locust to Caterpillar Functional Checks:
(there are 2 separate cables) • Drive (see Drive on page 36)


Cable Assy - Locust to Drive Handle Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Locust to Cricket Functional Checks:
• Drive - see Drive on page 36
Cable Assy - Hornet to Display HHS Checks:
Cable Assy - Mantis to Firefly Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Cricket to Firefly Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Cricket to Djinn Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Cricket to Breaker Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Locust to Park Latch Functional Checks:
• Drive (speed limited when tube not latched) (see Drive on
page 36)
Cable Assy - Caterpillar to Bumper Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Caterpillar to Rot Brake Functional Checks:
• Drive (brake solenoids) (see Drive on page 36)
• Tube column & arm (locks & latches) (see Tube column and arm
on page 36)
Cable Assy - Hornet to Inverter HHS Checks:
Cable Assy - Hornet to Overlay Board HHS Checks:
Cable Assy - Drive Login to Overlay Board Functional Checks:
• Drive (drive login) (see Drive on page 36)
Cable Assy - Firefly to Power Switch Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Firefly to CLS J1 Functional Checks:
Cable Assy - Firefly to CLS HHS Checks:
• Light field intensity (see 7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity on
page 124)
Cable Assy - Mantis to Filter Functional Checks:


Cable Assy - Fuse to Filter HHS Checks:
• Grounding (see 7.2.1 Performing ground resistance testing on
page 139)
• Leakage (see 7.2.2 Performing leakage current testing on
page 149)
Cable Assy - Locust to Hard Brake Release Functional Checks:
• Drive (brake solenoids) (see Drive on page 36)
Cable Assy - DPS to PC-Backup Tether Functional Checks:
• X-ray (see X-ray on page 37), ensure images are created
Cable Assy - Locust to Thorax Column Functional Checks:
Bulkhead • Tube column & arm (locks & latches) (see Tube column and arm
(See 9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement on on page 36)
Cable Asm - Detector Power Supply to None
Detector charge cable (surge-limit cable
assembly)
Cable Asm - Surge-limit cable assembly to None
Detector charge bin connector
Cable Assy - Spyder to Speaker Functional Checks:
• X-ray (sounds & tones) (see X-ray on page 37)
Cable Assy - Sypder to Thorax Column Functional Checks:
Bulkhead -DAP- • X-ray (dose report) (see X-ray on page 37)
Cable Assy - CLS to Thorax Column Bulkhead HHS Checks:
-Collimator- • Light field intensity (see 7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity on
page 124)
Cable Assy - Spyder to Board Data Module None
Cable Assy- Spyder to PC video cable None
Cable Assy - Spyder to PC USB None
Cable Assy - PC to Ethernet Bulkhead None
Cable Assy - PC to USB Bulkhead None
Cable Assy - PC to UWB Antenna None
(See 9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement on
Cable Assy - Caterpillar interconnect harness Functional Checks:
to Detector Park Switch pigtail • Drive (speed limited in tethered mode (see Drive on page 36)
Cable Assy - Detector Park Switch pigtail to Functional Checks:
Caterpillar interconnect harness • Drive (speed limited in tethered mode (see Drive on page 36)
Cable Assy - Detector Bin Charge connector Functional Checks:
to interconnect cable from Surge Assembly • Drive (speed limited in tethered mode (see Drive on page 36)


Cable Assy - Spyder Dose Reporting to USB None
Bulkhead
Handswitch Cable - N9 Color Functional Checks:

9.2.2 High voltage cable replacement

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• Cable ties

Item: HV cable(s)
Quantity: 1 or 2
9.2.2.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and the front covers. See 9.1.3 Front cover removal.
• Remove the front bin. See 9.1.4 Front bin removal.

9.2.2.3 Procedure
1. On the existing cable(s) to be replaced, mark the cable(s) at the position of each cable clamp
and cable tie.
2. Remove the HV cable clamp mounting screws. See Figure 9-15.
Item Description
3. Remove the clamp from the HV cable bundle. See Figure 9-16.
4. See Figure 9-17. Loosen the set screw(s) (see Figure 9-18) in the HV cable tightening ring(s)
at the Djinn HV tank. Loosen and remove the tightening ring(s) and pull the cable(s) out of the
tank.

Item Description
1 Anode HV cable (not visible)
2 Cathode HV cable
3 Ferrite (one on each HV cable)
Figure 9-17 Djinn tank - HV cables
Item Description
1 HV cable tightening ring set screw
Figure 9-18 Djinn tank - tightening ring set screw

5. See Figure 9-19. Remove the cable clamps (Item 1) from the side of the horizontal arm (Item
3) and vertical column (Item 4) and cut the cable ties (Item 2) from the cable(s) to be replaced.
3
2 1
2
4
Item Description
1 Cable clamps
2 Cable ties
3 Horizontal arm
4 Vertical column
Figure 9-19 Cable clamps and ties
6. Use a HV spanner wrench to loosen and remove the HV cable tightening ring(s) at the X-ray
tube. Pull the cable(s) out of the tube.
7. Lay the old cable down next to the new cable and transfer the cable clamp and cable tie
position marks over to the new cable. If both cables are being replaced, be sure to pair up
anode cables and cathode cables.
8. Remove the ferrites (see Figure 9-17, Item 3) from the old HV cables and install them in the
same locations on the new HV cables.
Note: Some of the original systems had HV cables that are approximately 250mm (10 inches) shorter
than the replacement HV cables. Distribute the additional cable length as follows (see Figure 9-20):
• Add 75mm (3 inches) in Loop 1 (Item 1) between the two plastic cable clamps on the
horizontal arm (Item 3) and vertical column (Item 4)
• Add 175mm (7 inches) in Loop 2 (Item 2) between the plastic clamp on the vertical column
(Item 4) and the clamp near the Djinn HV tank (Item 5)

Item Description
1 Loop 1 - Add 75mm (3 inches)
2 Loop 2 - Add 175mm (7 inches)
3 Cable clamp on the horizontal arm
4 Cable clamp on the vertical column
5 Cable clamp near Djinn HV Tank
Figure 9-20 HV cables
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone grease (GE P/N 46-125224P3 or equivalent) before
insertion into the X-ray tube HV wells.
9. Insert the new cable(s) into the X-ray tube HV well(s). Make sure that the cable marking (Tube
Anode or Tube Cathode) matches up with the X-ray tube marking (Anode or Cathode).
Route the cable(s) along the vertical column and horizontal arm, installing cable clamps and
cable ties at the marked positions.
If the new HV cables are longer than the old cables, be sure to distribute the extra length as
shown in Figure 9-20.

10. At the rear of the X-ray tube, route the cables and apply cable ties as shown in Figure 9-21,
Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23.
C
A
3
1
Item Description
1 Cathode high voltage cable
2 Wireless detector cable(digital systems only)
3 Collimator cable
4 DAP cable(standard on Optima XR220amx, optional on Optima XR200amx)
Figure 9-21 Cable identification at Anode side of X-ray tube

2 1
Item Description
1 Anode high voltage cable
2 Stator cable
Figure 9-22 Cable identification at Cathode side of X-ray tube
Anode Side Cathode Side

Figure 9-23 Cable routing at rear of X-ray tube
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733) before insertion into the tank HV
wells. See Figure 9-24.

Figure 9-24 Lubricate HV cables
11. Insert the new cable(s) into the Djinn HV tank well(s). Make sure that the cable marking (Djinn
Anode or Djinn Cathode) matches up with the HV tank marking (Anode or Cathode). See
Figure 9-17. Tighten the HV cable tightening ring(s), then tighten the set screw(s) in the ring(s)
(see Figure 9-18).
12. Arrange the cable bundle as shown in Figure 9-25, use a cable tie to maintain cable positions.
clamp.
C
1 2
4 3
Item Description

17. Install the system covers.
Perform the following HHS checks:
• mAs accuracy - see 7.1.4.3 Testing mAs accuracy on page 132

9.2.3 "Super cable" 5557068 cable replacement

Some early production units were shipped with cable assembly 5557068 (see Figure 9-26). This
cable assembly consisted of a bundle of the following individual cables:
• Locust to LVLE2
• Locust to Caterpillar
• Locust to Park Latch
The original cable (5557068) is not available as a replacement part and must be replaced with the
individual cables as identified above.
State: RELEASE - Document is released and under formal Change Control. Changes are subject to the ECR/ECO Process.
See the GEHC Myworkshop System to determine the status of this document.
Approved Document - 5557068ADW_r3.pdf Page 2 of 2
Figure 9-26 "Super cable" 5550768

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• Cable ties


Item: Cable assemblies (need all three cables to replace ’Super cable’ 5557068):
- Locust to LVLE2
- Locust to Caterpillar
- Locust to Park Latch
Quantity: 1 each
9.2.3.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers, top cover and the rear bin. See 9.1.5 Rear bin removal on page 321.
9.2.3.3 Procedure

See Section 9.2.1 General cable replacement on page 326 for generic cable replacement steps.
1. Remove the 7 fasteners (4 nuts, 3 capscrews) and heat shield from the right side of the unit.
See Figure 9-27.
Figure 9-27 Heat shield

2. Remove the existing ’super cable’.

3. Install the three replacement cables (Locust to LVLE2, Locust to Caterpillar, Locust to Park
Latch).
4. Install cable ties on the new cables.
5. Install the heat shield.
Perform the following tests:
• Cable Assy - Locust to LVLE2 - see Table 9-1
• Cable Assy - Locust to Caterpillar - see Table 9-1
• Cable Assy - Locust to Park Latch - see Table 9-1
Section 9.3 Software Load From Cold

See Chapter 3 System data and software on page 43.
Page 342 Section 9.3 Software Load From Cold

Section 9.4 Base assembly

9.4.1 Drive wheel

Required persons: 1 or 2
Timing (min): 30

• 3 - 2 x 4 inch wood blocks (or equivalent)
• 1 - 3 ft.to 4 ft. (1.0 to 1.2 m) wood lever (or equivalent)
(Lever to be construction grade or better with no splits, bowing, and free from knots)
• None

Item: Drive wheel
Quantity: 1
9.4.1.2.4 Safety
• PPE - Gloves
• PPE - Kneeling pad
TIPPING HAZARD
TIPPING THE POTENTIAL FOR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH EXISTS. ENSURE WORK AREA IS FREE
AND CLEAR OF ANY PERSONS OR OBJECTS WITHIN A 3 METER RANGE OF THE SYSTEM.

• Remove the side cover for the wheel that requires replacement. See 9.1.1 Side cover removal.
• Remove the front cover for the wheel that requires replacement. See 9.1.3 Front cover
removal.
• Tube arm must be in the latched position.

TIPPING HAZARD
Tipping FAILURE TO LATCH THE TUBE ARM WILL RESULT IN A CHANGE OF THE CENTER OF
GRAVITY OF THE SYSTEM. THIS CAN RESULT IN UNCONTROLLED LIFT AND TIPPING OF
THE SYSTEM.
9.4.1.3 Procedure
1. A fulcrum and lever will be used to create a controlled lift of the system. See Figure 9-28 for
the dimensional representation.
Figure 9-28 Lever and fulcrum locations
Page 344 Section 9.4 Base assembly

Note: For system stability, the position of the support block is important. The support point must
be close to the wheel to be replaced. See Figure 9-29.
Support
Block
Position
Drive Wheel
Replacement
Figure 9-29 Drive wheel lift and support
The following steps are a generic representation of how to lift the system. Ensure the fulcrum, lever
and support blocks are positioned correctly for the wheel being replaced.
2. Prepare the two 2 x 4 inch blocks. Secure them together using tape or screws. (Screws have
been used in these examples.)

3. Position single 2 x 4 inch block approximately 4 inches from the vertical face of the battery box.
Place lever approximately 2 inches under battery box, perpendicular to the vertical face of the
battery box. Ensure the lever is fully supported on the fulcrum. See Figure 9-30.
Figure 9-30 Lift and support unit
4. While applying downward pressure onto the end of the lever (see Figure 9-31 - left), position
the two 2 x 4 support blocks under the other corner of the battery box (see Figure 9-31 - right).
Note: This example uses a one person standing position. This is simpler if two people are available.
5. Place aside the lever and fulcrum as needed for the remaining steps.

6. Remove the 8 mounting screws (Item 1) from the drive wheel (Item 2). See Figure 9-32.
Item 1
Item 2
Figure 9-32 Drive wheel and mounting screws
7. Remove the drive wheel from the shaft.

8. Slide the new drive wheel onto the shaft.
9. Install the mounting screws, finger-tight only. Make several passes, slightly tightening the
screws in an alternating pattern until all the screws are fully seated. Torque to 3 N-m (2.2 lb-ft).
10. Lift the unit and remove the support blocks.
None
9.4.2 Battery packs

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None


Item: Battery pack
Quantity: 1 to 4 as required
9.4.2.2.4 Safety
• Weight of an individual battery is approximately 22.7 kg (50 lbs).

• Remove the side covers. See 9.1.1 Side cover removal.

9.4.2.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-33. Remove the battery compartment covers (Item 1) from both sides (4 screws
on each cover).
Item Description
1 Battery compartment cover (left side shown)
Figure 9-33 Battery compartment covers

2. See Figure 9-34. On the Cricket battery board, loosen the connector screws on the J1/J2 (left
side) and the J3/J4 power connectors (Item 1 - right side), then unplug the cables.
Item Description
2 Battery sensing connectors (J13, J14)
Figure 9-34 Battery connectors (right side shown)
3. On the Cricket battery board, unplug the cables from the sensing connectors J11/J12 (left
side) and J13/J14 (Item 2 - right side).
4. On each side, remove the top battery and then the bottom battery from the battery
compartment.
5. Install the new batteries in the battery compartment.
6. Route the power and sensing cables through the cutouts in the chassis and plug them into the
Cricket battery board (the upper battery cables go to the upper connectors on the Cricket
battery board). Tighten down the connector screws for J1, J2, J3, J4 connectors.
7. Install the battery compartment covers. The tabs in the covers are intended to hold the
batteries in the proper location and should be positioned towards the front of the unit. If the
covers will not fit correctly, reposition the batteries to provide proper clearance.
If the cover holes do not line up properly, rotate the cover 180 degrees (it is upside down).

1. Perform the following functional checks:
- Charging - see Charging on page 36
- Buss voltage level - The system batteries shall produce an open circuit voltage of
156VDC +/-5V when fully charged and less than 1 year old. Measure battery voltage on
the Cricket Battery Board, at test points TP7 and TP6. See Figure 9-35.
Item Description
1 Cricket battery board
2 Chassis ground test point - TP6
3 Battery voltage test point - TP7
Figure 9-35 Battery voltage measurement
2. Install the front covers.

3. Install the side covers.

9.4.3 Front bumper assembly or bumper switch

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Front bumper assembly
Quantity: 1
or
Item: Front bumper switch
Quantity: 1 or 2
9.4.3.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and front covers. See 9.1.3 Front cover removal.

9.4.3.3 Procedure
9.4.3.3.1 Front bumper assembly
Figure 9-36 Front bumper assembly
1. See Figure 9-37. Using long-nose pliers, remove the extension springs (Item 1) from the
capscrews on both sides.

4 2
6
Item Description
1 Extension spring
2 Front bumper slot closure
3 Switch
4 Switch arm mounting nut
5 Switch arm
6 Front bumper
7 Adjustment screw
Figure 9-37 Front bumper assembly - top view
2. Remove the front bumper slot closure (Item 2). There are 2 mounting nuts that must be
removed from underneath the chassis.
3. Remove the wires from the switches (Item 3 - both sides).
4. Remove the mounting nuts (Item 4 - both sides) from the switch arms (Item 5 - both sides).
5. Lift the switch arms off of the mounting studs and guide the ends of the switch arms through
the slots in the chassis.
6. Slide the front bumper and attached parts (Item 6) out of the front of the unit.
7. On the new front bumper assembly, remove the mounting nuts (Item 4 - both sides) from the
switch arms (Item 5 - both sides). Lift the switch arms off of the mounting studs.
8. Slide the new front bumper and attached parts (Item 6) in from the front of the unit.

9. Guide the ends of the switch arms (Item 5 - both sides) through the slots in the chassis, then
place the switch arms onto the mounting studs and install the mounting nuts (Item 4 - both
sides).
10. Connect the wires to the switches (Item 3 - both sides). The wires are connected to the
common (COM) and normally open (NO) terminals on the switches.
11. Install the front bumper slot closure (Item 2). There are 2 mounting nuts that must be installed
from underneath the chassis.
12. Using long-nose pliers, install the extension springs (Item 1 - both sides).
13. Adjust the adjustment screw (Item 7) to just remove any side-to-side play of the front bumper
assembly.
14. Install the front covers and side covers.
9.4.3.3.2 Front bumper switch

1. See Figure 9-37. Remove the wires from the switch to be replaced (Item 3 - left and/or right).
2. Remove the mounting nuts (2) from the switch.
3. Replace the old switch with the new switch, install and tighten the mounting nuts.
4. Connect the wires to the switch. The wires are connected to the common (COM) and normally
open (NO) terminals on the switches.
6. Install the front covers and side covers.
Perform the following functional checks:
• Drive (all tests) - see Drive on page 36
9.4.4 Front caster

Required persons: 1 or 2
Timing (min): 30

• 3 - 2 x 4 inch wood blocks (or equivalent)
• 1 - 3 ft. to 4 ft. (1.0 to 1.2 m) wood lever (or equivalent)
(Lever to be construction grade or better with no splits, bowing, and free from knots)
• None

Item: Front caster
Quantity: 1

9.4.4.2.4 Safety
• PPE - Gloves
• PPE - Kneeling pad
TIPPING HAZARD
TIPPING THE POTENTIAL FOR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH EXISTS. ENSURE WORK AREA IS FREE
AND CLEAR OF ANY PERSONS OR OBJECTS WITHIN A 3 METER RANGE OF THE SYSTEM.

• Remove the side cover for the caster that requires replacement. See 9.1.1 Side cover
removal.
• Remove the front cover for the caster that requires replacement. See 9.1.3 Front cover
removal.
• Tube arm must be in the latched position.
TIPPING HAZARD
Tipping FAILURE TO LATCH THE TUBE ARM WILL RESULT IN A CHANGE OF THE CENTER OF
GRAVITY OF THE SYSTEM. THIS CAN RESULT IN UNCONTROLLED LIFT AND TIPPING OF
THE SYSTEM.

9.4.4.3 Procedure
1. A fulcrum and lever will be used to create a controlled lift of the system. See Figure 9-38 for
the dimensional representation.
Figure 9-38 Lever and fulcrum locations

Note: For system stability, the position of the support block is important. The support point must
be close to the caster to be replaced. See Figure 9-39.
Support
Block
Position
Front Caster
Replacement
Figure 9-39 Front caster lift and support
The following steps are a generic representation of how to lift the system. Ensure the fulcrum, lever
and support blocks are positioned correctly for the caster being replaced.
2. Prepare the two 2 x 4 inch blocks. Secure them together using tape or screws. (Screws have
been used in these examples.)

3. Position single 2 x 4 inch block approximately 4 inches from the vertical face of the battery box.
Place lever approximately 2 inches under battery box, perpendicular to the vertical face of the
battery box. Ensure the lever is fully supported on the fulcrum. See Figure 9-40.
4. While applying downward pressure onto the end of the lever (see Figure 9-41 - left), position
the two 2 x 4 support blocks under the other corner of the battery box (see Figure 9-41 - right).
Note: This example uses a one person standing position. This is simpler if two people are available.
5. Place aside the lever and fulcrum as needed for the remaining steps.

6. See Figure 9-42. At the top of the caster (Item 1), remove the 4 mounting nuts from the studs.
Item 1
Figure 9-42 Caster location
7. Slightly tip the caster, and remove it from the unit.

8. Install the new caster onto the studs.
9. Install and tighten the mounting nuts.
None
9.4.5 Spring applied brake (column rotational brake)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45

• Cable ties


Item: Spring applied brake
Quantity: 1
9.4.5.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the left side cover and left front cover. See 9.1.3 Front cover removal.

9.4.5.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-43. Use a 3mm allen wrench to remove the four mounting screws (Item 2) from
the bottom of the column rotation lock assembly (Item 1).
2 2
2 2
Item Description
1 Column rotation lock assembly
3 Nut
Figure 9-43 Column rotation lock assembly (bottom view)
2. Remove the nut (Item 3) from the lock assembly. The assembly should easily come off of the
tapered shaft, but could require gentle prying with a screwdriver to release it.
3. Unplug the lock assembly cable connector and cut any cable ties as required to remove the
cable. The connector is located on top of the base assembly, behind the vertical column.
Rotate the column to a position that allows maximum access to the connector.
4. Remove the old lock assembly from the unit.
5. Route the cable from the new lock assembly up through the access hole in the base and plug
it into the connector. Install new cable ties to replace those removed in Step 3 above. Verify
that the cable routing prevents the column from rubbing against the cable during rotation.
6. Place the lock assembly on the shaft and install the nut (finger-tighten only).
7. Position the lock assembly so that the cable is oriented towards the rear of the unit.
8. Install and tighten the four mounting screws (Item 2) 1/4 turn past snug. No need to over-
tighten.
9. Tighten the nut (Item 3). Torque to 25N-m (18.5lb-ft).
11. Install the front cover and side cover.

• Tube column and arm (locks & latches) - see Tube column and arm on page 36
9.4.6 Rear bin kickplate

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Kickplate
Quantity: 1
9.4.6.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers. See 9.1.1 Side cover removal.

9.4.6.3 Procedure
1. Access the mounting nuts through the openings behind the drive wheels.
2. Remove the mounting nuts (3) from the rear of the kickplate, then remove the kickplate. See
Figure 9-44.
Item Description
1 Mounting nuts (3)
Figure 9-44 Kickplate
3. Install the new kickplate and mounting nuts.

None

9.4.7 Rear bin mounting bracket - Optima XR200amx only

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Rear bin mounting bracket
Quantity: 1
9.4.7.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and the rear bin. See 9.1.5 Rear bin removal.

9.4.7.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-45. Remove the kickplate mounting nuts (Item 2) and kickplate (Item 3).
2. Remove the mounting bracket nuts (Item 4) and mounting bracket (Item 5) from the rear bin
(Item 1).
Item Description
1 Rear bin
2 Rear bin kickplate mounting nuts (3 used)
3 Rear bin kickplate
4 Rear bin mounting bracket mounting nuts (6 used)
5 Rear bin mounting bracket)
Figure 9-45 Rear bin assembly
3. Attach the new mounting bracket to the rear bin. Install and tighten the mounting nuts.
4. Attach the kickplate to the mounting bracket. Install and tighten the mounting nuts.
5. Attach the rear bin assembly to the chassis. Install and tighten the mounting screws.
7. Install the sides covers.
None

9.4.8 Motor brake and motor reducer assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Motor reducer assembly and/or motor brake
Quantity: 1
9.4.8.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the drive wheels. See 9.4.1 Drive wheel.

9.4.8.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 9-46. Disconnect the three cables running from the motor/brake assembly to the
Caterpillar board (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Caterpillar base transition board
2 Steel counterweight
Figure 9-46 Caterpillar board

2. See Figure 9-47. Remove the eight motor mounting screws (Item 3) and the motor/brake
assembly (Items 4 & 6).
3 2
6
1
Item Description
1 Drive wheel mounting screws (8 used)
2 Drive wheel
3 Motor mounting screws (8 used)
4 Motor
5 Brake mounting screws (4 used)
6 Brake
Figure 9-47 Drive assembly (right side shown)
3. Before removing the brake, note the position of the cable exiting the brake so that the brake
can be mounted to the new motor in the same orientation.
4. Remove the brake mounting screws (Item 5) and the brake (Item 6) from the motor (Item 4).
5. Install the brake onto the motor (the brake should be positioned so that the cable comes out
towards the top). Torque to 3 N-m (2.2 lb-ft).
6. Install the motor/brake assembly into the chassis. Install the eight mounting screws and tighten
them in an alternating pattern. Torque to 5 N-m (3.7 lb-ft).
7. Plug the three cables into the Caterpillar board.
The left motor/brake assembly cables plug into connectors J3, J4 and J7.
The right motor/brake assembly cables plug into connectors J5, J6 and J9.
8. Install the drive wheel onto the hub, install the eight mounting screws and tighten them in an
alternating pattern. Torque to 3 N-m (2.2 lb-ft).
10. Install the rear bin.

None
9.4.9 Caterpillar base transition board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 105

• None

Item: Caterpillar base transition circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.4.9.2.4 Safety
• None


9.4.9.3 Procedure

1. Locate the circuit board. See Figure 9-48.
Item Description
1 Caterpillar base transition board
2 Steel counterweight
Figure 9-48 Board identification - lower rear
2. Disconnect all cables (11 connections) from the circuit board.

3. Remove the old circuit board (5 screws).
4. Install the new circuit board.
5. Connect all cables to the circuit board.

Section 9.5 Thorax assembly

9.5.1 Spyder system controller

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Spyder system controller board
Quantity: 1
Note: The Spyder controller board is different in Brivo and Optima system configurations. For Optima
system configurations, you must use the correct Spyder board part number for all replacements.
Currently, the part numbers are: 5350002-2 for Optima systems, 5350002 for Brivo systems.
Failure to use the correct board will result in erratic system behavior and/or system non-
functionality, including non-recoverable Spyder board damage.
9.5.1.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the right side cover. See 9.1.1 Side cover removal.
Page 372 Section 9.5 Thorax assembly

9.5.1.3 Procedure

Item Description
1 Spyder system controller board
2 Locust drive board
Figure 9-49 Board identification - right side
2. Disconnect all cables (9 - 13 connections, depending on configuration) from the circuit board.
7. Install the right side cover.

The system will report a BDM Mismatch error detected with 2 selections:
RESTORE and CANCEL
Make sure you select RESTORE to have the Board Data Module upload the correct contents to the
Spyder board. Failure to do so will result in erratic or failed system functionality. Recovery requires
a complete firmware download and system calibrations.

• X-ray - see X-ray on page 37
9.5.2 Locust drive board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Locust drive circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.5.2.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.2.3 Procedure



RESTORE and CANCEL
Locust board. Failure to do so will result in erratic or failed system functionality. Recovery requires
1. Perform the following calibrations:
- Drive handle - see Drive on page 36
- Drive - see Drive on page 36
- Tube column & arm (locks & latches) - see Tube column and arm on page 36
9.5.3 Locust drive board fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• None

Item: Locust drive board fuses
Quantity: As required
9.5.3.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.3.3 Procedure


2. Locate the bad fuse. See Figure 9-50.
Item Description
F12 Right motor fuse: 8A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
F13 Left motor fuse: 8A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
F15 Locks fuse: 8A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
Figure 9-50 Locust board fuses
3. Remove the old fuse.

4. Install the new fuse.

• Drive (brake solenoids) - see Drive on page 36

• Tube column & arm (locks & latches) - see Tube column and arm on page 36
9.5.4 Firefly charger board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Firefly charger circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.5.4.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the left side cover. See 9.1.1 Side cover removal.

9.5.4.3 Procedure

Item Description
1 Firefly charger board
Figure 9-51 Board identification - left side
2. Remove the Firefly board safety shield.

3. Disconnect all cables from the circuit board.
4. Remove the old circuit board.
7. Install the Firefly board safety shield.

9. Install the left side cover.
RESTORE and CANCEL
Firefly board. Failure to do so will result in erratic or failed system functionality. Recovery requires

• Charging - see Charging on page 36
9.5.5 Firefly board fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• None

Item: Firefly board fuses
9.5.5.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.5.3 Procedure


2. Remove the Firefly safety shield.
Item Description
F5 Power-in for Mantis (from batteries): 15A, time delay, 300vdc, 600vac
F6 Power-in for collimator lamp power supply (from batteries): 3.15A, time
delay, 5x20mm, 250V, 1.5kA interrupt, ceramic
Figure 9-52 Firefly board fuses
4. Remove the old fuse.

5. Install the new fuse.
6. Install Firefly board safety shield.

9.5.6 Cricket battery board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Cable ties

Item: Cricket battery circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.5.6.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.6.3 Procedure

Item Description
1 Cricket battery board
Figure 9-53 Board identification - front
2. Disconnect all cables from the circuit board. Some of these connectors pass through the
plastic safety shield and must be removed before the safety shield can be removed. For the
smaller connectors, use a screwdriver to press on the release latch on the side of the
connector body.
3. Remove the mounting screws (two on each side) for the plastic safety shield.
Note: Remove the cable ties from the bottom of the safety shield only if necessary.
4. Remove the old circuit board (4 standoffs).
6. Install the plastic safety shield and cable/cable ties.
9. Install the front cover.

9.5.7 Cricket board fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• Cable ties

Item: Cricket board fuses
9.5.7.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.7.3 Procedure


2. Disconnect the cables from the front and top of the circuit board. These connectors pass
through the plastic safety shield and must be removed before the safety shield can be
removed. For the smaller connectors, use a screwdriver to press on the release latch on the
side of the connector body.

3. Remove the mounting screws (two on each side) from the plastic safety shield.
Note: Remove the cable ties from the bottom of the safety shield only if necessary.
Item Description
F1 Charge fuse
F2 Drive fuse 1
F3 Drive fuse 2
Figure 9-54 Cricket board fuses
5. Remove the old fuse and replace it with the new fuse.
6. Install the plastic safety shield and cable/cable ties.
7. Connect the cables to the circuit board.

9.5.8 Hornet UIF board

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45

• Cable ties

Item: Hornet UIF circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.5.8.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and the top cover. See 9.1.2 Top cover removal.

9.5.8.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 9-55. On the rear of the top cover, locate the Hornet circuit board which is under
a metal cover (Item 4).
1 2 3 4
Item Description
1 Drive login board assembly
2 Display inverter
3 Ferrite core
4 Hornet UIF board metal cover
5 Cable clamp
Figure 9-55 Board identification - top cover
2. Disconnect two cables from the top of the Hornet board.

3. Disconnect one cable from the right side of the Hornet board.
4. On the left side of the Hornet board, unplug the other end of the cable from the display inverter
board (Item 2).

5. Remove cables ties from the ferrite core (Item 3) and remove the core from the cable.
6. Remove the 12 mounting nuts and the metal cover (Item 4).
7. Disconnect the remaining cable from the bottom of the Hornet board.
8. Remove the old Hornet board (4 screws).
10. Connect the cable to the bottom of the Hornet board.
11. Transfer the cable from the left side of the old Hornet board to the new board.
12. Route the left-side cable through the metal cover, then install the cover and mounting nuts.
13. Connect all remaining cables to the circuit board.
14. Connect the left-side cable to the display inverter board.
15. Re-install the ferrite core onto the cable and secure with cable ties.
17. Install the top cover and side covers.
- Touchscreen - see Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration on page 99
2. Perform the following HHS checks:
- Generator Operator Indicators - see 7.1.6 Testing generator operator indicators on
page 139
9.5.9 Drive login active board collector

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Drive login active board collector
Quantity: 1
9.5.9.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.9.3 Procedure

1. Locate the drive login board assembly. See Figure 9-56.

2. Remove the drive login board assembly (6 screws) from the top cover.
3. Remove the drive login board from the assembly (9 screws). See Figure 9-56.
Item Description
1 Drive login board assembly
Figure 9-56 Drive login board assembly
4. Disconnect the cable from the circuit board.

5. Connect the cable to the new circuit board.
6. Install the new circuit board on the assembly.
7. Install the assembly on the top cover.
9. Install the top cover.
• Drive (drive login) - see Drive on page 36

9.5.10 Top cover or display & inverter collector

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• Cable ties

Item: Top cover or display & inverter collector
Quantity: 1
9.5.10.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.10.3 Procedure

For top cover replacement, perform LOTO, remove appropriate cable connections, install new
cover, and perform finalization steps.
If replacing just the display & inverter, follow the steps listed below.
1. See Figure 9-57. On the rear of the top cover, locate the Hornet circuit board which is under
a metal cover (Item 4).
6
1
2 3 4
Item Description
1 Display assembly mounting screws (7 screws: 3 on left, 4 on right)
2 Display inverter
3 Ferrite core
4 Hornet UIF board metal cover
5 Cable clamp location (cable clamp not shown)
6 Board mounting plate screws (6 screws: 3 on each side)
7 Hornet to Overlay board cable
Figure 9-57 Board identification - top cover

2. Disconnect two cables from the top of the Hornet board.

3. Remove the cable clamp (Item 5) from the large cable.
4. Disconnect the cable from the right side of the Hornet board.
5. On the left side of the Hornet board, unplug the other end of the cable from the display inverter
board (Item 2). Remove cable ties from the ferrite core (Item 3) and remove the core from the
cable.
6. Remove the 12 mounting nuts and tip the Hornet board metal cover (Item 4) to gain access to
the remaining cable. Disconnect the cable from the left side of the Hornet board. Route the
cable connector through the cover and remove the cover.
7. Disconnect the cable from the bottom of the Hornet board.
8. Remove the Hornet board (4 screws).
9. Disconnect the cable from the Overlay board (Item 7)
10. Remove the 4 small cables from the top and bottom of the Display inverter board (Item 2). Note
the colors of the cable wires (blue on the left, pink on the right).
11. Remove the 6 screws (3 on each side) and the board mounting plate. See Figure 9-58. Note
the locations of cable restraints and ground wires so that they can be properly placed upon re-
assembly.
Item Description
1 Board mounting plate
Figure 9-58 Board mounting plate
12. Remove the 7 display assembly mounting screws (Figure 9-57, Item 1) from the left and right
sides.
13. Remove the old display assembly and replace it with the new display assembly.
14. Install the 7 display assembly mounting screws.
15. Route the cable with 2 ferrite cores through the opening in the board mounting plate. Make
sure both ferrites are outside of the mounting plate before fastening it down.
16. Install the board mounting plate and 6 mounting screws.
- Be sure to attach all ground wires and cable clamps in the proper locations.
- Be careful not to trap any cables or wires underneath the plate.

17. Position the closest ferrite core into the opening in the board mounting plate. See Figure 9-59.
Item Description
1 Position one ferrite core in opening
Figure 9-59 Ferrite cores
18. Reconnect the 4 small cables to the Display inverter board (blue = left, pink = right).
19. Reconnect the cable to the Overlay board (Figure 9-57, Item 7).
20. Install the Hornet board (4 screws).
21. Connect the cable to the bottom of the Hornet board.
22. Route the left-side cable through the metal cover, plug it into the Hornet board, then install the
metal cover and mounting nuts.
23. Connect all remaining cables to the Hornet board.
24. Connect the other end of the left-side cable to the display inverter board. Re-install the ferrite
core onto the cable and secure with cable ties.
25. Re-install the cable clamp on the large cable.
27. Install the top cover and side covers.
1. Perform the following calibration:
- Touchscreen - see Section 5.2 Touchscreen calibration on page 99
- Generator operator indicators - see 7.1.6 Testing generator operator indicators on
page 139

9.5.11 Board data module

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Board data module circuit board
Quantity: 1
9.5.11.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.11.3 Procedure


1. Disconnect the cable (1 connection) from the circuit board. See Figure 9-60.
Item Description
1 Board data module
2 Spyder controller circuit board
Figure 9-60 Board identification - right side

4. Connect the cable to the circuit board.
RESTORE and CANCEL
Make sure you select CANCEL to have the Spyder upload the correct contents to the Board Data
Module. Failure to do so will result in erratic or failed system functionality. Recovery requires a
complete firmware download and system calibrations.
9.5.12 System PC

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30


• ESD kit
• External optical drive
• None

Item: System PC
Quantity: 1
9.5.12.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.12.3 Procedure
1. Perform LOTO on the system.
2. Locate the detector power supply assembly. See Figure 9-61.
3. Remove the two nuts at both ends of the mounting bracket.
4. Locate the System PC. See Figure 9-61.
Item Description
1 System PC
2 Detector power supply assembly (Optima XR220amx
or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade only)
3 LVLE2 (Low Voltage Low Energy) power supply
Figure 9-61 Assembly identification - under top cover
5. Disconnect all cables (up to 10 connections, depending on configuration) from the PC.
6. Remove the remaining two mounting nuts from the sides of the PC.
7. Lift the detector power supply assembly, then remove the old PC.
8. Place the new PC in position over the mounting studs.
9. Place the detector power supply assembly back in position and install all four mounting nuts.
10. Connect all cables to the PC.
12. Remove LOTO from the system.
2. Perform a load from cold. See Section 3.2 Performing Load From Cold (LFC) on page 44.
3. Configure the system.
4. Restore backup files.
- Drive - see Table 2-2 Functional checks on page 36

REVISION 9 - X-ray - see Table 2-2 Functional checks on page 36 DIRECTION 5336120-1EN
- Display - see Table 2-2 Functional checks on page 36
- Networking - See Operator Manual for details of networking configuration and testing
- kV accuracy - see 7.1.4.2 Testing kVp accuracy on page 130
- mAs Accuracy - see 7.1.4.3 Testing mAs accuracy on page 132
- Reproducability - see 7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and linearity of exposure on
page 135
- Linearity - see 7.1.4.4 Testing reproducibility and linearity of exposure on page 135
- Generator operator indicators - see 7.1.6 Testing generator operator indicators on
page 139
9.5.13 Wireless USB host radio board

Applies to Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade systems only.

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 15

• Security TORX bit
• None

Item: Wireless USB host radio board
Quantity: 1
9.5.13.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the X-ray tube top cover. See 9.1.7 Tube head cover removal.

9.5.13.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-62. At the rear of the lower cover (Item 2), remove the two mounting screws (Item
1).
1
3
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Lower tube cover
3 Wireless USB host radio board
4 X-ray tube
Figure 9-62 Wireless USB host radio board
2. Remove the Wireless USB Host Radio Board assembly from the lower cover.
3. Unplug the USB cable from the circuit board (Item 3).
4. Remove the 4 nuts and replace the old circuit board with the new circuit board. Install and
tighten the nuts.
5. Plug the USB cable into the circuit board.
6. Install the assembly into the lower cover.
7. Install the tube upper cover
None
9.5.14 Whip antenna


Required persons: 1

Timing (min): 15

• None

Item: Whip antenna
Quantity: 1
9.5.14.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.14.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-63. Unscrew the whip antenna from the chassis-mounted connector.
Item Description
1 Whip antenna
Figure 9-63 Whip antenna
2. Install the new whip antenna.


None
9.5.15 Digital detector


Required persons: 1
Timing (hr): 8

• None

Item: Digital detector
Quantity: 1
9.5.15.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
9.5.15.3 Procedure
1. Check the detector battery charge level and recharge if needed.
2. Download detector firmware. See Section 3.5 Detector firmware download.
3. Perform detector registration. See the Optima XR220amx Operator Manual, Set
Preferences=>System=>Wireless Detector=>Detector Registration. Leave the tether
connected after completing registration.
1. With the tether still connected, create an exam, perform an X-ray exposure and confirm that
an image is created.
2. Disconnect the tether from the detector and the system. Install the battery in the detector.
3. Create an exam, perform an X-ray exposure and confirm that an image is created.
4. Remove the detector battery and replace it with the tether. Connect the other end of the tether
to the system.
5. With the tether still connected, perform detector calibration. See Section 5.4 Detector
calibration on page 101.

6. With the tether still connected, perform QAP. Refer to the Installation Manual, Chapter 6 -
Detector checks and QAP.
9.5.16 Detector bin park switch


Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Detector bin park switch
Quantity: 1
9.5.16.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.16.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-64. Remove the 3 mounting screws (Item1) and access cover (Item 2) from the

bottom of the rear bin (Item 3).
Item Description
2 Access cover
3 Rear bin
Figure 9-64 Rear bin (bottom view)
2. See Figure 9-64. Remove the two wires from the park switch (Item 1).
3
3
1
2
Item Description
1 Detector park switch
2 Detector charge connector assembly
3 Shock absorber (2 used)
3. Use a screwdriver to depress the mounting tabs (Item 2) on the side of the switch (Item 1)
while gently pushing on the switch body. Alternate from one side of the switch to the other until
the switch can be removed from inside the rear bin.

2 2
Item Description
2 Mounting tabs
4. Install the new switch by placing it in the recess and pushing downward until it snaps into place.
5. Connect the two wires to the COM (common) and NC (normally closed) terminals of the switch.
6. Install the access cover.
8. Install the sides covers
• Drive (speed limited in tethered mode) - see Table 2-2 Functional checks on page 36
9.5.17 Detector charge cable assembly


Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None


Item: Detector charge cable assembly
Quantity: 1
9.5.17.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.17.3 Procedure
Item Description
2 Access cover
3 Rear bin
2. See Figure 9-68. Loosen the four mounting screws (Item 1). Do not attempt to remove the
screws as they are captive-style.

1 1
1 1
2
Item Description
2 Bracket tab
Figure 9-68 Detector charge connector assembly
3. The connector assembly is centered with two alignment pins. To remove the connector
assembly, grab the bracket tab (Item 2) and pull straight back. It may be necessary to slightly
rock the assembly until it releases from the alignment pins.
4. Install the new connector assembly onto the alignment pins and tighten the mounting screws.
1. Restore system to normal operation.
2. Insert an un-tethered detector into the bin (with detector battery installed).
3. Verify that when the detector is in the storage bin, the battery LED in the detector handle is lit
and blinking.
9.5.18 Detector bin shock absorber


Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30


• None

Item: Detector bin shock absorber(s)
Quantity: 1 or 2
9.5.18.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.18.3 Procedure
Item Description
2 Access cover
3 Rear bin
2. See Figure 9-70. Loosen the locknut(s).

Note: A 17mm 1/2" drive deep-well socket works best.
3. Use an Allen wrench to remove the shock absorber(s) (counter-clockwise rotation).

1
1
2
3
Item Description
1 Shock absorber (2 used)
4. Adjust the locknut to the same approximate depth as the original shock absorber.
5. Install the new shock absorber(s).
6. Snug the 17mm locknut 1/4 turn past finger-tight.
Note: A 17mm 1/2" drive deep-well socket works best.
7. From inside the detector bin, fully compress the shock absorber. Adjust the height of the shock
absorber until the top surface of the shock absorber is flush with (or slightly below) the bottom
of the detector bin.
None
9.5.19 Docking connector: detector side


Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• ESD kit

• None

Item: Docking connector (detector side)
Quantity: 1
9.5.19.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
9.5.19.3 Procedure
1. Remove the screws (2) from the docking connector at the bottom of the wireless detector. See
Figure 9-71.
Figure 9-71 Remove detector docking connector
2. Carefully pull the connector from the detector body.

3. Disconnect the cable from the connector. See Figure 9-72.
Figure 9-72 Unplug detector docking connector
4. Connect the cable to the new connector.

5. Attach the new connector to the detector.

2. Verify that when the detector is in the storage bin, the charge LED in the detector handle is lit.
3. Verify that when the detector is in the storage bin, the system recognizes the detector.
- Drive (speed limited in tethered mode) see Table 2-2 Functional checks on page 36
9.5.20 Beetle Djinn set of cables

The ’Beetle Djinn set of cables’ is a kit that consists of all the cables that inter-connect the Djinn
generator hardware assemblies.
The Djinn generator hardware assemblies are defined as:
• Main Auxiliary Module (15kW)
• Optional Auxiliary Module (30kW) - this is a purchased option
• HV Tank
• Power Module (mounted to the HV Tank)
Other control cables that interface the Djinn generator hardware to the rest of the system are not
included in this cable kit.

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs

• Cable ties

Item: Beetle Djinn set of cables
Quantity: 1
9.5.20.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers, front covers and rear bin. See 9.1.3 Front cover removal and
9.1.5 Rear bin removal.

9.5.20.3 Procedure

current.
1. Some cables are accessed/replaced from outside the chassis; some from inside the chassis.
Refer to Table 9-1 for a summary of the cables and the associated generator hardware they
are connected to.
Table 9-1 Beetle Djinn set of cables
Item Description
The cables listed below are accessed from outside the Thorax assembly.The side covers and
front covers must be removed to provide access.
- Shielded cable assy, Main Aux Module (15kW) to Power Module
- Cable, Power Module Filament Board to Main Aux Module (15kW)
The cables listed below are accessed from inside the Thorax assembly.The side covers and rear
bin assembly must be removed to provide access. If present, the Optional Power Module (30kW)
must be unbolted and moved aside to access the connections on the rear of the HV Tank.
- Cable, Power Module Filament Board to HV Tank
- Flat ribbon cable, Power Module Control Board to HV Tank
- Cable, Power Module to HV Tank (very short)
- Cable, Power Module to HV Tank (short)
- Ground cable, Main Aux Module (15kW) to Opt Aux Module (30kW) - UNUSED
- Ground cable, Main Aux Module (15kW) to Power Module - UNUSED
- Ground cable, Power Module to HV Tank - UNUSED
2. Replace each cable individually, one at a time.

3. For each cable:
a. If present, remove cable clamps and/or cut cable ties that are constraining the cable.
b. Disconnect each end of the cable.
c. Remove the cable and set aside (do not mix old cables with new cables).
d. Install the new cable.
4. When all the cables have been replaced, re-install any cable clamps and replace any cable
ties that were previously removed.
- Filament - see 5.3.1 Setting filament drive level on page 100


page 135
9.5.21 Djinn 15kW Auxiliary module

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs

• None

Item: Djinn auxiliary module 15kW
Quantity: 1
9.5.21.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and rear bin. See 9.1.5 Rear bin removal.
• Remove the front covers. See 9.1.3 Front cover removal.

9.5.21.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the aux module 15kW. See Figure 9-73.
1
2
Item Description
1 Aux module 15kW
2 Power module
3 HV Tank
4 Aux module 30kW
Figure 9-73 Djinn generator module locations
2. Locate the aux module 30kW (if present). See Figure 9-73.
The aux module 30kW must be removed before the aux module 15kW can be removed.
3. Disconnect the cable (red/black wires) from the rear of the aux module 15kW.

4. Remove the aux module 30kW (4 screws - see Figure 9-74) and set aside.
5. Disconnect all cables (5 or 6 connections, depending on configuration) from the rear of the
module.
6. Remove the old module (4 screws - 2 on the front, 2 on the back). See Figure 9-74. Due to
space limitations, the module must be removed through the rear of the unit.
3 2 1
Item Description
1 Aux module 30kW mounting screws (3 on front side of panel)
3 Aux module 15kW mounting screws (2 on rear side of panel)
Figure 9-74 Aux module 15kW mounting screws
7. Install the new module.

8. Connect all cables to the module.
9. Install the aux module 30kW in the chassis.
10. Connect the cable (red/black wires) to the rear of the aux module 15kW.
1. The system will report a BDM Mismatch error detected with 2 selections:
RESTORE and CANCEL
Make sure you select RESTORE to have the Board Data Module upload the correct contents
to the Djinn generator. Failure to do so will result in erratic or failed system functionality.
Recovery requires a complete firmware download and system calibrations.


page 135
9.5.22 Djinn power module

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs

• Silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733)

Item: Djinn power module
Quantity: 1
9.5.22.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.22.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the power module / HV tank assembly. See Figure 9-73.

Note that the power module and HV tank are on a mounting bracket that must be removed as
an assembly.
Due to space limitations, the assembly must be removed through the rear of the unit.
2. Disconnect all cables from the front and rear of the power module / HV tank assembly.
(To remove the HV cables, the set screws (Figure 9-18) in the tightening rings must be
loosened.)
3. Remove the power module / HV tank assembly (4 screws). See Figure 9-75.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws for power module / HV tank assembly
Figure 9-75 Power module / HV tank mounting screws
4. Remove the power module from the assembly (16 screws).

5. Disconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank (4 cables).
6. Mount the new power module in the assembly.
7. Reconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank.

8. Install the assembly in the chassis.
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733) before insertion into the HV tank
cable wells. See Figure 9-76.
9. Connect all cables to the assembly.

(After installing the HV cables, tighten the set screws in the HV cable tightening rings.)
RESTORE and CANCEL
page 135
9.5.23 Djinn HV tank

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs


• Silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733)

Item: Djinn HV Tank
Quantity: 1
9.5.23.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.23.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the power module / HV tank assembly. See Figure 9-73.

Note that the power module and HV tank are on a mounting bracket that must be removed as
an assembly.
2. Disconnect all cables from the front and rear of the power module / HV tank assembly.
(To remove the HV cables, the set screws (Figure 9-18) in the tightening rings must be
loosened.)

3. Remove the power module / HV tank assembly (4 screws). See Figure 9-77. Due to space
limitations, the module must be removed from the rear of the unit.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws for power module / HV tank assembly
Figure 9-77 Power module / HV tank mounting screws
4. Remove the HV tank module from the assembly (8 screws).

5. Disconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank (4 cables).
6. Mount the new HV tank module in the assembly.
7. Reconnect the cables between the power module and HV tank.
8. Install the assembly in the chassis.
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone oil (GE P/N LNR8733) before insertion into the HV tank
cable wells. See Figure 9-78.
9. Connect all cables to the assembly.

(After installing the HV cables, tighten the set screws in the HV cable tightening rings.)

RESTORE and CANCEL
page 135
9.5.24 Djinn 30kW auxiliary module

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Djinn auxiliary module
Quantity: 1
9.5.24.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.24.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the module. See Figure 9-73.

2. Disconnect the cable (red/black wires) from the rear of the aux module 15kW.
3. Remove the old module (3 screws). See Figure 9-79.
Item Description
Figure 9-79 Aux module 30kW mounting screws
4. Install the new module.

5. Connect the cable (red/black wires) to the rear of the aux module 15kW.

page 135
9.5.25 Drive handle assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 45

• Cable ties

Item: Drive handle assembly
Quantity: 1
9.5.25.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the top cover. See 9.1.2 Top cover removal.

9.5.25.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 9-80. Disconnect the drive handle cables from the Locust board, J4 - Drive Brake
(Item 2) and J7 - Drive Handle (Item 1).
Item Description
1 J7 - Drive Handle connector
2 J4 - Drive Brake connector
3 Cable ties
Figure 9-80 Drive handle cables
2. Cut the cable ties (Item 3) holding the cables to the chassis.

3. See Figure 9-81. Remove the 12 mounting screws (Item 1) from the drive handle (Item 2).
2
1
Item Description
2 Drive handle
Figure 9-81 Drive handle assembly
4. Remove the old drive handle assembly. Guide the cable connectors through the access
opening in the chassis.
5. Install the new drive handle assembly. Guide the cable connectors through the access opening
in the chassis.
6. Connect the cables to the Locust board, J4 and J7.
7. Install new cable ties to hold the cables in place.
- Drive handle - see 5.6.1 Drive handle calibration on page 104
- Drive - see Drive on page 36

9.5.26 Mantis power supply

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Mantis power supply
Quantity: 1
9.5.26.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.26.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the Mantis power supply. See Figure 9-82.
Item Description
1 Mantis power supply
Figure 9-82 Mantis power supply
2. Disconnect all cables (3 connections) from the power supply.

3. Remove the old power supply (4 nuts).
4. Install the new power supply.
5. Connect all cables to the power supply.

9.5.27 EMI filter

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: EMI filter
Quantity: 1
9.5.27.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.27.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the EMI filter. See Figure 9-83.
Item Description
1 EMI filter
Figure 9-83 EMI filter
2. Record the color and location of the wires (5) connected to the filter.
3. Disconnect the wires from the filter.
4. Remove the old filter (2 nuts/washers).
5. Install the new filter.

6. Connect all wires to the filter. See Figure 9-84.
2
1
Item Description
1 Ground wire (green/yellow)
2 Line wire (brown)
3 Neutral wire (blue)
Figure 9-84 EMI filter wiring
• Grounding - see 7.2.1 Performing ground resistance testing on page 139
• Leakage - see 7.2.2 Performing leakage current testing on page 149

9.5.28 LVLE2

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: LVLE2
Quantity: 1
9.5.28.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.28.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the LVLE2 power supply. See Figure 9-85.
Item Description
1 System PC
2 LVLE2 (Low Voltage Low Energy) power supply
Figure 9-85 Assembly identification - under top cover
2. Disconnect all cables (up to 8 connections, depending on configuration) from the LVLE2.
3. Remove the old LVLE2 (4 nuts).
4. Install the new LVLE2.
5. Connect all cables to the LVLE2.


• Light field buttons - see Collimator on page 35

9.5.29 Power cord reel

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60

• None

Item: Power cord reel
Quantity: 1
9.5.29.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.29.3 Procedure

current.
1. Perform LOTO on the system. See 1.2.2 Performing LOTO on page 26.
2. Locate the power cord reel, ground stud, and AC fuse assembly. See Figure 9-86.
4 1
Item Description
1 Power cord reel
2 Chassis ground stud
3 AC fuse assembly
4 Plastic cable guide
Figure 9-86 Power cord reel location
3. Dismount the AC fuse assembly (2 nuts) from the chassis.

4. Disconnect the cord reel wires from the AC fuse assembly (note the existing connections of
the wires).
5. Disconnect the cord reel ground wire from the ground stud (1 nut).
6. Dismount the plastic cable guide (2 screws).
7. Remove the cord reel (2 nuts).
8. Install the new cord reel.

9. Install the plastic cable guide.
10. Connect the ground wire to the ground stud.
11. Connect the cord reel wires to the AC fuse assembly.
12. If this is a 230VAC system, the cord replacement reel is shipped without a power plug. Perform
the following steps to install a power plug:
a. Remove the existing power plug from the old cord reel. If the power plug is damaged or
missing, obtain an appropriate hospital-grade plug as dictated by local regulations.
b. Connect the power plug to the cord reel wires as shown in Table 9-2 Power plug
connections.
Table 9-2 Power plug connections
Wire color Power plug connection

Brown (hot) Connect to the brass terminal
Blue (neutral) Connect to the silver terminal
Green / yellow (ground) Connect to the green terminal
9.5.30 AC power plug

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: AC power plug
Quantity: 1
9.5.30.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.30.3 Procedure

current.
1. Remove the existing power plug (Figure 9-87) from the power cord.
Figure 9-87 Power plug
2. Install the new power plug as shown in Table 9-3 Power plug connections.
Table 9-3 Power plug connections
Wire color Power plug connection

Brown (line) Connect to the brass terminal
Blue (neutral) Connect to the silver terminal
Green / yellow (ground) Connect to the green terminal

3. Use an ohm-meter to verify the continuity of the power connections as follows:

a. See Figure 9-88. Each power wire will need to be pulled about 1/8" off of the terminal to
allow measurement.
2
1
Item Description
1 EMI filter - ground wire
2 EMI filter - line wire
3 EMI filter - neutral wire
4 Fuses F1 & F2
Figure 9-88 EMI filter
b. Check continuity between the power plug ground pin and the ground terminal (Item 1 -
green/yellow wire) on the EMI filter.
Note: If there is no continuity on the line (brown) wire or the neutral (blue) wire, check fuses F1 and F2
(Item 4).
c. Check continuity between the power plug line pin and the line terminal (Item 2 - brown
wire) on the EMI filter.
d. Check continuity between the power plug neutral pin and the neutral terminal (Item 3 -
blue wire) on the EMI filter.
4. Fully seat the 3 wires on the EMI filter.

9.5.31 AC fuse holder

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 40

• None

Item: AC fuse holder
9.5.31.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.31.3 Procedure

current.
1. See Figure 9-89. Locate the fuse holder assembly (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Fuse holder assembly
2 Mounting screws
Figure 9-89 AC fuse holder assembly
2. Remove the 2 screws (Item 2) and remove the fuse holder assembly from the chassis.

3. See Figure 9-90. Remove the 2 wires from the fuse holder (Item 2) that is being replaced.
3
2 4
Item Description
1 Fuse holder assembly
2 Fuse holders
3 Nut and washer
4 Wires from cord reel MUST connect to these terminals
Figure 9-90 AC fuse holders
4. Remove the nut and washer (Item 3) from the rear of the fuse holder.
5. Remove the old fuse holder and replace with the new fuse holder.
6. Install the washer and nut.

Wires from the cord reel MUST be connected to the center (rear) terminals on the fuse holders.
7. Connect the 2 wires to the fuse holder. The wire coming from the cord reel MUST be connected
to the center (rear) terminal (Item 4) on the fuse holder.
8. Install the fuse holder assembly on the chassis.
9.5.32 AC fuses

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10


• None

Item: AC fuse
Quantity: 1
9.5.32.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.32.3 Procedure

current.

1. Locate the AC fuses. See Figure 9-91
Item Description
F1 AC power fuse
F2 AC power fuse
Figure 9-91 AC fuse locations
2. To remove the fuse cap from the fuse holder, push in the cap and rotate 1/4 turn
counterclockwise.
3. Remove the old fuse from the cap.
4. Install the new fuse in the cap.
5. Install the fuse cap in the fuse holder.
- Charging - see Charging on page 36

9.5.33 Power switch assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• Loctite Super Bonder 416 Gap Filling Inst Adhesive (46-220312P1) or equivalent

Item: Power switch assembly
Quantity: 1
9.5.33.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.33.3 Procedure

1. See Figure 9-92. Disconnect the power switch connector (Item 1).
2. Remove the 3 cable clamps (Item 2) from the power switch wires.
3. Disconnect the drive login cable (Item 6) from the Display Overlay Board (Item 4).
4. Disconnect the overlay board to Hornet board cable (Item 5) from the Display Overlay Board.
5. Remove the mountings screws (Item 3) from the Display Overlay Board.
3 5
6 4
2
2
Item Description
1 Power switch connector
2 Cable clamp (3 used)
4 Overlay board assembly
5 Overlay board to Hornet board cable
6 Drive login cable
Figure 9-92 Top cover components
6. Remove the Display Overlay Board and set aside.

7. See Figure 9-93. Remove the mounting nut (Item 1) from the rear of the power switch (Item 2)
using a pair of side cutters. The nut is secured in place with thread locker.
Item Description
1 Mounting nut
2 Power switch
Figure 9-93 Power switch
8. Remove the old power switch and replace with the new part. Install and secure the mounting
nut using a thread locker.
9. Install the Display Overlay Board and re-connect the cables.
10. Install the cable clamps (3).
11. Connect the power switch connector.
None

9.5.34 Overlay board assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Overlay board assembly
Quantity: 1
9.5.34.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.34.3 Procedure

This procedure has you remove the top cover from the unit.
1. See Figure 9-94. Disconnect the power switch connector (Item 1).
2. Remove the 3 cable clamps (Item 2) from the power switch wires.
3. Disconnect the cables from the Display overlay board (Item 4).
4. Remove the mountings screws (Item 3).

3
4
2
2
2
Item Description
1 Power switch connector
2 Cable clamp (3 used)
4 Overlay board assembly
Figure 9-94 Display overlay board
5. Remove the old display overlay board and replace with the new part.
6. Install the Display Overlay Board mounting screws.
7. Install the cable clamps (3).
8. Connect the cables to the new board.
9. Connect the power switch connector.

9.5.35 Tube park latch assembly, switch or solenoid

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• 3/32" or 1/16" drift pin punch
• Hammer or drift pin clamping device (3" C-clamp)
• None

Item: Tube park latch assembly
Quantity: 1
Item: Tube park latch switch
Quantity: 1
Item: Tube park latch solenoid
Quantity: 1
9.5.35.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.35.3 Procedure

current.
9.5.35.3.1 Tube park latch assembly

1. See Figure 9-95. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Wiring harness connector
2 Mounting screws (4)
3 Tube park latch assembly
Figure 9-95 Tube park latch assembly
2. Remove the 4 mounting bolts (Item 2) from the tube park latch assembly (Item 3).
3. Replace the old assembly with the new assembly.
4. Install and tighten the mounting bolts.
5. Connect the cable harness.

9.5.35.3.2 Tube park latch switch

1. See Figure 9-96. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the switch (Item 2).
1
3
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Switch
3 Spade connectors (3) for switch
Figure 9-96 Tube park latch switch
2. Record the color and location of the wires connected to the switch.
3. Remove the spade connectors (Item 3) from the switch and remove the switch from the
assembly.
4. Connect the spade connectors to the new switch.
5. Install the switch into the assembly and tighten the mounting screws.

9.5.35.3.3 Tube park latch solenoid

1. Remove the park latch assembly (see 9.5.35.3.1 Tube park latch assembly on page 448).
Note: It is recommended that you take the assembly to a sturdy work bench as the procedure
can cause damage to customer surfaces.
2. See Figure 9-97. Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) from the switch (Item 2).
5 2
3
6 1
7
Item Description
1 Switch mounting screws (2)
2 Switch
3 Pin
4 Latch
5 Nut and washer
6 Solenoid and wiring harness
7 Spade connectors (3) for switch
8 Wiring harness connector
Figure 9-97 Tube park latch assembly
3. Remove the spade connectors (Item 6) from the switch.

4. Drive the upper pin (Item 3) out of the park latch assembly until the latch (Item 4) can be
removed. About 6.5 mm (0.25 in.) of the pin will remain in the latch assembly body (see
Figure 9-98, Item 1).

Item Description
1 Latch pin (about 6.5mm [0.25 in] remains inside latch assembly body)
2 Latch assembly body
Figure 9-98 Remove latch pin and latch
5. Remove the latch (Figure 9-97, Item 4).

6. Remove the nut and washer (Figure 9-97, Item 5) from the solenoid (Figure 9-97, Item 6).
7. Record the color and location of the wires connected to the switch (Figure 9-97, Item 7).
8. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (Figure 9-97, Item 8).
9. Remove the solenoid assembly.
10. Connect the new solenoid to the wiring harness connector.
11. Install the solenoid in the assembly, then install the washer and nut.
12. Place the latch in the assembly. Use a small screwdriver to depress the latch spring during
installation. See Figure 9-99. When the latch spring is properly positioned, the free end of the
spring will be vertical (see Figure 9-100).

Item Description
1 Latch spring
2 Screwdriver
Figure 9-99 Depress spring during installation
Figure 9-100 Correct latch spring orientation
13. Hold the latch in position and re-install the pin.

14. Verify that the latch operates under tension.
15. Connect the spade connectors to the switch.

16. Install the switch into the assembly and tighten the mounting screws. Take care to apply even
force, alternating between screws, so as not to crack/damage the switch.
17. Install the park latch assembly onto the system.
1. Perform the following mechanical alignment:
- Check and adjust the mechanical alignment of the park latch assembly and arm yoke for
the arm retracted position for smooth and repeatable operation. See 6.1.2 Tube latch to
arm pin adjustment procedure on page 116.
- Check and adjust the mechanical alignment of the column rotational detent position. See
6.1.3 Column rotational detent procedure on page 119,
- Drive (speed limited when tube not latched) - see Drive on page 36
- Drive (reverse-only when bumper switch is pressed) - see Drive on page 36
9.5.36 Digital power supply assembly


Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Digital power supply assembly
Quantity: 1
9.5.36.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the side covers and top cover. See 9.1.2 Top cover removal.

9.5.36.3 Procedure
1. Perform LOTO on the system.
2. See Figure 9-101. Locate the power supply assembly (Item 1).
3 3
Item Description
1 Detector power supply assembly
2 System PC
3 Cable connectors
Figure 9-101 Detector power supply
3. Disconnect the cables (Item 3) from the assembly.

4. Remove the mounting nuts at both ends of the assembly, then remove the old assembly.
5. Install the new power supply assembly and mounting nuts.
6. Re-connect the cables.
9. Remove LOTO from the system.
1. Restore the system to normal operation.
2. Connect a tethered detector to the system and perform an exposure.
3. Verify that an image is created.
4. Insert an un-tethered detector into the bin (with detector battery installed).
5. Verify that when the detector is in the storage bin, the battery LED in the detector handle is lit
and blinking.

9.5.37 Collimator lamp power supply

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• None

Item: Collimator lamp power supply
Quantity: 1
9.5.37.2.4 Safety
• None

9.5.37.3 Procedure


Item Description
1 Collimator lamp power supply
2 Collimator lamp supply pot R3
Figure 9-102 Board identification - under top cover

7. Install the side cover.
1. Perform the following adjustment:
- Adjust the collimator lamp supply potentiometer R3 so that the voltage at the collimator
lamp is 20.0 - 22.0 VDC.
2. Perform the following HHS tests:
- Light field intensity - see 7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity on page 124
9.5.38 Main circuit breaker and cable assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30


• None

Item: Main circuit breaker and cable assembly
Quantity: 1
9.5.38.2.4 Safety
• None


9.5.38.3 Procedure

current.
1. Locate the battery power connector J5 on the Cricket battery board at the rear of the unit. See
Figure 9-103.
Item Description
1 Battery power connector J5
Figure 9-103 Battery power connector J5
2. Loosen the two mounting screws and remove the plug from J5 (Breaker I/F) connector.

3. Locate the main circuit breaker and the breaker I/F cable plug (J10) on the Firefly charger
board. See Figure 9-104.
Item Description
1 Main circuit breaker
J10 Breaker I/F connector on FireFly charger board
Figure 9-104 Main circuit breaker trip - J10
4. Disconnect the cable at J10 on the Firefly charger board.

5. Remove the main circuit breaker (4 screws) and cable assembly. See Figure 9-105.
Item Description
1 Main circuit breaker
Figure 9-105 Main circuit breaker
6. Install the new circuit breaker.

7. Connect the small cable to J10 on the Firefly charger board.
8. Route the power cable (2 heavy red wires) through the opening in the frame and over to
connector J5 on the Cricket battery board.
9. Plug the connector into J5 and tighten the mounting screws.
11. Install front covers.
2. Verify that the system powers up.

9.5.39 Front bin and inner front bin

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• None

Item: Front bin
Quantity: 1
or
Item: Inner front bin
Quantity: 1
9.5.39.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the front bin. See 9.1.4 Front bin removal.

9.5.39.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-106. Remove the four mounting screws (Item 1) to separate the front bin (Item
2) from the inner front bin (Item 3).
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Front bin
3 Inner front bin
4 Wipes hold down support
5 Filler blank
Figure 9-106 Front bin assembly
2. Replace the old part (front bin or inner front bin) with the new part and re-assemble the
components. To prevent stripping out the wipes hold down support (Item 4) and fillter blank
(Item 5) holes, do not over tighten the screws.
3. Install the front bin assembly.
None

Section 9.6 Column, horizontal arm, X-ray tube, collimator

9.6.1 Engaging vertical lock

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 5

• None

Item: None
Quantity: None
9.6.1.2.4 Safety
• The column vertical lock must be engaged before any weight (i.e. horizontal arm, X-ray tube,
collimator) is removed from the vertical carriage.


9.6.1.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-107. Remove the mounting screws (Item 3) and top cover (Item 2) at the top of
the vertical column (Item 3).
Item Description
2 Column top cover
3 Column
Figure 9-107 Column top cover
2. Position the horizontal arm to a convenient working position.

3. Lock the vertical carriage:
a. The vertical lock can engage in multiple positions (approximately 18 cm (7 in.) apart)
throughout the vertical range of travel.
b. See Figure 9-108. At the top of the column, rotate the brass knob (Item 1) 90 degrees
until it lines up with, and slightly drops into, the locking notch (Item 2).
c. Slowly move the horizontal arm up/down until the spring-loaded locking pin clicks into the
locking hole (Item 3) in the side of the scroll (Item 4).
d. Verify that the locking knob is fully seated in the locking notch.
e. Verify that movement of the vertical carriage has now been locked.
Page 464 Section 9.6 Column, horizontal arm, X-ray tube, collimator
Item Description
1 Locking knob (shown in the unlocked position)
2 Locking notch
3 Locking holes (2) in side of scroll
4 Cable scroll
Figure 9-108 Column locking mechanism
4. To release the vertical lock, pull back on the locking knob until it clears the locking notch. It
may be necessary to provide slight up/down pressure on the horizontal arm to release the lock.
5. Rotate the locking knob 90 degrees and release. In the unlocked position, the knob should
appear as shown in Figure 9-109. Verify that the vertical carriage can freely move up/down.
Figure 9-109 Column vertical lock in normal (unlocked) position
6. Install the column top cover.


None required.
9.6.2 Column

Required persons: 2
Timing (min): 180

• Cable ties
• HV Tube Grease (GE part# 46-125224P3, Silicon Grease) or equivalent

Item: Column
Quantity: 1
9.6.2.2.4 Safety

• Remove the column skirt covers. See 9.1.6 Column skirt cover removal.
9.6.2.3 Procedure
1. Lock the vertical carriage. See 9.6.1 Engaging vertical lock.
2. Remove the collimator. See 9.6.9.1 Collimator replacement.
3. Remove the X-ray tube. See 9.6.8 Toshiba X-ray tube.
4. Remove the horizontal arm. See 9.6.3 Horizontal arm assembly.
5. See Figure 9-110. Remove the cable bracket (Item 1) from the side of the column.
Item Description
1 Column cable bracket
2 Column
Figure 9-110 Column cable bracket
6. Mark and remove all cable ties as necessary to free the column of any cable restraints or
obstructions.

7. See Figure 9-111. Use a large screwdriver at the base of the vertical column to move the
spring-loaded column rotational detent arm (Item 1) toward the front of the unit. From
underneath the base, insert a 5/32" (4 mm) allen wrench into the hole in the cover (Item 2) to
hold the rotational detent arm away from the column.
1 2
Item Description
1 Spring-loaded column rotational detent arm
2 Hole to lock column rotational detent arm
Figure 9-111 Release column rotational detent
8. See Figure 9-112. Rotate the column to obtain access to the column bolt (Item1), then remove
the bolt.
Item Description
1 Column mounting bolt
2 Column
Figure 9-112 Column mounting bolt
9. Using two people, lift the column off of the chassis and set aside.
10. Using two people, lift the new column into position on the chassis and install the column
mounting bolt. Torque to 90 N-m (66.4 lb-ft) - no thread locker is used.
11. Remove the allen wrench that was used to hold the rotational detent arm.
12. Install the cable bracket onto the column.
13. Install the horizontal arm.
14. Install the X-ray tube. See Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23 for cable routing at the
rear of the X-ray tube.
15. Install the collimator.
16. Install cable brackets and cable ties.
17. Unlock the vertical carriage.
19. Install the column skirt covers.

1. Perform the following mechanical alignments:
- Check and adjust the mechanical alignment of the column rotational detent position. See
6.1.3 Column rotational detent procedure on page 119.
- Check and adjust the Column Balance. See 6.1.1 Column balance procedure on
page 113.
- Tube column and arm - see Tube column and arm on page 36
- X-ray - see X-ray on page 37
- Light field to X-ray field alignment - see 7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray field alignment
on page 125
4. For Optima XR220amx and Optima XR200amx with Digital Upgrade:
- Perform QAP - refer to the Installation Manual, Chapter 6 - Detector checks and QAP
9.6.3 Horizontal arm assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• HV Tube Grease (GE part#46-125224P3, Silicon Grease) or equivalent
• Cable ties

Item: Horizontal arm assembly
Quantity: 1
9.6.3.2.4 Safety

9.6.3.3 Procedure
3. Remove the tube covers. See 9.1.7 Tube head cover removal.
4. Lightly mark the positions of all cable clamps and cable ties on the side of the existing cables,
then cut and remove the cable ties.
5. See Figure 9-113. Remove the cable clamp (Item 1) from the side of the horizontal arm (Item
2).
Item Description
1 Horizontal arm cable bracket
2 Horizontal arm
Figure 9-113 Horizontal arm cable bracket

6. See Figure 9-114. Remove the three tube yoke mounting screws (Item 1) from the horizontal
arm (Item 2).
1 2
Item Description
1 Tube yoke mounting screws (3 used)
2 Horizontal arm
3 X-ray tube/yoke assembly
Figure 9-114 X-ray tube mount
7. Tip the front of the X-ray tube assembly upward and slide the assembly out of the horizontal
arm. Set the assembly on the work surface.
8. See Figure 9-115. Remove the two mounting screws (Item 1) and the mounting block (Item 2)
from the horizontal arm (Item 3).
4 1
2
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Mounting block
3 Horizontal arm
4 Vertical carriage
Figure 9-115 Horizontal arm
9. Tip the front of the horizontal arm upward and lift the arm off of the vertical carriage (Item 4).
Set the old horizontal arm aside on the work surface.
10. Install the new horizontal arm, mounting block and mounting screws. Torque to 7.9 N-m (5.8
lb-ft) - no thread locker is used.
11. Install the X-ray tube and yoke assembly. Apply thread locker (Loctite 271 or equivalent) and
torque the 3 fasteners as follows;
- Single top fastener = 26.8 N-m (19.9 lb-ft)
- Two bottom fasteners = 13.3 N-m (9.8 lb-ft )
12. Install the cable bracket to the side of the horizontal arm. Route the cables and apply cable ties
as shown in Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23.
13. Install new cable ties on the remainder of the cable drape.
14. Install the tube covers.
15. Install the collimator.

1. Perform the following mechanical alignments:
- Check and adjust the Column Balance. See 6.1.1 Column balance procedure on
page 113.
- X-ray - see X-ray on page 37
on page 125
9.6.4 Horizontal arm brake cable assembly with track

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30

• Cable ties

Item: Horizontal arm brake cable assembly with track
Quantity: 1
9.6.4.2.4 Safety

• Remove the side covers, front covers and front bin. See 9.1.4 Front bin removal on page 320.
9.6.4.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-116. Disconnect the horizontal arm brake cable from the Thorax bulkhead (J1).
J1
Figure 9-116 Horizontal arm brake cable - Thorax bulkhead J1
Item Description

4. Follow the horizontal arm brake cable back through the cable drape. At each existing cable
tie, mark the location of the cable tie on an adjacent cable, then cut and remove the cable tie.
5. Position the horizontal arm to a convenient work position, then lock the vertical carriage. See
9.6.1 Engaging vertical lock.
6. See Figure 9-119. Remove the bushing (Item 2) from the horizontal arm.
7. Remove the two bracket mounting screws (Item 3) from the bottom of the horizontal arm.
8. Adjust the horizontal arm extension so that the cable mounting screws (Item 5) line up with the
access opening (Item 4). Remove the two screws.
3 1
Item Description
1 Horizontal arm brake cable
2 Bushing
3 Bracket mounting screws
4 Access opening
5 Cable mounting screws
Figure 9-119 Horizontal arm brake cable

9. See Figure 9-120. Inside the horizontal arm, disconnect the cable from the plug (Item 1).
Item Description
1 Horizontal arm brake cable plug
Figure 9-120 Horizontal arm brake cable plug
10. Remove the old horizontal arm cable.

11. Route the new cable through the opening in the side of the horizontal arm.
12. Line up the mounting bracket and install the two screws (see Figure 9-119 Item 2).
13. Inside the horizontal arm, connect the cable to the plug (see Figure 9-120 Item 1).
14. Adjust the horizontal arm extension so that the cable mounting screw bracket (see Figure 9-
119 Item 5) lines up with the access opening (see Figure 9-119 Item 4). Install the two screws.
15. Install the bushing (see Figure 9-119 Item 2) in the side of the horizontal arm.
16. Route the horizontal arm brake cable back through the cable drape to the Thorax bulkhead,
attaching cable ties at the marks placed in Step 4 above.
17. Arrange the cable bundle as shown in Figure 9-121, use a cable tie to maintain cable
positions.
clamp.
C
1 2
4 3
Item Description
21. Plug the horizontal arm brake cable into J1 on the Thorax bulkhead.
25. Install the front bin.
• Tube column and arm - see Tube column and arm on page 36

9.6.5 Tube mount - detent side (cathode side)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• Cable ties

Item: Tube mount - detent side (cathode side)
Quantity: 1
Note 1: A newer version of this part has been introduced. It is not backward-compatible with the
original version. If replacing the original version, you must replace BOTH sides with the newer
version. The newer version is physically longer. Mixing old and new versions results in tube
attachment mis-alignment. See Figure 9-122 for identification of mounts.
Item Description
1 A thickness notch in this location identifies a newer version tube mount
Figure 9-122 Tube mount identification
Note 2: The yolk mounting fasteners for the new version are longer than the original version. These
CRUSH fasteners are provided with the new version replacement part and MUST be used.
HAZARD
9.6.5.2.4 Safety

• Remove the collimator. See 9.6.9 Collimator.
• Remove the tube covers. See 9.1.7 Tube head cover removal.
9.6.5.3 Procedure
1. Position the unit next to a work surface that can safely support the X-ray tube/yoke assembly.
4. Remove the HV cables from the X-ray tube wells. Protect the HV cable ends to prevent
damage.
5. Disconnect the rotor cable from the generator J6 connector, and free the rotor cable from the
cable drape marking the location of the cable ties.

arm (Item 2).
1 2
Item Description
2 Horizontal arm
8. See Figure 9-124. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the cathode end
cap (Item 2).
1
6
4
See Note 1
3
Note 1: Do NOT loosen or disturb the screws in this location. These are non-
servicable items and require specialized fixtures for proper assembly. This applies
to both the cathode and anode sides.
Item Description
1 End cap mounting screws (4 used on each end cap)
2 Cathode end cap and tube mount
3 Anode end cap and tube mount
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke
6 Tube mount screws (4 used on each side)
New version length = 20 mm (0.78 in.) - used in Step 12
9. Remove the four tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
10. Remove the cathode end cap / tube mount assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
11. Install the new end cap / tube mount assembly onto the X-ray tube.
12. Install and tighten the four tube mount screws (apply thread locker and torque to 13.2 N-m (9.7
lb-ft)) and the four end cap screws (apply thread locker and torque to 2.5 N-m (1.8 lb-ft)).

13. Tip the front of the X-ray tube assembly upward and slide the assembly into the horizontal arm.
15. Route and connect the rotor cable to the generator.
17. Install the collimator. Route and connect the collimator cable to the Thorax bulkhead J4 and
J5 connectors and chassis ground.
18. Insert the HV cables into the X-ray tube HV wells and tighten the mounting rings. Make sure
that the cable markings (Tube Anode or Tube Cathode) match up with the X-ray tube marking
(Anode or Cathode). See Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23 for cable routing at the rear
of the X-ray tube, if necessary.
19. Replace the cable ties and secure the cable drape.
on page 125
9.6.6 Tube mount - friction side (anode side)

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• Cable ties

Item: Tube mount - friction side (anode side)
Quantity: 1
Note 1: A newer version of this part has been introduced. It is not backward-compatible with the
original version. If replacing the original version, you must replacement BOTH sides with the newer
version. The newer version is physically longer. Mixing old and new versions results in tube
attachment mis-alignment. See Figure 9-125 for identification of mounts.
Item Description
1 A thickness notch in this location identifies a newer version tube mount
Figure 9-125 Tube mount identification
Note 2: The yolk mounting fasteners for the new version are longer than the original version. These
CRUSH fasteners are provided with the new version replacement part and MUST be used.
HAZARD
9.6.6.2.4 Safety


9.6.6.3 Procedure
4. Remove the HV cables from the X-ray tube wells. Protect the HV cables to prevent damage.
arm (Item 2).
1 2
Item Description
2 Horizontal arm
8. See Figure 9-127. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the anode end cap
(Item 3).
1
6
4
See Note 1
3
Note 1: Do NOT loosen or disturb the screws in this location. These are non-
servicable items and require specialized fixtures for proper assembly. This applies
to both the cathode and anode sides.
Item Description
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke
New version length = 20 mm (0.78 in.) - used in Step 12
9. Remove the four tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
10. Remove the anode end cap / tube mount assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
11. Install the new end cap / tube mount assembly onto the X-ray tube.
12. Install and tighten the four tube mount screws (apply thread locker and torque to 13.2 N-m (9.7
lb-ft)) and the four end cap screws (apply thread locker and torque to 2.5 N-m (1.8 lb-ft)).

on page 125
9.6.7 Tube yoke assembly

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 120

• Cable ties

Item: Tube yoke assembly
Quantity: 1
9.6.7.2.4 Safety


9.6.7.3 Procedure
arm (Item 2).
1 2
Item Description
2 Horizontal arm
8. See Figure 9-129. Remove the eight tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
1
6
Item Description
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke

9. See Figure 9-130. Remove the mounting screws (Item 1) and cable bracket (Item 2) from the
old yoke (Item 3) and install them on the new yoke. Torque to 0.8 N-m (0.6 lb-ft) - no thread
locker is used.
Item Description
1 Mounting screws
2 Cable bracket
3 Yoke
Figure 9-130 Yoke
10. Install the new yoke. Install and tighten the eight tube mount screws. Torque to 13.2 N-m (9.7
lb-ft) - no thread locker is used.
on page 125
9.6.8 Toshiba X-ray tube

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 6 hrs


Item: Toshiba X-ray tube
Quantity: 1
9.6.8.2.4 Safety


9.6.8.3 Procedure
arm (Item 2).
1 2
Item Description
2 Horizontal arm
8. See Figure 9-132. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the cathode end
cap (Item 2).
1
6
Item Description
4 X-ray tube
5 Yoke
9. Remove the four cathode-side tube mount screws (Item 6) from the yoke (Item 5).
10. Remove the cathode end cap / tube mount assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
11. Remove the four end cap mounting screws (Item 1) from the anode end cap (Item 3).
12. Remove the anode end cap / tube mount / yoke assembly from the X-ray tube (Item 4).
13. Use a HV spanner wrench (see Figure 9-133) to loosen and remove the HV cable tightening
rings, then remove the cables from the HV wells.
Figure 9-133 HV cable spanner wrench
14. Disconnect the stator wires from the old X-ray tube.

15. Connect the stator wires to the new X-ray tube.
Note: HV cables must be lubricated with silicone grease (GE P/N 46-125224P3 or equivalent) before
insertion into the X-ray tube HV wells. The grease is shipped with the X-ray tube.
16. Insert the HV cables into the new X-ray tube HV wells and tighten the mounting rings. Make
sure that the cable markings (Tube Anode or Tube Cathode) match up with the X-ray tube
marking (Anode or Cathode). See Figure 9-21, Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23 for cable routing
at the rear of the X-ray tube, if necessary.
17. Install the anode end cap / tube mount assembly on the X-ray tube. Install and tighten the four
end cap mounting screws (apply thread locker and torque to 2.5 N-m (1.8 lb-ft)) and the four
tube mount screws (torque to 13.2 N-m (9.7 lb-ft) - no thread locker is used).
18. Install the cathode end cap / tube mount assembly on the X-ray tube. Install and tighten the
four end cap mounting screws (apply thread locker and torque to 2.5 N-m (1.8 lb-ft) and the
four tube mount screws (torque to 13.2 N-m (9.7 lb-ft) - no thread locker is used).
on page 125
- Half-value layer - see Table 7-17 Beam quality data (half value layer) on page 138
page 135
9.6.9 Collimator
9.6.9.1 Collimator replacement
9.6.9.1.1 Personnel requirements

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 60
9.6.9.1.2 Preliminary requirements

• One Hexagon Wrench for M3 screws
• Cable ties

Item: Collimator
Quantity: 1
9.6.9.1.6 Safety
• Lead Locations. See Figure 9-134.
1
2
3
Item Description
1 Lead cone
2 Filter
3 Rear cover - lead plate pasted inside
Figure 9-134 Lead locations


• Remove the side covers, front covers and front bin. See 9.1.4 Front bin removal on page 320.
9.6.9.1.8 Procedure
See Figure 9-135. Collimator dismounting consists of disconnecting the collimator cable, opening
the back covers of the suspending lock sets, unlocking the suspending lock sets, pulling out the
rotation lock finger and lifting the collimator off of the interface ring.
2
5
Item Description
1 Handle
2 SID tape
3 Rotation lock handle
4 Suspending lock set (3 used)
5 Knob
6 Lamp switch
Figure 9-135 Installation and removal
2. See Figure 9-136. Disconnect the collimator cable from the Thorax bulkhead (J4, J5 and
ground).
J4
J5
Gnd
Figure 9-136 Collimator cable - Thorax bulkhead J4, J5, Gnd
Item Description

5. Follow the collimator cable back through the cable drape. At each existing cable tie, mark the
location of the cable tie on an adjacent cable, then cut and remove the cable tie.
6. Rotate the X-ray tube/collimator assembly 180 degrees (the bottom of the collimator faces
upward).
7. See Figure 9-139. Use a hex wrench to remove the screws and the back cover (Item 1) of the
suspending lock set. Repeat this step on all three back covers.
3 2 1
Item Description
1 Suspending lock set cover
2 Suspending lock finger
3 X-ray tube
4 Collimator
Figure 9-139 Suspending lock
8. See Figure 9-140. Pull out the three suspending lock fingers (Item 1). Use a small allen wrench
(Item 2) to hook the center of the lock finger screw and pull it straight outward until it locks into
the extended position.
Item Description
1 Suspending lock finger
2 Allen wench
Figure 9-140 Suspending lock

9. Rotate the handle of the rotation lock set counterclockwise until the lock finger cannot be
rotated any more.
LEAD HAZARD
• Do not touch lead cone or filter by hand without gloves.
• Do not let the lead cone touch anything during the collimator installation and removal process.
10. Carefully lift the old collimator off of the X-ray tube and set it aside.
11. On the new collimator:
12. Close the collimator blades
13. Rotate the handle of the rotation lock set counterclockwise until the lock finger cannot be
rotated any more
14. Open the suspending lock set covers and pull out the three lock fingers until they lock in the
extended position
15. Lift the collimator by holding the handle, then rotate the collimator and let the lead cone at the
bottom of collimator and its axis be perpendicular to tube flange’s mounting surface.
16. Put the collimator on the tube. Make sure the lead cone does not touch the tube flange during
this step.
17. Press the three buttons on the top of the three suspending lock sets to let the lock fingers pop
out.
DROP HAZARD
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO RED COLOR VISIBLE AT THE BACK OF EACH SUSPENDING
LOCK SET AFTER PRESSING THE SUSPENDING LOCK BUTTONS.
18. Install the three suspending lock set covers and six screws (the collimator can be rotated so
that the suspending lock set is oriented towards the rear of the X-ray tube; this will make it
easier to install the screws and covers).
19. Turn the handle of the rotation lock set until the black line on the handle shaft aligns to the
back surface of the rotation lock set.
20. Check the installation thoroughly for correct and safe mounting.
21. Rotate the X-ray tube/collimator assembly back to the normal position.
22. Mark the collimator cable 400 mm (~16 in.) from the body of the collimator. Position the cable
so the mark lines up with the cable support bracket and install a cable tie.
23. Route the collimator back through the cable drape to the Thorax bulkhead, attaching cable ties
at the marks placed in Step 5 above.
24. Plug the collimator cable into J4 and J5 on the Thorax bulkhead and attach the ground wire to
the chassis.
25. Arrange the cable bundle as shown in Figure 9-141, use a cable tie to maintain cable
positions.
clamp.
C
1 2
4 3
Item Description
30. Install the front bin.
33. Package the old collimator for return.
- Lamp (if HHS tests fail) - see 9.6.14 Collimator lamp on page 512
- Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR200amx) on page 128 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 129
on page 125
- Half-value layer - see 7.1.5.1 Measuring half value layer (HVL) on page 137

9.6.10 Dose Area Product (DAP) meter

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10

• None

Item: DAP meter
Quantity: 1
9.6.10.2.4 Safety
• None

9.6.10.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-142. Disconnect the DAP cable connector (Item 1).
3
1
Item Description
1 DAP cable connector
2 Latch
3 DAP meter
Figure 9-142 DAP
2. Release the latch (Item 2) and slide the DAP (Item 3) out of the collimator rails.
3. Install the new DAP into the collimator rails and push backwards until the latch engages.
4. Connect the DAP cable.
• X-ray - Dose report - see X-ray on page 37

• Light field intensity - see 7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity on page 124

9.6.11 SID tape measure

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10


Item: SID tape measure
Quantity: 1
9.6.11.2.4 Safety
• None

• None
9.6.11.3 Procedure
1. Remove the two screws and remove the tape cover. See Figure 9-143.
1
3
Item Description
1 Tape
2 Tape cover
3 Tape cover screws
Figure 9-143 SID tape measure replacement
2. Take the tape out of the tape cover.

3. Put a new tape into the tape cover.
4. Mount the tape cover and tighten the two screws with thread locker.
None

9.6.12 Collimator adjustment knob

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 10


Item: Collimator adjustment knob
Quantity: 1 (kit contains parts for one knob assembly)
9.6.12.2.4 Safety
• None

9.6.12.3 Procedure
1. Loosen the setscrew and remove the knob from the shaft. See Figure 9-144.
Item Description
1 Knob
2 Set screw
Figure 9-144 Knob replacement
2. Put the new knob onto the knob shaft.

3. Ensure that the knob is up against the indicator tightly, and tighten the setscrew with thread
locker (i.e. Loctite 242 [blue]).
• Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR200amx) on page 128 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR220amx
or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 129
• Light field to X-ray field alignment - see 7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray field alignment on
page 125
9.6.13 Collimator pointer

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• 2 triangular stickers
• 1 piece of paper

Item: Collimator pointer
Quantity: 1 (kit contains parts for one knob assembly)
9.6.13.2.4 Safety
• None


9.6.13.3 Procedure
1. Turn the knob counterclockwise until it cannot be rotated any more.
2. Attach a triangle sticker on the front cover and make one of its vertexes align with the indicator
line. See Figure 9-145.
Item Description
1 Attach temporary position markers here
Figure 9-145 Paste symbols to replace the indicator plate kit
3. Remove the knob (refer to 9.6.12.3 Procedure on page 508).

4. Loosen two setscrews to remove the indicator plate kit from the knob shaft. See Figure 9-146.
Item Description
1 Indicator plate kit
2 Set screws
3 Knob washer
Figure 9-146 Indicator plate kit replacement
5. Insert a paper between the knob washer and front cover.

6. Loosen the setscrews on the new indicator plate kit and mount it onto the knob shaft.
7. Press the indicator plate kit to the knob washer, and let the indicator point to the paste symbol’s
vertex.
8. Tighten the setscrews.
Note: Ensure both setscrews have been tightened before proceeding to the next step.
9. Mount the knob. See 9.6.12 Collimator adjustment knob.

10. Rotate the knob to ensure it can rotate smoothly.
11. Verify the field size indicator accuracy. See 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy
(Optima XR200amx) on page 128 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 129.
12. Remove the paper between the knob washer and the front cover.
13. Remove the triangle pasted on the front cover.

• Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR200amx) on page 128 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima XR220amx
or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 129
• Light field to X-ray field alignment - see 7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray field alignment on
page 125
9.6.14 Collimator lamp

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 30


Item: Collimator lamp
Quantity: 1
9.6.14.2.4 Safety
• None

9.6.14.3 Procedure
1. Rotate the tube and make the tube flange’s axis perpendicular to the ground with the bottom
of the collimator facing upward.
LEAD HAZARD
Do not touch the interior of the rear collimator cover without gloves.
2. Remove the four screws on the rear collimator cover, then remove the cover. See Figure 9-
147.
Item Description
1 Screws
Figure 9-147 Rear cover removal
3. Unplug the defective collimator lamp.

4. Make sure the screws which hold the lamp mask are tight.
POTENTIAL DAMAGE TO LAMP

When holding the new lamp, operator must wear clean cotton gloves.
5. Insert a new lamp in the lamp socket.

6. Make sure the filament of the new lamp is in the middle of the window on the lamp mask at
lateral orientation.
7. Mount the rear cover of the collimator and tighten the screws.

8. Turn the rotation lock handle until the black line on the handle shaft aligns to the back surface
of the rotation lock set.
9. Rotate the collimator to the desired position.
10. Verify if there is misalignment (refer to 7.1.3.2 Testing light field to X-ray field alignment on
page 125).
If there is misalignment in the N-S (lateral) orientation, then:
* Ensure the lamp position is according to the requirement of step 6 above.
* If the lamp position is correct, adjust the lamp support by loosening the screws. See
Figure 9-148.
Item Description
1 Adjustment screws
Figure 9-148 Lamp support adjustment
If there is misalignment in E-W (longitudinal) orientation, then:

* Ensure the lamp position is according to the requirement of step 4 above.
* If the screws are not loosened, adjust the lamp mask by loosening the screws, then
adjust orientation. See Figure 9-149.
1 2
Item Description
1 Adjust orientation
2 Screws for lamp mask
Figure 9-149 Lamp mask adjustment
11. Darken the exam room and check if the light field intensity fulfills the specification (refer to
7.1.3.1 Testing light intensity on page 124).
12. If the light field intensity does not fulfill the specification, remove the rear cover, and:
13. Check that the voltage at the collimator lamp is between 20 and 22 VDC.
14. Ensure the lamp position is according to the requirement of step 6.
15. If the lamp position is right, adjust the lamp mask to make it shade the filament smaller than
original position.
16. Repeat steps 10 through 15 above until misalignment and light intensity can both meet the
criteria of acceptance.
17. Apply thread locker (i.e. Loctite 242 [blue]) to the rear cover screws. Install the rear cover and
tighten the screws.
18. Remove LOTO from the system. See 1.2.3 Returning system to service on page 29
- Adjust the collimator lamp supply potentiometer R3 so that the voltage at the collimator
lamp is 20.0 - 22.0 VDC.
- Field size indicator accuracy - see 7.1.3.3 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR200amx) on page 128 or 7.1.3.4 Testing field size indicator accuracy (Optima
XR220amx or Optima XR200amx with digital upgrade) on page 129
on page 125

9.6.15 Collimator rotation lock finger

Required persons: 1
Timing (min): 20

• Cable ties

Item: Collimator rotation lock finger
Quantity: 1
9.6.15.2.4 Safety
• None

• Remove the collimator from the X-ray tube. See 9.6.9.1 Collimator replacement.
9.6.15.3 Procedure
1. See Figure 9-150. Remove the four mounting screws (Item 4) and the rotation lock cover (Item
3).
Item Description
1 Collimator
2 Rotation lock knob
3 Rotation lock cover
4 Rotation lock cover screws
Figure 9-150 Rotation lock
2. See Figure 9-151. Remove the rotation lock assembly (Item 2) from the collimator.
3. Remove the rotation lock finger (Item 1) from the rotation lock assembly (Item 2). Slightly
rotating the lock knob will make it easier to remove the lock finger.

Item Description
1 Rotation lock finger
2 Rotation lock assembly
Figure 9-151 Rotation lock finger assembly
4. Install the new lock finger. The wider end of the lock finger should be on the bottom, as shown
in Figure 9-151.
5. Install the rotation lock assembly and mounting screws on the collimator.
6. Install the collimator on the X-ray tube. See 9.6.9.1 Collimator replacement.
- Collimator (the 3 detent and 1 collimator rotation checks) - see Tube column and arm on
page 36
on page 125
Appendix A Printer Configuration

Information
Section A.1 Agfa Drystar 3000 printer parameters
Table A-1 Agfa Drystar 3000 printer configuration information
Tab Attribute Value Comments

DICOM Printer Label DRYSTAR3000 Or customers preference
Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE titles may be site-
network administrator specific, check with site
Network Address Enter value given by site
network administrator
Port Number 104 Port number may be site-
specific, check with site
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 79.4
Printer
Configuration Information PERCEPTION_LUT=LIN
EAR (no spaces)
Density Min. = 20, Max. = 300
Magnification Type CUBIC
Smooth Factor 140
Trim NO Not supported
Polarity NORMAL
Border Density BLACK
Empty Image Density BLACK
Printer Memory Size 40Mbyte
Select the desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2
allowed for this printer
Layouts
Slide formats Not applicable Not supported; do not
select
Printer configuration Page 519


8 x 10in Pixel width = 2388 Agfa layout - portrait 9006
Pixel height = 2972
10 x 12in Pixel width =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4256
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 5174
24 x 24cm Pixel width =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Agfa Drystar 3000 general comments

Supports clear and blue film. If medium selected (clear, paper) does not match the printer, the job
will be queued until the correct film is loaded.
Agfa layouts are specific to maximum printable area layouts. Consult the Agfa technical
representative to install custom layouts.
Only 14x17 film was tested with this printer.
Trim is not supported by this printer.
Note: Avoid print job failures by having printer vendor ensure that the Confirmation Level (DICOM
Connectivity) at the printer is set to Ø (accept all). Failure to set this level on the printer will result
in failed print jobs.
Agfa print layouts

Custom layout must be configured by printer vendor for accurate image sizing. In addition to the
above layouts, the following layouts must be installed by the Agfa print representative:
Table A-2 Agfa print layouts
Film size Format P/l Agfa layout

14 x 17 1:1 P 2411
14 x 17 1:2 P 9001
14 x 17 2:1 P 9000
14 x 17 2:2 P 9002
14 x 17 1:1 L 2511
Page 520 Printer configuration


14 x 17 1:2 L 9003
14 x 17 2:1 L 9004
14 x 17 2:2 L 9005
11 x 14 1:1 P 9014
11 x 14 1:2 P 9102
11 x 14 2:1 P 9103
11 x 14 2:2 P 9104
11 x 14 1:1 L 9018
11 x 14 1:2 L 9202
11 x 14 2:1 L 9203
11 x 14 2:2 L 9204
8 x 10 1:1 P 9006
8 x 10 1:2 P 9009
8 x 10 2:1 P 9008
8 x 10 2:2 P 9010
8 x 10 1:1 L 9007
8 x 10 1:2 L 9012
8 x 10 2:1 L 9011
8 x 10 2:2 L 9013

Section A.2 Agfa Drystar 5500 printer parameters

DICOM Printer Label DRYSTAR5500 Or customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information LUT=0.0
Smooth Factor 140
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select


8 x 10in Pixel width = 3852
Pixel height = 4300
Pixel height = 5280
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 7788
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Agfa print layouts

Custom layout must be configured by printer vendor for accurate image sizing. In addition to the
above layouts, the following layouts must be installed by the Agfa print representative:

14 x 17 1:1 P 2411
14 x 17 1:2 P 9001
14 x 17 2:1 P 9000
14 x 17 2:2 P 9002
14 x 17 1:1 L 2511
14 x 17 1:2 L 9003
14 x 17 2:1 L 9004
14 x 17 2:2 L 9005
11 x 14 1:1 P 9014
11 x 14 1:2 P 9102
11 x 14 2:1 P 9103
11 x 14 2:2 P 9104
11 x 14 1:1 L 9018
11 x 14 1:2 L 9202
11 x 14 2:1 L 9203
11 x 14 2:2 L 9204


8 x 10 1:1 P 9006
8 x 10 1:2 P 9009
8 x 10 2:1 P 9008
8 x 10 2:2 P 9010
8 x 10 1:1 L 9007
8 x 10 1:2 L 9012
8 x 10 2:1 L 9011
8 x 10 2:2 L 9013
Section A.3 Codonics Horizon printer parameters
Table A-5 Codonics Horizon printer configuration information

DICOM Printer Label HORIZON Or customers preference
Pixel Depth 12
Configuration Information LUT=LINEAR
Printer
Magnification Type REPLICATE
Smooth Factor 0 Not supported
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Border Density BLACK Can also pass OD value of
0-310
Empty Image Density BLACK Can also pass OD value of
0-310
Select the desired layouts
Layouts allowed for this printer
Slide formats

Table A-5 Codonics Horizon printer configuration information

Pixel height = 2790
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4072
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 5025
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Codonics Horizon general comments

Codonics Horizon printer supports clear film, blue film and paper.
Only 8 x 10 and 14 x 17 inch film formats have been validated.
Other smoothing and sharpening algorithms for magnification type are supported.
Consult Codonics technical representative to install customer preferences if desired.

Section A.4 Fuji FM DPL printer parameters
Table A-6 Fuji FM DPL printer configuration information

DICOM Printer Label FUJIFMDPL Or customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 100
Printer Configuration Information CS000
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select

Table A-6 Fuji FM DPL printer configuration information

Pixel height = 2510
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 3600
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4240
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Fuji FM DPL general comments

The following configurations must be configured by the Fuji printer representative to print correctly
sized images:
• LUT1 as SAR17 for calling AE_TITLE.
• Trim width at 1 pixel for calling AE_TITLE.
• Globally configure “a margin between image” for 0 pixels.
• Globally configure “Image layout” for spread.

Section A.5 Fuji DryPix 1000 printer parameters
Table A-7 Fuji DryPix 1000 printer configuration information

DICOM Printer Label DRYPIX1000 Or customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select


Pixel height = 2877
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4096
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Fuji DryPix 1000 general comments

sized images:
• LUT1 as SAR17 for calling AE_TITLE.-Trim width at 1 pixel for calling AE_TITLE.
• A densitometer filter (FUJI part number 605S0003) must be used when performing printer
calibration.


Pixel Depth 12
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Layouts
select


Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4972
Pixel height =
Pixel height =

sized images:
calibration.
Note: Only 14x17 film should be used with this printer. Any other film size used may print films with
incorrect measurements.


Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE Titles may be site-
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size (micron) 50
Smooth Factor SHARP
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats
Pixel height = 4819
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 7043
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =


sized images:
calibration.
Note: Only 14x17 film should be used with this printer. Any other film size used may print films with
incorrect measurements.
Section A.8 Kodak 8200 printer parameters
Table A-10 Kodak 8200 printer configuration information

DICOM Printer Label KODAK8200 Or customer preference
Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE Titles may be site-
Pixel Depth 12
Printer
Configuration Information LUT=Wkstn2a.w87,2 (no
spaces)
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Select the desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2 1:2 only valid for portrait
Layouts allowed for this printer 2:1 only valid for landscape
Slide formats


Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4277
Pixel height =
Pixel height =


Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information LUT=Wkstn2a.w87,2 (no

spaces)
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats Not applicable Not supported; do not select


Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 4277
Pixel height =
Pixel height =


Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information LUT=Wkstn2a.w87,2 (no

spaces)
Smooth Factor 15
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Slide formats Not applicable Not supported; do not select


Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 5221
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Kodak 8700 general comments

The following configurations must be configured by the Kodak printer representative:
• Calling AE_TITLE must be declared in 9410 host table or print will be rejected.
• Pixel correction turned off.
• TFT emulation enabled. Landscape printing will be functional only if a Kodak 8800 is installed.
Note: Customer will get incorrect image sizing if unsupported formats (portrait 2:1 or landscape 1:2) are
used.


Application Entry Title Enter value given by site AE titles may be site-specific,
network administrator check with site
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Pixel Size 38
(micron)
Printer Configuration LUT=Ver693c0.w87,6
Information
Smooth Factor 40
Trim NO
Polarity NORMAL
Printer Memory Size 40Mbytes
Select desired layouts 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2 Check at least one (1:1); more
Layouts allowed for this printer as desired
Slide formats


Pixel height = 6286
Pixel height = 7342
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 8896
Film Sizes
Pixel height =8662
Pixel height = 10612
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Section A.12 Konica Dry Pro 793 printer parameters

DICOM Printer Label Customer preference
Pixel Depth 12
Printer Configuration Information Dicom
Smooth Factor 1
Trim NO Not supported
Polarity NORMAL
Printer Memory Size 512


Select the desired layouts 1:1, 2:1, 1:2, 4:1, 6:1
Slide formats
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 6826
Pixel height =
Pixel height =
Film Sizes
Pixel height =
Pixel height = 9725
Pixel height =
Pixel height =


Glossary
ADC or A/D Analog to digital converter.
AE Title Application entity title. Name used to identify the DICOM nodes communicating to each other. AE
titles need to be locally unique, and are usually managed by a system administrator. They are case-
sensitive and 16 bytes long, and are configured before initializing a DICOM connection.
BIST Built in self test.
CAN Controller area network. A serial communication method.
CANOPEN Software communications protocol used in the CAN. Often called CAN.
CR- Mode where, if the PACS rejects DX images, CR images are sent instead. This occurs only if the
FALLBACK PACS does not support DX modality images, or if the PACS is configured to reject DX modality
images.
DAP METER Dose area product meter.
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine. A standard for distributing and viewing medical
images regardless of the source.
ELECTRO- A transfer of electrostatic charge between objects at different potentials caused by direct contact or
STATIC induced by an electrostatic field.
DISCHARGE
(ESD)
ESD Electrostatic discharge
FPGA Field programmable gate array. Programmed by the CPU core after a reset and handles all the
exposure control logic including the system interface real-time lines.
FRU Field replaceable unit. Spare part. This is a defined and GE-sanctioned assembly or component
specifically designated as replaceable outside GE’s controlled manufacturing or repair facilities.
GEHC General Electric Healthcare.
HHS United States Department of Health and Human Services. “HHS” is often used to refer to the
specific testing procedures defined in 21CFR regulations.
HV High voltage.
LAT Lateral.
LFC Load from cold. Complete software load.
LONG Longitudinal.
LOTO Lock out/tag out. Process defined by GEHC to ensure the safety of employees, specifically the
process of energy control for service activities of GE products.
LSL Lower specification limit.

Page 543
LUT Look-up table.
MAINS Hospital-supplied AC power.
OLC On-Line Center. GE Healthcare department that provides support to field service personnel.
OS Operating system.
POS Positioner.
PWA Printed wire board. Synonymous with printed circuit board (PCB).
RAD Radiography.
SID Source to image distance. Distance from the X-ray tube focal spot to the image plane (detector or
image intensifier).
SPGP System power ground point.
SUIF Service user interface.
TORQUE 1 N-m = 0.738 ft-lbs = 8.85 in-lbs.
UIF User interface.
USL Upper specification limit.
Page 544
© 2011, General Electric Company.
GE Medical Systems, a General Electric Company, going to market as GE Healthcare.
3000 N. Grandview Boulevard
Waukesha, Wisconsin 53188
USA
www.gehealthcare.com
546

Optima XR200amx/XR220amx Exclusive System Manual: Front Cover

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Optima XR200amx/XR220amx Exclusive System Manual: Front Cover

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Front cover

GE EXCLUSIVE USE ONLY

Healthcare Manufacturing, Engineering and Service personnel.

Direction 5336120-1EN, Rev 9

WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENT

DANGER - Risk of Explosion

ATTENTION - Danger d’Explosion

TECHNICAL MANUAL UPDATES

OMISSIONS AND ERRORS

Revision Date Reason for change

Revision Date Reason for change

Preface Publication Conventions

Safety & Hazard Information

Text Format of Signal Words

• Destruction of a disk drive

Symbols and Pictorials Used

keep_up magnetic biohazard compressgas ppe-hearing

fragile impact corrosive heavyobject ppe-2people

static_elec heat general laser ppe-respitory

keep_dry pinch radiation poisongas ppe-loto

general explosive electrical flammable ppe-eye

torque crush/mechanical tipping Read Manual ppe-gloves

ce instuction poisonmatl entanglement instuction

EXAMPLES OF PREFIXES USED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION:

Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles

Buttons, Switches and Keyboard Inputs (Hard & Soft Keys)

Chapter 2 Planned Maintenance.................................................................... 33

Chapter 3 System data and software ............................................................ 43

Table of Contents Page 17

Chapter 4 Configuration ................................................................................. 53

Page 18 Table of Contents

5.1.1 Saving changes............................................................................................................ 99

Chapter 6 Mechanical adjustment procedures .......................................... 113

Chapter 7 Regulatory testing ....................................................................... 123

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 153

Table of Contents Page 19

8.3.2 Bscan toolbar definitions ............................................................................................ 163

Chapter 9 Replacement procedures............................................................ 313

Page 20 Table of Contents

9.5.3 Locust drive board fuses ............................................................................................ 375

Table of Contents Page 21

9.6.13 Collimator pointer ..................................................................................................... 509

Appendix A Printer Configuration Information............................................... 519

Page 22 Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin

Section 1.1 Energy sources

Energy source Yes/No Location of energy Magnitude of energy

Type of equipment and/or method selected to dissipate or isolate stored energy:

Type of equipment and/or method used to ensure disconnections:

Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin Page 23

Section 1.2 Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO) procedure for electrical

1.2.1 Preparing for LOTO

Figure 1-1 LOTO kit contents

Figure 1-2 Electrical energy lockout locations

Chapter 1 Safety / Before You Begin Page 25

1.2.2 Performing LOTO

Figure 1-3 Circuit breaker (E2) in OFF position